&RS\ULJKW�,QIRUPDWLRQThis manual is © 1994 Dynapro Technologies Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted manual in whole or in part, by any means,electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without written permission of Dynapro TechnologiesInc., is prohibited.

,PSRUWDQW�8VHU�,QIRUPDWLRQBecause of the variety of uses for the product described in this publication, those responsible forapplication and use of this product must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have beentaken to ensure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements,including any applicable laws, regulations, codes, and standards.

The illustrations, charts, sample programs, and examples shown in this publication are intendedsolely for the purposes of example. Because there are so many variables and requirementsassociated with any particular installation, Dynapro Technologies Inc. does not assumeresponsibility or liability, including intellectual property liability, for actual use based on theexamples shown in this publication.

)&&�&RPSOLDQFH“Warning: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class Adigital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercialenvironment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to causeharmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at hisown expense.”

“Any modifications or changes to this product not expressly approved in writing by themanufacturer responsible for compliance to Federal Regulations could void the user’s authorityto operate this product within the Laws and Regulations of the Federal CommunicationsCommission.”

(GLWLRQ�,QIRUPDWLRQDocument Number: 80-0279First Edition: July 1994Second Edition: December 1994

7UDGHPDUNVDynapro and ErgoTouch are registered trademarks of Dynapro Systems Inc. All other brand andproduct names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and arehereby acknowledged.

(UJR7RXFK�7&6�'RFXPHQWDWLRQ�8SGDWHV

8SGDWH��'XDO�6FDQ�3DVVLYH��'63��&RORU�/&'This amends the information supplied in the ErgoTouch TCS Installation Guide, Second Edition,December 1994. This information was originally published as Document 80-0437.

ErgoTouch’s DSP display has been enhanced. Specifications for the new display are:

• 256 colors

• Display size: 8.43” ( 21.4 cm) wide x 6.35” (16.1 cm) highDiagonal: 10.4” (26.42 cm)

• Single backlight

• Contrast ratio: 30

• Viewing angle: horizontal: -30° to +30°vertical: -15° to +25°

8SGDWH��6HWXS�3DUDPHWHU�&KDQJHThis complements the information supplied in the ErgoTouch TCS Installation Guide, SecondEdition, December 1994. This information was originally published as Document 80-0463.

A new function (NO HOST) has been added to the “Display Activity” Setup parameter. Inaddition to the ON, OFF and TIMEOUT selections, the user can now select NO HOST.

Selecting NO HOST causes the display to turn off automatically after 30 minutes of inactivity(similar to the TIMEOUT selection). After the display has turned off (timed out), only activitiesby the user will turn the display back on, (that is, touch or keystroke activities, but not the host’scommunications activities).

7DEOH�RI�&RQWHQWV

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION..........................................................................................1-1

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Features..................................................................................................................................................1-1 About This Guide....................................................................................................................................1-2 Related Documents.................................................................................................................................1-2

CHAPTER 2 INTERFACING TO THE HOST COMPUTER............................................................2-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1 The Serial Interface ................................................................................................................................2-1 Serial Data Composition ........................................................................................................................2-2 Communication Standards .....................................................................................................................2-5 RS-422 and RS-485 ................................................................................................................................2-8 Preventing and Detecting Errors ...........................................................................................................2-9 Buffer Overflow Control.........................................................................................................................2-9

CHAPTER 3 PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW ....................................................................................3-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1 RELATED ANSI STANDARDS................................................................................................................ 3-1 COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENTS.................................................................................................. 3-2 COMMUNICATION CODES.................................................................................................................... 3-2 CHARACTER SETS .................................................................................................................................. 3-2

Control Codes.........................................................................................................................................3-2 Graphic Codes........................................................................................................................................3-4

TCS COMMANDS..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 TYPES OF COMMANDS.......................................................................................................................... 3-5

Local Commands....................................................................................................................................3-5 Remote Commands .................................................................................................................................3-6 Local/Remote Commands.......................................................................................................................3-6

CONTROL STRINGS ................................................................................................................................ 3-7 Simple Escape Sequences .......................................................................................................................3-7 Device Control Strings ...........................................................................................................................3-7 Control Sequences..................................................................................................................................3-8 Control Sequence Parameters ................................................................................................................3-9 Numeric Parameters...............................................................................................................................3-9 Selective Parameters ............................................................................................................................3-10 How the TCS Interprets Control Sequences .........................................................................................3-10 Canceling Control Strings....................................................................................................................3-11 Errors in Control Strings......................................................................................................................3-11

HOW TO GENERATE REMOTE COMMANDS ................................................................................... 3-12 STATUS REPORT SUMMARY.............................................................................................................. 3-13

Summary of Status Queries and Responses ..........................................................................................3-13 SUMMARY OF SELECTABLE MODES ............................................................................................... 3-17 TCS MODE COMMANDS ...................................................................................................................... 3-19

Reset Mode Command [RM] (Remote) ................................................................................................3-20 Set Mode Command [SM] (Remote).....................................................................................................3-22

COLOR TCS: SUMMARY OF COLOR PROGRAMMING.................................................................... 3-24 Displaying and Erasing Color Characteristics ....................................................................................3-24 Highlighting Color Characters ............................................................................................................3-24 Reversing Foreground and Background Colors ..................................................................................3-24 Concealing Color Characters ..............................................................................................................3-25 Reading a Character’s Attributes.........................................................................................................3-25 Color Controls on the Setup Screen .....................................................................................................3-25

CHAPTER 4 CONTROLLING THE SETUP SCREEN AND SERIAL INTERFACE ....................4-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1 TCS FUNCTIONAL VOLATILITY .......................................................................................................... 4-1 SETUP SCREEN PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS...................................................................... 4-5

Keyboard Lockout ..................................................................................................................................4-5 Touch Panel Lockout..............................................................................................................................4-5 Display Activity ......................................................................................................................................4-5 Display Contents ....................................................................................................................................4-5 Host Communication during Setup Session............................................................................................4-6 Methods of Changing Setup Parameters ................................................................................................4-6 Color TCS Setup Screen Programming Considerations.........................................................................4-7 User/Host Conflict Resolution................................................................................................................4-8 Permanence of Changes to Setup Parameters........................................................................................4-9

SETUP SCREEN COMMANDS.............................................................................................................. 4-10 Setup Lockout Mode Command {FSULM} (Remote) ...........................................................................4-11 Save Setup Command {FSSU} (Local/Remote) ....................................................................................4-12 Recall Setup Command {FRSU} (Local/Remote) .................................................................................4-13 Reset Command [RIS] (Local Remote) ................................................................................................4-14

COMMUNICATION COMMANDS........................................................................................................ 4-16 Address Command (Local) ...................................................................................................................4-17 Baud Rate Command (Local) ...............................................................................................................4-20 Data Bits Command (Local).................................................................................................................4-21 Parity Enable Command (Local)..........................................................................................................4-22 Parity Sense Command (Local)............................................................................................................4-23 Stop Bits Command (Local)..................................................................................................................4-24 XON/XOFF Mode Command (Local)...................................................................................................4-25 Local/Remote Mode Command (Local)................................................................................................4-27 Hardware Handshake (Local) ..............................................................................................................4-28 Transmit Mode Command (Local)........................................................................................................4-29 Reporting Format Command {FRF} (Remote).....................................................................................4-30 Clear User Inputs Command {FCUI} (Remote) ...................................................................................4-32

COMMUNICATION MONITOR ............................................................................................................ 4-33 Entering and Exiting the Communication Monitor ..............................................................................4-33 How the Communication Monitor Displays Characters ......................................................................4-33 TCS Operation While the Communication Monitor is Active...............................................................4-34 Using the Communication Monitor ......................................................................................................4-36

CHAPTER 5 DISPLAYING CHARACTERS ........................................................................................5-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 5-1 Displaying Characters............................................................................................................................5-1 The Cursor..............................................................................................................................................5-2 Format Effectors.....................................................................................................................................5-3

OVERVIEW OF SCREEN MEMORY ....................................................................................................... 5-5 Introduction............................................................................................................................................5-5 Referring to Screens ...............................................................................................................................5-5 Selecting a Screen for Editing ................................................................................................................5-5 Screen Memory Allocation .....................................................................................................................5-6 Terminology: "Screen" vs. "Display" .....................................................................................................5-7

SCREEN MEMORY COMMANDS .......................................................................................................... 5-8 Initialize Screen Command {FIS} (Remote) ...........................................................................................5-9 Select Screen Command {FSS} (Remote) .............................................................................................5-11 Copy Screen Command {FCS}(Remote)...............................................................................................5-15 Delete Screen Command {FDS} (Remote) ...........................................................................................5-17 Delete All Screens Command {FDAS} (Remote)..................................................................................5-18 Read Screen Memory Remaining Command {FRSMR} (Remote)........................................................5-19 Read Screen Existence Command {FRSE} (Remote) ...........................................................................5-21

OVERVIEW OF CHARACTER SETS AND CHARACTER FONTS .................................................... 5-23 Static ASCII and Static Special Character Fonts .................................................................................5-23 Dynamic Character Fonts ....................................................................................................................5-23 Manipulating Character Sets and Fonts ..............................................................................................5-24 Default Conditions ...............................................................................................................................5-25 Volatility of the Dynamic Character Fonts ..........................................................................................5-26 Select Character Set Command [SCS] (Remote) .................................................................................5-27 Map Character Font Command {FMCF} (Remote) .............................................................................5-29 Copy Character Font Command {FCCF} (Remote).............................................................................5-34 Down-Line Load Character Font Command {FDLCF} (Remote) .......................................................5-36

CHARACTER DISPLAYING COMMANDS.......................................................................................... 5-45 Color Features .....................................................................................................................................5-45 Display Double-Width Line Command {DECDWL} (Remote).............................................................5-46 Display Double-Size Line Command {DECDHL} (Remote) ................................................................5-47 Place Double-Size Line Command {FDSL} (Remote)..........................................................................5-48 Display Normal Line Command (DECSWL) (Remote).........................................................................5-50 Draw Bar for Bar Chart Command {FDBB} (Remote) ........................................................................5-51 Erase Character Command [ECH] (Remote) ......................................................................................5-54 Erase in Line Command [EL] (Remote)...............................................................................................5-55 Erase in Display Command [ED] (Remote).........................................................................................5-57

CHARACTER INTERPRETATION COMMANDS ............................................................................... 5-59 Auto Wrap-Around Mode Command (DECAWM) (Local/Remote)......................................................5-60 Send-Receive Mode Command [SRM] (Local/Remote) .......................................................................5-61 New Line Mode Command [LNM] (Local/Remote) .............................................................................5-62 NOCHANGE Attribute Mode Command {FNCAM} (Remote) .............................................................5-63 National Replacement Code Command {FNRC} (Local/Remote)........................................................5-67 Set Character Attributes Command [SGR] (Monochrome: Remote Color: Local/Remote).................5-73 Scrolling Region Command (DECSTBM) (Remote).............................................................................5-77 Origin Mode Command (DECOM) (Remote).......................................................................................5-79

CURSOR COMMANDS .......................................................................................................................... 5-82 Move Cursor to Absolute Position Command [CUP][HVP] (Remote)................................................5-83 Move Cursor to Touchkey Command {FMCTK} (Remote) ..................................................................5-85 Move Cursor Forward Command [CUF] (Remote).............................................................................5-86 Move Cursor Backward Command [CUB] (Remote)...........................................................................5-87 Move Cursor Up Command [CUU] (Remote)......................................................................................5-88 Move Cursor Down Command [CUD] (Remote).................................................................................5-89 Next Line Command [NEL] (Remote) ..................................................................................................5-90 Index Command [IND] (Remote) .........................................................................................................5-91 Reverse Index Command [RI] (Remote)...............................................................................................5-92

Read Cursor Position Command [CPR] (Remote)................................................................................5-93 Read Character Under Cursor Command {FRCUC} (Remote) ...........................................................5-94 Read Attributes Under Cursor Command {FRAUC} (Remote) ............................................................5-96 Cursor Type Command [FCT] (Local/Remote) ...................................................................................5-98

SCREEN APPEARANCE COMMANDS .............................................................................................. 5-100 Screen Background Mode Command (DECSCNM) (Local/Remote)..................................................5-101 Display Activity Command {FDA} (Local/Remote)............................................................................5-102

CHAPTER 6 PROGRAMMING THE TOUCH PANEL ....................................................................6-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 6-1 THE TOUCH PANEL ................................................................................................................................ 6-1

Touch Cells.............................................................................................................................................6-1 Touchkeys and Touch Targets ................................................................................................................6-2 Touchkey Visual Extent ..........................................................................................................................6-3

TOUCH REPORTING ............................................................................................................................... 6-5 TOUCH PANEL COMMANDS................................................................................................................. 6-6

Build Touchkey Command {FBTK} (Remote) ........................................................................................ 6-7 Clear Touchkey Command {FCTK}(Remote)......................................................................................... 6-9 Touchkey Type Command {FTKT}(Remote) ........................................................................................6-10 Touchkey Visual Extent Command {FTKVEJ}(Remote) ......................................................................6-12 Touchkey Audible Attribute Command {FTKAA}(Remote) ..................................................................6-14 Auto-Repeat Rate Command {FARR} (Remote) ...................................................................................6-16 Polled Touch Mode Command {FPTM} (Remote) ...............................................................................6-18 Read Touchkey Status Command {FRTKS} (Remote) ..........................................................................6-20 Extended Report Mode Command {FERM} (Remote)..........................................................................6-22 Touch Panel Lockout Mode Command {FTLM} (Remote)...................................................................6-24

REGION COMMANDS ........................................................................................................................... 6-25 Color Features .....................................................................................................................................6-25 Outline a Touchkey Command {FOTK} (Remote)................................................................................6-26 Outline a Region Command {FOR} (Remote) ......................................................................................6-28 Custom Outline a Touchkey Command {FCOTK} (Remote)................................................................6-30 Custom Outline a Region Command {FCOR} (Remote) ......................................................................6-32 Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkey Command {FMCAITK} (Remote) ...................................6-34 Modify Character Attributes in a Region Command {FMCAIR} (Remote)..........................................6-36 Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey Command {FRCAITK} (Remote) ...................................6-38 Reverse Character Attributes in a Region Command {FRCAlR} (Remote)..........................................6-40 Fill a Touchkey With a Character Command {FFTKC} (Remote).......................................................6-43 Fill a Region With a Character Command {FFRC} (Remote) .............................................................6-45 Erase a Touchkey Command {FETK} (Remote)...................................................................................6-47 Erase a Region Command {FER} (Remote) ......................................................................................... 6-49

CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING THE OPTIONAL KEYBOARD ....................................................7-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 7-1 KEYBOARD DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................... 7-1

Standard Keys.........................................................................................................................................7-1 The Set Up Key .......................................................................................................................................7-3 Cursor Control Keys...............................................................................................................................7-3 Special Function Keys ............................................................................................................................7-5 Auxiliary Keypad....................................................................................................................................7-6

KEYBOARD COMMANDS....................................................................................................................... 7-8 Keyboard Lockout Mode Command [KAM] (Remote)...........................................................................7-9 Keypad Mode Command [DECKPAM] [DECKPNM] (Remote).........................................................7-10 Local/Remote Mode Command (Local)................................................................................................7-11

Send Long Break Command (Local) ....................................................................................................7-12 Send Short Break Command (Local) ....................................................................................................7-13

CHAPTER 8 REMOTE SELF-TESTING.............................................................................................8-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 8-1 STATUS REPORTING COMMANDS......................................................................................................8-2

Power-Up Interrupt Mode Command {FPUIM} (Remote).....................................................................8-3 Request Power Status Command {FRPS} (Remote) ...............................................................................8-4 Error Interrupt Mode Command {FEIM} (Remote) ...............................................................................8-5 Request Error Status Command {FRES} (Remote) ................................................................................8-6 Request TCS Identification Command [DA] (Remote)...........................................................................8-8 Request TCS Status Command [DSR] (Remote) ..................................................................................8-10

REMOTE SELF-TEST COMMANDS..................................................................................................... 8-11 Continuous Integrity Test Command {FClT} (Local/Remote)..............................................................8-12 Request ROM Test Report Command {FRRTR} (Remote) ...................................................................8-14 Request Nonvolatile Memory Test Report Command {FRETR} (Remote) ...........................................8-15 Request RAM Test Report Command {FRRATR} (Remote) .................................................................8-17 Request Touch Panel Test Report Command {FRTTR} (Remote) ........................................................8-19

APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAM .................................................................................................. A-1

PROGRAM DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................... A-1 PHYSICAL CONNECTION ..................................................................................................................... A-1

Setting up the IBM PC............................................................................................................................A-1 Setting up the TCS ..................................................................................................................................A-1 The Sample Program..............................................................................................................................A-2

APPENDIX B COMMAND SUMMARY TABLE .............................................................................. B-1

INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... B-1

APPENDIX C CUSTOM CHARACTER FONTS............................................................................... C-1

INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... C-1 The Distinction Between Character Sets and Character Fonts............................................................. C-1 Creating Custom Characters Using Software or Firmware.................................................................. C-4

CHARACTER DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................. C-4 Description Of Static Character Fonts.................................................................................................. C-5 Boxtypes ................................................................................................................................................ C-7

HOW CHARACTERS ARE STORED...................................................................................................... C-8 Character Sizes...................................................................................................................................... C-9

PIXEL DATA .......................................................................................................................................... C-11

APPENDIX D IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY......................................................................................... D-1

INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... D-1 SYMPTOM/SOLUTION CHART ............................................................................................................ D-1 COMMON PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS ............................................................................................ D-8

Interaction Between Polled Touch Mode and the Read Touchkey Status Command ............................ D-9 Interaction Between Reporting Format and the End Of Line Character ............................................ D-10 Interaction Between Origin Mode and Scrolling Region .................................................................... D-11 Interaction Between NOCHANGE Attribute Mode and Attribute Commands .................................... D-13 Interaction Between the Conceal Attribute and Commands that Modify Attributes............................ D-14 Editing a Stored Screen with the Select Screen Command.................................................................. D-15 Mapping Character Fonts ................................................................................................................... D-16 Interaction Between Power-Up Interrupt Mode and Multidrop Protocol........................................... D-17 Interaction Between Dead Touchkeys and Touch Operation .............................................................. D-18 Inconsistent Communication Setup Between Host and TCS................................................................ D-19

COMMON OPERATOR PROBLEMS ................................................................................................... D-20 Saving Display Activity as OFF .......................................................................................................... D-20 Incorrectly Selecting Other Setup Screen Parameters ........................................................................ D-20 Touching the Display during Transition ............................................................................................. D-20

OPERATIONAL STATUS REPORT TABLE........................................................................................ D-21

/LVW�RI�7DEOHV

Table 2-1. Framing Formats ........................................................................................................ 2-2

Table 2-2. Touch Control Screen Parity Settings......................................................................... 2-4

Table 3-1. Control Codes Recognized by the TCS....................................................................... 3-3

Table 3-2. Representing 8-bit Control Codes With 7-Bit Escape Sequences .............................. 3-5

Table 3-3. Condition for Acceptance of Certain Control Codes within Control Strings ........... 3-12

Table 3-4. Summary of Status Queries and Reports................................................................... 3-14

Table 3-5. Summary of Selectable Modes.................................................................................. 3-18

Table 4-1. Overview of Functional Volatility .............................................................................. 4-2

Table 4-2. Control over Individual Setup Parameters .................................................................. 4-6

Table 4-3. Numeric Values for Foreground and Background Color Parameters ......................... 4-7

Table 4-4. Multidrop Addresses and Codes ............................................................................... 4-17

Table 4-5. Effects of Multidrop Addresses on Control Codes ................................................... 4-18

Table 4-6. Flow Control ............................................................................................................. 4-25

Table 5-1. Format Effectors.......................................................................................................... 5-4

Table 5-2. Typical Screen Storage Capacity ................................................................................ 5-6

Table 5-3. Default Values of Screen-Dependent Items ................................................................ 5-9

Table 5-4. Code Values Corresponding to Character Positions ................................................. 5-30

Table 5-5. Standard Characters Used For Special Purposes ...................................................... 5-31

Table 5-6. Extended Characters Used for Special Purposes ...................................................... 5-31

Table 5-7. Effects of the Line Mode on the Return and Enter Keys .......................................... 5-62

Table 5-8. Effects of the New Line Mode on Cursor Movement............................................... 5-62

Table 5-9. Commands Affected by NOCHANGE Attribute Mode............................................ 5-64

Table 5-10. Commands Unaffected by NOCHANGE Attribute Mode...................................... 5-66

Table 5-11. National Replacement Code Characters.................................................................. 5-70

Table 5-12. Color Parameters of the Set Character Attributes Command ................................. 5-75

Table 5-13. Color Attribute Definitions (* = Default) .............................................................. 5-97

Table 7-1. Non-Alphanumeric Standard Key Codes.................................................................... 7-2

Table 7-2. Codes Sent by Keys when Pressed with the Ctrl Key................................................. 7-4

Table 7-3. Cursor Control Key Codes .......................................................................................... 7-5

Table 7-4. Special Function Key Codes ....................................................................................... 7-6

Table 7-5. Auxiliary Keypad Codes ............................................................................................. 7-7

Table B-1. Summary of TCS Commands Grouped According to Related Functions................. B-2

Table C-1. Static ASCII Character Font...................................................................................... C-2

Table C-2. Static Special Character Font .................................................................................... C-3

Table C-3. Consequences of Changing the Static ASCII Character Font PROM....................... C-5

Table C-4. Consequences of Changing the Static Special Character Font PROM ..................... C-6

Table C-5. Boxtype Characters ................................................................................................... C-7

Table D-1. Symptom/Solution Chart ........................................................................................... D-2

/LVW�RI�)LJXUHV

Figure 2-1. Typical Asynchronous Framing Format .................................................................... 2-3

Figure 4-1. Sample Communication Monitor Screen................................................................. 4-34

Figure 5-1. Codes Access the Character Sets ............................................................................... 5-3

Figure 5-2. Selecting a Screen for Editing ................................................................................... 5-6

Figure 5-3. Manipulating Character Sets and Fonts ................................................................... 5-24

Figure 5-4. Character Font Map Operations............................................................................... 5-29

Figure 5-5. Character Font Copy Operations ............................................................................. 5-34

Figure 5-6. Example Custom Character Design ......................................................................... 5-37

Figure 5-7. Dividing the Character into Sixels........................................................................... 5-38

Figure 5-8. Encoding the Sixels.................................................................................................. 5-40

Figure 5-9. Vertical and Horizontal Bars ................................................................................... 5-51

Figure 5-10. Conceptual Model: Characters and Their Attributes ............................................. 5-73

Figure 6-1. Touch Cell Number Assignments .............................................................................. 6-2

Figure 6-2. Example Touchkey .................................................................................................... 6-3

Figure 6-3. Touchkey Visual Extent............................................................................................. 6-4

Figure C-1. Encoding the Letter H .............................................................................................. C-8

Figure C-2. Display Character Addressing.................................................................................. C-9

1-1

&+$37(5����*(1(5$/�,1)250$7,21

29(59,(:The Touch Control Screen (TCS) is a sophisticated interface between human operators andcomputer-driven systems. The TCS allows the operator, with a minimum of training, toaccurately and efficiently control complex operations by touching the screen.

The Touch Control Screen interprets codes from the host computer to create displays thatprovide the operator with information or ask the operator to select from the choices presented.The operator responds naturally by pointing to the appropriate choice, and touching the display.The TCS, acting as a software configured control panel, notifies the computer that a particulararea was touched.

The TCS can be integrated into any computer-based system, and is packaged to be easilymounted in a wall, in a rack, on a boom, or on a table top. High-level software support facilitatesthe design of touch targets using a few simple commands. The extreme reliability and durabilityof TCS makes it appropriate for use in a variety of rugged environments.

� )HDWXUHVFeatures of the TCS include the following:

� 6RIWZDUH

• Line attributes that can be selected by the user: normal, double width, double size

• Character attributes that can be selected by the user: highlight, underline, blink, concealed,and reverse video

• Direct cursor addressing

• Region commands that allow the programmer to outline and modify attributes within arectangular region of the display

• Programmable cursor type, including non-blinking, slow-blinking and fast-blinking reverseblock, non-blinking, slow-blinking and fast-blinking underlines, and invisible

• Two character sets (128 characters each)

• Four character fonts for mapping into the character sets. Two of the fonts are fixed and twocan be altered by the user. Each font contains 128 characters.

• National Replacement Code method to display international characters

• 8 basic colors for displaying character foreground and background

• 8 highlight colors, associated with each of the basic colors, chosen to enable applicationsdeveloped for monochrome TCS to effectively display in a color environment

1-2

� +DUGZDUH

• Integral touch panel with a 120 touch cell matrix (12 rows by 10 columns)

• Keyboard port with adapter cable for connection to a standard PC-AT keyboard

• High contrast electroluminescent (EL) or Dual Scan Passive (DSP) color display that candisplay 1920 characters (24 lines of 80 characters each)

• RS-232 serial interface port with selectable baud rates in standard increments up to 19,200baud

• RS-422 and RS-485 serial interface port for communication at distances of up to 1200 meters(4000 ft) and for multidrop configurations (not yet available)

• Optional rack, panel, wall and boom mount capabilities

• NEMA 4 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) and NEMA 4X water and dustresistance on all surfaces. (Requires the optional NEMA 4 Hatch Kit.)

• Nonvolatile memory for storing Setup parameters while the power is off

• 96 kilobytes of user random-access memory (RAM) for storing frequently used screens andtwo dynamic character fonts

• Test Screen for user-selected testing of the electronics, the display, and the touch panel

• Communication Monitor to help troubleshoot communications

• Safety standards include: CSA-C22.2

• Other compliances include FCC Class A and VDE 0871A

• High resistance to shock and vibration

� $ERXW�7KLV�*XLGHThe ErgoTouch TCS Application Developer’s Guide explains how to program the TCS to createthe interface between the user and host computer. It explains how to display characters, createtouch keys, and control and interpret user input. Basic troubleshooting information and sampleprograms are also included.

� 5HODWHG�'RFXPHQWVThe ErgoTouch TCS Installation Guide provides instructions for mounting and connecting theTCS, configuring with the Setup Menu, and maintaining the TCS at an operational level (fusereplacement and cleaning). The guide also includes a full set of specifications.

2-1

&+$37(5����,17(5)$&,1*�72�7+(�+267�&20387(5

� ,1752'8&7,21This chapter provides information about communication between the Touch Control Screen(TCS) and host computer. Topics include:

• A description of serial data

• Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standards RS-232-E, RS-422-A, and RS-485

• TCS error checking methods, including buffer overflow control

• A summary of TCS communication parameters that can be set by the user

• Multidrop communication protocol

� 7KH�6HULDO�,QWHUIDFHThe TCS and the host computer communicate by a serial interface, whereby information isexchanged between devices as a series of binary codes known as bit-serial data.

� %LW�6HULDO�'DWD

Bit-serial data is digital information represented as a series of bits sent over a wire, one bit at atime. Specified voltage levels indicate the binary state, either zero or one, of each bit.

� 7UDQVPLWWHG�'DWD

Data bits are sent between the TCS and host in groups of seven or eight bits. Each group of databits constitutes one code, and the TCS recognizes 256 such codes from the host. The data bits arepreceded and followed by other bits, described later in this chapter. The number of data bits percode is controlled by the Data Bits parameter, selectable from the Setup Screen. (Refer to theErgoTouch TCS Installation Guide for Setup Screen information.)

TCS operation involves two types of codes: graphic codes and control codes. Graphic codesgenerally cause a character to be displayed on the TCS display. Control codes do an action, suchas changing a display characteristic or regulating data flow between the TCS and host.

Chapter 3 explains how TCS handles codes and characters, including the results of using sevenor eight data bits. Appendix C contains detailed information about Standard and CustomCharacter Fonts.

2-2

� 7LPLQJ�)RUPDW

Serial data can be transmitted in either a synchronous or asynchronous timing format. In asynchronous format, individual codes in the message are synchronized to a clock signal and sentone after another, without any special bits separating them. Start and stop codes mark thebeginning and end of each message block, but start and stop bits are not sent with each code.

In an asynchronous format, transmitted data is not synchronized to a clock. Instead, start and stopbits mark the beginning and end of each code. Asynchronous formats have the advantage that thesender and receiver do not need to be synchronized with each other. The TCS uses anasynchronous format only.

� 'DWD�5DWH

Serial data speed is expressed in bits per second, or baud. Although baud technically means thenumber of state changes per second (which is not always equal to bits per second), the term baudrate is usually used interchangeably with bit rate. The TCS can send and receive data at all thefollowing bit rates: 110, 300,600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud.

The TCS sends and receives data at the same rate. For example, the TCS cannot be set totransmit data at 9600 baud and receive data at 1200 baud.

The baud rate is selected by the user through the Setup Screen. Instructions for selecting the baudrate are provided in the Installation Guide, under the heading, Using the Setup Screen.

� 6HULDO�'DWD�&RPSRVLWLRQEach code sent between the TCS and the host is preceded by one start bit, a space (binary zero).The start bit is immediately followed by seven or eight data bits, the code itself. The data bits arefollowed by an optional parity bit, and finally one or two stop bits, which are marks (binaryones).

The combination of all the serial bits is called the framing format. Table 2-1 shows all framingformats supported by the TCS. Figure 2-1 shows the framing format to transmit a code usingseven data bits, a parity bit, and two stop bits.

7DEOH�������)UDPLQJ�)RUPDWV

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV � � 6WRS�%LW �� %LWV�7RWDO

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV ��3DULW\�%LW ��� 6WRS�%LW ��� %LWV�7RWDO

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV � � 6WRS�%LWV ��� %LWV�7RWDO

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV � � 6WRS�%LW ��� %LWV�7RWDO

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV � � 6WRS�%LWV ��� %LWV�7RWDO

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV ��3DULW\�%LW ��� 6WRS�%LWV ��� %LWV�7RWDO

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV ��3DULW\�%LW ��� 6WRS�%LW ��� %LWV�7RWDO

6WDUW�%LW ��� 'DWD�%LWV ��3DULW\�%LW ��� 6WRS�%LWV ��� %LWV�7RWDO

2-3

,GOH 6WRS %LWV ,GOH

6WDUW %LW 2SWLRQDO 3DULW\ %LW

'DWD %LWV

)LJXUH������7\SLFDO�$V\QFKURQRXV�)UDPLQJ�)RUPDW

NOTEIn Figure 2-1, indicates a space (logical zero) and indicates a mark (logical one).However, on the RS-232 line itself these are inverted, so a mark is a low voltage and a space is a high

voltage. On the RS-485 line, the Data + signal appears as shown in the above figure.

� 6WDUW�%LW

The start bit tells the receiving station that the next seven bits (or eight, depending on how theData Bits parameter is set) represent an ASCII code, transmitted with the least significant bitfirst. The start bit is always a single zero bit (a space).

� 6WRS�%LW

The stop bit tells the receiving station that it has received the end of the code. The stop bit isalways a one bit (a mark), which is the idle state of the line. A stop bit can be immediatelyfollowed by the start bit preceding the next code, or it can just return the line to its idle state. Thelatter case, for example, occurs when the stop bit follows the last code to be transmitted.

To meet the requirements of various host computers and interfaces, the TCS can use either one ortwo stop bits. The number of stop bits is selected by the user through the Setup Screen.Instructions for selecting the number of stop bits are provided in the Installation Guide, under theheading, Using the Setup Screen.

� 3DULW\�%LW

The parity bit follows the seven or eight data bits. The parity bit is used to check for transmissionerrors. Parity checking can use either even or odd parity.

Even parity means that the parity bit and the data bits together contain an even number of binaryones. For example, for the data bits 1010100, the parity bit is 1, making the total number of oneseven (in this example there are a total of four ones).

Odd parity means that the parity and data bits together contain an odd number of ones. Forexample, for the data bits 1010100, the parity bit is 0, making the total number of ones odd (inthis example there is a total of three ones).

By setting two TCS parameters (Parity Enable and Parity Sense), the parity bit can be used infive ways, as shown in Table 2-2. Instructions for setting the Parity Enable and Parity Senseparameters are provided in the Installation Guide, under Using the Setup Screen.

2-4

By setting two TCS parameters (Parity Enable and Parity Sense), the parity bit can be used infive ways, as shown in Table 2-2. Instructions for setting the Parity Enable and Parity Senseparameters are provided in the Installation Guide, under Using the Setup Screen.

2-5

7DEOH������7RXFK�&RQWURO�6FUHHQ�3DULW\�6HWWLQJV

3$5,7<�(1$%/(6(77,1*

3$5,7<�6(16(6(77,1*

())(&7

2II (YHQ�RU�RGG 3DULW\�FKHFNLQJ�DQG�JHQHUDWLRQ�DUH�GLVDEOHG��7KH�7&6�GRHV�QRWWUDQVPLW�D�SDULW\�ELW�DQG�GRHV�QRW�H[SHFW�SDULW\�ELWV�LQ�WKH�GDWD�LWUHFHLYHV��,I�WKH�7&6�UHFHLYHV�GDWD�FRQWDLQLQJ�D�SDULW\�ELW��WKH�GDWD�LVGLVSOD\HG�DV�D�IUDPLQJ�HUURU��)(��

2Q (YHQ 3DULW\�FKHFNLQJ�DQG�JHQHUDWLRQ�DUH�HQDEOHG��7KH�7&6�WUDQVPLWVHYHQ�SDULW\�GDWD�E\�DSSHQGLQJ�D�SDULW\�ELW�DQG�H[SHFWV�UHFHLYHGGDWD�WR�KDYH�HYHQ�SDULW\��,I�WKH�7&6�UHFHLYHV�GDWD�WKDW�KDV�RGGSDULW\��WKH�GDWD�LV�GLVSOD\HG�DV�D�SDULW\�HUURU��3(��

2Q 2GG 3DULW\�FKHFNLQJ�DQG�JHQHUDWLRQ�DUH�HQDEOHG��7KH�7&6�WUDQVPLWVRGG�SDULW\�GDWD�E\�DSSHQGLQJ�D�SDULW\�ELW�DQG�H[SHFWV�UHFHLYHG�GDWDWR�KDYH�RGG�SDULW\��,I�WKH�7&6�UHFHLYHV�GDWD�WKDW�KDV�HYHQ�SDULW\�WKH�GDWD�LV�GLVSOD\HG�DV�D�SDULW\�HUURU��3(��

,JQRUH (YHQ 3DULW\�FKHFNLQJ�LV�GLVDEOHG��EXW�HYHQ�SDULW\�JHQHUDWLRQ�LV�HQDEOHG�7KH�7&6�WUDQVPLWV�HYHQ�SDULW\�GDWD�E\�DSSHQGLQJ�D�SDULW\�ELW�DQGH[SHFWV�UHFHLYHG�GDWD�WR�KDYH�D�SDULW\�ELW��+RZHYHU��WKH�7&6�GRHVQRW�FKHFN�WKH�SDULW\�RI�WKH�UHFHLYHG�GDWD�

,JQRUH 2GG 3DULW\�FKHFNLQJ�LV�GLVDEOHG��EXW�RGG�SDULW\�JHQHUDWLRQ�LV�HQDEOHG�7KH�7&6�WUDQVPLWV�RGG�SDULW\�GDWD�E\�DSSHQGLQJ�D�SDULW\�ELW�DQGH[SHFWV�UHFHLYHG�GDWD�WR�KDYH�D�SDULW\�ELW��+RZHYHU��WKH�7&6�GRHVQRW�FKHFN�WKH�SDULW\�RI�WKH�UHFHLYHG�GDWD�

2-6

� &RPPXQLFDWLRQ�6WDQGDUGVThe TCS adheres to three widely used Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standards:RS-232-E, RS-422-A, and RS-485. RS-232-E is the most widely accepted standard for digitaldata communication; few pieces of computer-related equipment are supplied without an RS-232-E port.

However, RS-232-E is not suitable for all installations. Generally, RS-422-A and RS-485 providefor communications over longer distances and provide for multidrop configurations. RS-485operates the same as RS-422-A but can handle more devices in a multidrop configuration (32 asopposed to 16). This manual refers only to RS-485 when discussing these two standards,although the TCS does support both interfaces. For more information, refer to the sections onRS-485 and Multidrop Communications Protocol in this chapter.

The RS-232-E standard specifies that transmitted and received data are each carried on a singledata line; RS-485 specifies that transmitted and received data are each carried on balanced lines.The RS-232-E standard prescribes signal types, signal levels, and the control signals thatestablish communication between devices (in this case, the host and the TCS). The RS-485standard prescribes only signal types and signal levels.

The RS-232-E and RS-485 interfaces attach to the same serial port connector on the TCSa25-pin, D-series, male connector. Pin assignments for this connector and names of the respectivecircuits are listed in the ErgoTouch TCS Installation Guide.

� 56�����(

First established in 1969 and later revised, the RS-232-E standard defines the electrical andmechanical characteristics of an “interface between data terminal equipment and datacommunication equipment employing serial binary exchange.”

NOTEThe TCS is data terminal equipment (DTE) as described by the RS-232-E standard. As a DTE unit, the TCSis connected to data communication equipment (DCE) such as a modem. A null-modem cable is required to

connect to another DTE unit.

The RS-232-E, RS-422-A, and RS-485 interfaces attach to the 25-pin, D-series, male connector.Pin assignments for this connector and names of the respective circuits are listed in theInstallation Guide.

2-7

� 56�����(�6WDQGDUG

The RS-232-E standard defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics of an interfacebetween data terminal equipment (DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE) that usesserial binary data interchange.

NOTEThe TCS is data terminal equipment (DTE) as described by the RS-232-E standard. As a DTE unit, the TCSis connected to data communication equipment (DCE), such as a modem. Connection to another DTE unit

requires the use of a null-modem cable.

The RS-232-E standard specifies unbalanced transmission, which uses a single high-low signalline referenced to signal ground. The standard assigns functions to the circuit on each pin of theRS-232-E connector. Signal voltage level and timing requirements are prescribed by thestandard, but framing format and baud rate can vary among RS-232-E compatible devices. TheRS-232-E standard also assigns gender to individual connectors: the RS-232-E connector is maleon DTE and female on DCE.

� 56�����(�6LJQDO�'HVFULSWLRQV

RS-232-E was originally designed as a computer interface for use over telephone lines. Becauseof this, signals have names like Received Line Signal Detector (RLSD). The line referred to isthe telephone line. Since the introduction of the standard, more ways of using RS-232-E havebeen developed. For example, instead of using telephone lines, a specially wired cable called anull-modem cable can be used to directly link two DTE units, such as the TCS and a hostcomputer. The DTE units at each end of the null-modem cable interpret the cable as two modemscommunicating over telephone lines.

RS-232-E signals used by the TCS are described below. It is not necessary to understand each ofthese signals to program the TCS; this information is provided to help interface the TCS withdifferent types of DCE devices. The circuit designations defined in RS-232-E are given inparentheses after each signal name, (for example, AA).

NOTEWhen an RS-232-E control signal is on, its voltage is +3 V to +25 V. When the control signal is off, its

voltage is -3 V to -25 V. When an RS-232- C data transmit and receive signal is in mark (one) condition, itsvoltage is -3 V to -25 V. When the data signal is in space (zero) condition, its voltage is +3 V to +25 V.

• Protective Ground (AA)

Protective Ground is the common chassis ground of the TCS.

• Signal Ground (AB)

Signal Ground is the common reference for the data and control lines.

• Transmitted Data (BA) (Output)

Transmitted Data carries the stream of bits generated by the TCS and sent to the DCE.

• Received Data (BB) (Input)

Received Data carries the stream of bits generated by the DCE and received by the TCS.

2-8

• Request to Send (CA) (Output)

In the TCS, Request to Send (RTS) is always on immediately after the power-up sequenceand self-tests have finished executing. RTS remains on except during a reset, a long break, orif the power to the TCS is switched off.

NOTEThis use of Request to Send complies with the RS-232-E standard but precludes operating the TCS in

half-duplex mode.

• Clear to Send (CB) (Input)

The TCS polls Clear to Send (CTS) each time a code is to be transmitted to the DCE over theserial link. If CTS is off, the code is not sent. When the DCE switches CTS off, transmissionfrom the TCS halts on the next code boundary. The TCS can be set up to ignore this signal in3-wire systems.

Normally, the standard does not allow the DCE to switch CTS high or low at random.However, this technique is commonly used to allow DCE to halt transmission from the TCSvia a hardware signal. Allowing switched operation of CTS to halt transmission iscompatible with operation as described by the RS-449 standard.

• Data Set Ready (CC) (Input)

Data Set Ready (DSR) is set on by the DCE when ready for operation. The TCS polls DSRbefore every code transmission to the DCE. If DSR is off, the code is not sent to the DCE.The TCS can be set up to ignore this signal in 3-wire systems.

• Data Terminal Ready (CD) (Output)

Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is switched on by the TCS as soon as the power-up sequenceand self-tests are concluded. DTR remains on at all times, except during a reset or longbreak. DTR is switched off for the duration of the reset or long break signal and is reassertedon following the break, regardless of the state of the DSR.

The RS-232-E standard specifies that once DTR is switched off by the terminal, DTR can notbe driven on again until Data Set Ready from the DCE is switched off. Because the TCSsupports a minimal 3-wire, RS-232-E interface where unconnected control circuits such asDSR are biased on, DTR operation is independent of DSR.

• Data Carrier Detect (CF) (Input)

Data Carrier Detect (DCD) is switched on by the DCE whenever the DCE detects a suitableprimary carrier in the receive state. The primary carrier is the telephone line connection, or ifa null-modem cable is used, the proper hard-wired connection. RLSD allows one station todetermine whether the station at the other end has valid contact. If RLSD is off, the ReceivedData line is ignored by the TCS.

• Secondary Request to Send (SCA) (Output)

Secondary Request to Send (SRTS) is switched off by the TCS whenever the TCS stalls thehost. SRTS is switched on by the TCS whenever the TCS unstalls the host. The SRTS linecan be used to implement a control line hold-off of the host.

2-9

� 56�����DQG�56����The unbalanced interface defined by the RS-232-E standard is suitable for many installations.But for installations requiring increased line lengths, especially at high data rates, problems beginto emerge. It becomes difficult to distinguish between valid data signals and noise due to groundshifts or electromagnetic interference.

To overcome these problems, the EIA established the RS-422-A standard as an alternative tounbalanced transmission. With RS-422-A, transmitted and received data are each carried on apair of signal lines that are independent of signal ground. The balanced lines carry data as adifferential signal. With this type of transmission, noise generally appears as common-modelevels and is rejected by the differential line receiver. When using RS-422, the balancedTransmitted Data lines are connected to pins 14 and 15, and the balanced Received Data lines areconnected to pins 9 and 10. Pins 13 and 23 must be connected to enable the RS-422 drivers. Pins17 and 18 must be connected to provide a 100-ohm termination on the transmit pins and pins 24and 25 must be connected to provide a 100-ohm termination on the receive pins.

In 1983, the EIA established the RS-485 standard which provides the features of RS-422 but alsoallows up to 32 drivers and receivers to exist on the same communication link. RS-485, bynature, will only support half-duplex communications. When using RS-485, the balancedTransmitted Data/Received Data lines are connected to pins 9 and 10. Pins 13 and 23 must beconnected to enable the RS-485 drivers. Pins 24 and 25 must be connected to provide a 100-ohmtermination on the transmit/receive pins.

When using RS-422 or RS-485, the RS-232-E data lines Transmitted Data (pin 2) and ReceivedData (pin 3) are not used, and must be left disconnected.

� :KHQ�6KRXOG�56�����%H�8VHG"

• The interconnecting cable is too long for effective unbalanced operation. With RS-232-Ethere is a recommended limit of 15 meters (50 feet) between stations. Using RS-422, thatdistance can be up to 1200 meters (4000 feet).

• The interconnecting cable is exposed to excessive extraneous electrical noise sources.Equipment that complies with the RS-422 standard exhibits better noise immunity than canbe achieved using the RS-232-E standard.

• Interference with other signals must be minimized.

• The signals must be inverted. This can be done simply by reversing the leads at one end ofeach pair of data lines.

• Ground loop problems exist.

� :KHQ�6KRXOG�56�����%H�8VHG"

• Multiple TCS’s are connected to the host on the same data link (a multidrop configuration).In a multidrop configuration, the total length of the interconnecting cables should not exceed1200 meters.

2-10

� 3UHYHQWLQJ�DQG�'HWHFWLQJ�(UURUVBecause communication with the host computer occurs over a serial hardware link, noisy orfaulty connections can possibly corrupt the data stream and introduce errors. The TCS usestechniques to minimize the possible effects of several types of communication errors. Inparticular, to maintain communication integrity, the TCS monitors and reports the followingtypes of errors:

• Framing Error

A Framing Error occurs when a code is received without a following stop bit. When aframing error occurs, the single mnemonic character FE is displayed in place of the characterin error.

• Buffer Overflow

A Buffer Overflow Error occurs when one or more codes have overflowed the TCS inputbuffer and been lost. When a buffer overflow error occurs, the single mnemonic character BO

is displayed on the screen instead of the codes that were lost.

• Overrun Error

An Overrun Error occurs when a received code is overwritten by the next code before it canbe read from the Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) in the TCS. Whenan overrun error occurs, the code that was overrun is lost, the single mnemonic character OE

is displayed, and the code that overran the previous code is interpreted normally.

• Parity Error

A Parity Error occurs when a code is received with an incorrect parity. When a parity erroroccurs, the single mnemonic character PE is displayed in place of the code in error. (The TCSchecks for parity errors only when the user has enabled parity checking; see Parity Bit earlierin this chapter.)

� %XIIHU�2YHUIORZ�&RQWUROTo prevent the TCS and host from overflowing each other’s input buffers, the TCS supports twomethods of communication control: exercising the SRTS and CTS control lines and sendingXON (17 decimal) and XOFF (19 decimal) codes. The method used depends on whether theXON/XOFF mode is set. For a complete description of XON/XOFF, refer to Chapter 4.

NOTEThroughout this manual, the terms stall and unstall refer to the stopping and starting of data flow between

the TCS and host, using either the control lines or the XON and XOFF codes.

To prevent its own input buffer from overflowing, the TCS stalls the host. When the TCS isready to accept more data, it unstalls the host. Similarly, to prevent the host’s input buffer fromoverflowing, the host stalls the TCS, and when ready to receive more data, the host unstalls theTCS. The input and output buffers each hold a maximum of 636 codes.

2-11

Regardless of the state of the XON/XOFF mode, the TCS can stall and unstall the host only aftertwo-way communication of control codes is established. Two-way communication of controlcodes occurs when multidrop operation is disabled, multidrop is enabled and TCS is addressedindividually, or when multidrop is enabled and TCS 1 is addressed in broadcast mode.

� 6WDOOLQJ�WKH�+RVW

When XON/XOFF mode is on, the TCS stalls the host by sending an XOFF code and switchingthe SRTS line to off. When XON/XOFF mode is off, the TCS stalls the host by switching theSRTS line off. The TCS stalls the host when any of the following conditions exist:

• The TCS input buffer is 75% full and the next code received is not a communication controlcode. This is the first warning.

• The TCS input buffer is 100% full, the buffer has not yet overflowed, and the next code isnot a communication control code. This is the second warning.

If additional codes are received while the input buffer is full, the TCS does not stall the hostagain. However, communication control codes do not overflow the input buffer; they arereceived and processed even while the input buffer is full. Any other code received while theinput buffer is full is ignored by TCS.

• The host addresses the TCS for two-way communication and the TCS input buffer is 75% ormore full. This applies when a TCS not addressed by two-way communication is addressedindividually or when TCS is addressed in a broadcast mode.

• The TCS address is changed to RS232 or RS422, the TCS was not addressed for two-waycommunication, and the input buffer is 75% or more full.

� 8QVWDOOLQJ�WKH�+RVW

When XON/XOFF mode is on, the TCS unstalls the host by switching SRTS on and sending anXON code. When XON/XOFF mode is off, the TCS unstalls the host by switching the SRTS lineon. The TCS unstalls the host when any of the following conditions exist:

• The TCS has emptied its input buffer and the host was previously stalled due to a filled TCSinput buffer, but the user has not stalled the host by pressing Ctrl/S.

• A Reset command has been completed and the TCS is ready to receive input from the host.

• When the TCS performs an acknowledged disconnect or mandatory disconnect as part of themultidrop protocol and it had previously stalled the host. Multidrop protocol is describedlater in this chapter.

• When the multidrop address is changed, if the TCS was previously addressed and had stalledthe host.

• The host addresses the TCS for two-way communication using multidrop protocol and theTCS input buffer is less than 75% full. This applies when a TCS that is not addressed fortwo-way communication is addressed individually or when TCS 1 is addressed in broadcastmode.

2-12

• When the TCS address is changed from RS232 or RS485 to a multidrop address and the hosthas been stalled.

• The TCS address is changed to RS232 or RS485, the TCS was not addressed for two-waycommunication, and the input buffer is less than 75% full.

When XON/XOFF mode is on, the user can manually unstall the host by pressing Ctrl/Q on theoptional keyboard, as long as the host is not in a stall condition as a result of a filled TCS inputbuffer. If the host is stalled for this reason, pressing Ctrl/Q will not override the stall. Refer toXON/XOFF Mode Command in Chapter 4 for a full description of how TCS handles Ctrl/Qkeystrokes.

� 6WDOOLQJ�WKH�7&6

When XON/XOFF mode is on, the host can stall the TCS by turning the CTS line off, or bysending an XOFF code, or both. When XON/XOFF mode is off, the host stalls the TCS byturning the CTS line off. To improve performance, the TCS uses a two character transmit buffer.Upon receiving a stall signal from the host, the TCS stops all transmissions when the two-character transmit buffer is emptied. In some situations, the host is unable to accept more thanone character when the stall signal is sent. Under these conditions, the TCS can be configured inSetup to use a single character transmit buffer which would result in transmissions stopping onthe next code boundary after the stall signal was received.

� 8QVWDOOLQJ�WKH�7&6

How the host unstalls the TCS depends on how the TCS was stalled. If the host stalled the TCSby switching the CTS line off, it unstalls the TCS by switching CTS on. If the host stalled theTCS by sending an XOFF code, it must send an XON mode to unstall the TCS. Note that TCSignores XON and XOFF codes when XON/XOFF mode is disabled.

3-1

&+$37(5�����352*5$00,1*�29(59,(:

� ,1752'8&7,21This chapter provides a general overview of Touch Control Screen (TCS) programming. Topicsinclude:

• Coding standards

• Communication environments

• Communication codes

• Character sets

• TCS commands

• A general description of control strings

• How to generate remote commands from the host

• A summary of TCS status reports

• A summary of selectable modes

• Detailed descriptions of the TCS Mode commands

Except for the TCS Mode commands, which are described in this chapter, commands mentionedin this chapter are described in detail in the rest of this manual.

For quick reference to a particular command, refer to the command lookup tables in Appendix B.

� 5(/$7('�$16,�67$1'$5'6The TCS conforms to the following standards for representing characters and controls:

• ANSI X3.4-1977 American National Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)

• ANSI X3.41-1974 American National Standard Code Extension Techniques for Use With7 bit Coded Character Set of American National Standard Code for Information Interchange

• ANSI X3.64-1979 American National Standard Additional Controls for Use With American National Standard Code for Information Interchange

All TCS controls comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard X3.64-1979. Some TCS controls are ANSI-specified; others are ANSI- compatible DEC-private orANSI-compatible TCS-private. The ANSI standard referenced throughout the rest of this manualis Standard X3.64-1979.

3-2

&20081,&$7,21�(19,5210(176The TCS can communicate with the host using either 7 or 8 data bits. The number of data bits isselected by setting the Data Bits parameter in the Setup Screen. (See the Data Bits command inChapter 4.)

When the TCS is set for 7-bit communication, the TCS sends and receives 7-bit codes. Seven-bitcommunication allows the host and the TCS to send and receive the lower 128 codes directly.The upper 128 codes are sent and received using 7-bit codes with the control codes Shift Out(<SO>, 0E hex) and Shift In (<SI>, 0F hex). This technique is explained in detail in Chapter 5.

When the TCS is set for 8-bit communication, the TCS sends and receives 8-bit codes. Eight-bitcommunication allows the host and the TCS to send and receive the full set of 256 codes directly.

� &20081,&$7,21�&2'(6ASCII established a widely used set of 7-bit codes for representing 128 characters fortransmission. The code set includes displayable characters (including letters, numbers, andpunctuation) and non-displayable control codes (which perform specific functions, such assounding a beeper or moving a cursor).

To represent the 128 ASCII codes plus an additional 128 codes, the TCS extends the ASCII codeset by including an additional high-order bit, thereby converting 7-bit ASCII codes to 8-bit codes.The host and the TCS can thereby send each other any of 256 possible codes (decimal 0 through255). Of these 256 codes, ANSI has designated 66 as control codes and 190 as graphic codes.

� &+$5$&7(5�6(76The TCS has two character sets corresponding to the codes that can be sent by the host. TheStandard Character Set corresponds to the lower 128 codes; the Extended Character Setcorresponds to the upper 128 codes. The contents of these character sets can be changed asdescribed in Chapter 5, Character Set and Character Font Commands. The default contents ofthe character sets are documented in Appendix C.

� &RQWURO�&RGHVOf the 256 communication codes, 66 are reserved by ANSI as control codes. Individual controlcodes perform specific functions in the TCS, such as sounding the beeper or moving the cursor,and do not normally cause the display of a corresponding graphic character.

Half of the control codes can be sent using 7-bit ASCII codes. Thirty-two of these codescorrespond to columns 0 and l of the Standard Character Set (code values 00 through lFhexadecimal). The thirty-third 7-bit control code corresponds to the last location in the StandardCharacter Set (code value 7F).

The other half of the control codes can only be sent using 8-bit ASCII codes. Thirty-two of thesecodes correspond to columns 8 and 9 of the Extended Character Set (code values 80 through 9Fhexadecimal). The thirty-third 8-bit control code corresponds to the last location in the ExtendedCharacter Set (code value FF).

3-3

Of the 66 control codes reserved by ANSI, the TCS acts upon those listed in Table 3-1. Anyother control codes received by the TCS are ignored (except as described later in this chapterunder the heading, Errors in Control Strings).

7DEOH������&RQWURO�&RGHV�5HFRJQL]HG�E\�WKH�7&6

01(021,& +(;�9$/8( 1$0( $&7,21�7$.(1�%<�7&6 )227127(

�(27! �� (QG�RI�7UDQVPLVVLRQ 0XOWLGURS�SURWRFRO �

�(14! �� (QTXLU\ 0XOWLGURS�SURWRFRO �

�$&.! �� $FNQRZOHGJH 0XOWLGURS�SURWRFRO �

�%(/! �� %HOO 6RXQGV�DXGLEOH�EHOO �

�%6! �� %DFNVSDFH 0RYHV�FXUVRU�EDFNZDUGV

�+7! �� +RUL]RQWDO�7DE 0RYHV�FXUVRU�WR�QH[W�WDE �

�/)! �$ /LQH�)HHG 3HUIRUPV�D�OLQH�IHHG

�97! �% 9HUWLFDO�7DE 3HUIRUPV�D�YHUWLFDO�WDE �

�))! �& )RUP�)HHG 3HUIRUPV�D�IRUP�IHHG �

�&5! �' &DUULDJH�5HWXUQ 3HUIRUPV�D�FDUULDJH�UHWXUQ

�62! �( 6KLIW�2XW 6HOHFWV�([W��&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�6,! �) 6KLIW�,Q 6HOHFWV�6WG��&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�'/(! �� 'DWD�/LQN�(VFDSH 0XOWLGURS�SURWRFRO �

�'&�! �� 'HYLFH�&RQWURO�� ;21��HQDEOHV�7&6�RXWSXW �

�'&�! �� 'HYLFH�&RQWURO�� ;2))��GLVDEOHV�7&6�RXWSXW �

�1$.! �� 1RW�$FNQRZOHGJHG 0XOWLGURS�SURWRFRO �

�&$1! �� &DQFHO &DQFHO�FRQWURO�VHTXHQFH

�68%! �$ 6XEVWLWXWH &DQFHO�FRQWURO�VHTXHQFH

�(6&! �% (VFDSH ,QWHUSUHW�HVFDSH�VHTXHQFH

�,1'! �� ,QGH[ ,QGH[�&RPPDQG �

�1(/! �� 1H[W�/LQH 1H[W�/LQH�&RPPDQG �

�5,! ��' 5HYHUVH�,QGH[ 5HYHUVH�,QGH[�&RPPDQG �

�'&6! �� 'HYLFH�&RQWURO�6WULQJ %HJLQ�GHYLFH�FRQWURO�VWULQJ �

�&6,! �% &RQWURO�6HT��,QWURGXFHU ,QWHUSUHW�FRQWURO�VHTXHQFH �

�67! �& 6WULQJ�7HUPLQDWRU (QG�RI�GHYLFH�FRQWURO�VWULQJ �

3-4

)227127(6�

�� 7KHVH�FRQWURO�FRGHV�DUH�LJQRUHG�LI�WKH�0XOWLGURS�$GGUHVV�RI�WKH�7&6�LV�VHW�WR�QRQH�

�� $OWKRXJK�WKLV�FRGH�IRUPV�SDUW�RI�WKH�PXOWLGURS�SURWRFRO�ZKHQ�WUDQVPLWWHG�E\�WKH�7&6��LW�LV�LJQRUHG�ZKHQUHFHLYHG�

�� (DFK��%(/!�ZLOO�VRXQG�RQH�EHOO�ZKHQ�VHQW�WR�WKH�'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ��,I�D��%(/!�LV�UHFHLYHG�ZKLOH�D�VWRUHGVFUHHQ�LV�VHOHFWHG��QR�DXGLEOH�EHOO�ZLOO�VRXQG�

�� +RUL]RQWDO�7DE�ZLGWK�LV�IL[HG�DW���FROXPQV�

�� �97!�DQG��))!�DFW�LGHQWLFDOO\�WR��/)!�

�� ;21�;2))�RQO\�VWDUW�VWRS�7&6�RXWSXW�LI�WKH�;21�;2))�0RGH�LV�RQ��,I�WKH�;21�;2))�0RGH�LV�RII��WKH\�DUHLJQRUHG�

�� (DFK���ELW�FRQWURO�FRGH�KDV�DQ�HTXLYDOHQW���ELW�HVFDSH�VHTXHQFH��6HH�7DEOH�����

Because only half of the control codes can be sent using 7-bit codes, ANSI created a mechanismto allow each 8-bit control code to be specified by an equivalent 7-bit escape sequence as shownin Table 3-2. This allows full access to all control codes, regardless of whether the TCS and hostare communicating using 7- or 8-bit codes. Because the TCS ignores many of the 8-bit controlcodes, Table 3-2 shows only those 7-bit sequences corresponding to the 8-bit control codes actedon by the TCS.

Although each character set contains characters in locations that correspond to control codes,these characters cannot be directly displayed. This is because the corresponding communicationcode will be interpreted as a control code since it falls within the range of control codes definedby ANSI. The characters in these locations are generally used for special purposes and can onlybe displayed indirectly by:

• Operation within the Communication Monitor

• Region commands that specify a boxtype

• Region commands that specify custom characters

� *UDSKLF�&RGHVOf the 256 communication codes, those that are not reserved for use as control codes are graphiccodes. Each graphic code specifies a location within either the Standard or Extended CharacterSet of a character that is to be displayed.

Characters within the Standard Character Set can be displayed by sending the appropriate 7- or8-bit graphic code. Characters within the Extended Character Set can be displayed either bysending the appropriate 8-bit graphic code, or by selecting the Extended Character Set (using theSelect Character Set command) and sending the proper 7-bit code.

Graphic codes always cause a corresponding character to be displayed on a screen except whenthey are embedded within a control string as described under Control Strings further on in thischapter.

3-5

Characters in either character set corresponding to control codes cannot be directly displayed.These characters must be displayed by other means, as described previously in this chapter underthe heading, Control Codes.

See Chapter 5 for additional information about using graphic codes to display characters,

7DEOH������5HSUHVHQWLQJ���ELW�&RQWURO�&RGHV�:LWK���%LW�(VFDSH�6HTXHQFHV

01(021,& +(;�9$/8( 1$0( (48,9$/(17���%,76(48(1&(

�,1'! �� ,QGH[ �(6&!�'

�1(/! �� 1H[W�/LQH �(6&!�(

�5,! �' 5HYHUVH�,QGH[ �(6&!�0

�'&6! �� 'HYLFH�&RQWURO�6WULQJ �(6&!�3

�&6,! �% &RQWURO�6HTXHQFH�,QWURGXFHU �(6&!�>

�67! �& 6WULQJ�7HUPLQDWRU �(6&!�?

7&6�&200$1'6Touch Control Screen commands are the actions that the host or user can take to control theTCS. Commands allow the host to display touchkeys and text, select character attributes, movethe cursor, and delete text from the display. If the user also has access to the Setup Screen, thecommands enable the user to do several functions such as change the Setup Screen parameters,align the display, and run tests.

All Touch Control Screen commands are summarized in Appendix B. For clarity, most controlcodes are not repeated in Table B-1.

� 7<3(6�2)�&200$1'6Touch Control Screen commands can be categorized according to their source:

• Local commands

• Remote commands

• Local/remote commands

� /RFDO�&RPPDQGVLocal commands are actions the user can take by means of the Setup Screen or by pressingcertain keys on an optional keyboard.

For example, the user issues the Baud Rate command by entering the Setup Screen and, usingtouchkeys or the keys on an optional keyboard, selecting the baud rate. Likewise, the user cansend the Short Break command by pressing the Break key.

3-6

1n addition to these actions, the user can cause the TCS to send codes to the host by pressing thetouch panel or typing on the keyboard. However, these actions are not referred to as localcommands.

� 5HPRWH�&RPPDQGVRemote commands are those sent by the host to the TCS over the serial interface.

Remote commands are used to control the interface between the TCS and the user (for example,displaying characters on the screen, defining touchkeys, changing character attributes, andbarring the user from the Setup Screen). Remote commands are also used to control the interfacebetween the TCS and the host (for example, selecting a reporting format for TCS status reports).

NOTETo make software development easier, remote commands can also be entered from an optional keyboard

by setting the Local/Remote Mode to Local. See “Local/Remote Mode Command,” in Chapter 4.

There are two types of remote commands: control codes and control strings. Control codes aredescribed at the beginning of this chapter.

A control string is a sequence of codes, beginning with a control code which is usually an<ESC>, but could be a <CSI> or <DCS>. The sequence causes the TCS to perform a specificfunction. For example, the host can reverse the TCS display background by sending thefollowing control string:

<ESC>[?5h

Control strings are described in more detail later in this chapter.

� /RFDO�5HPRWH�&RPPDQGVLocal/remote commands can be sent either remotely by the host, or issued by the user from theSetup Screen, Test Screen, or Alignment Screen.

An example of a local/remote command is the Cursor Type command, which selects the type ofcursor that is displayed. The Cursor Type command can be sent as a control string from the host.For example, the string

<ESC>[3v

selects a reverse-video block cursor. The Cursor Type command can also be issued by the userby entering the Setup Screen and selecting the cursor type.

3-7

� &21752/�675,1*6An ANSI standard control string is a remote command that consists of a special sequence of twoor more codes starting with the Escape code <ESC>, the Control Sequence Introducer code<CSI>, or the Device Control String code <DCS>. Control strings provide the host withcommands that control the TCS.

The starting control code indicates to the TCS that it should interpret the next code as belongingto a command. If the command is in the correct format, and is recognized, the TCS does aspecific function. If the command is in the correct format, but is not recognized, the TCS ignoresthe command. If the command is not in the correct format, the TCS prints out the remainder ofthe command, from the point where the format became incorrect.

All control strings supported by the TCS are summarized in Table 3-3, grouped by function.Some of the control strings include optional numeric and selective parameters, which arerepresented in Table 3-3 in angle brackets (for example, <Ps>). Numeric and selectiveparameters are discussed more fully later in this chapter. The specific parameters for eachcommand are described in the detailed command descriptions in Chapter 5.

The control strings supported by the TCS can be grouped into three categories, according to theircomposition:

• Simple Escape sequences

• Device Control Strings

• Control sequences

� 6LPSOH�(VFDSH�6HTXHQFHVSimple Escape sequences can be sent by the host as described in Appendix B, and do not includeoptional parameters. These control strings begin with the <ESC> code, followed by any codeother than [, possibly followed in turn by other codes. For example, the Index command consistsof the control string <ESC>D. All variations of these control strings are listed in Appendix B andagain in the detailed descriptions of the respective commands.

� 'HYLFH�&RQWURO�6WULQJVDevice Control Strings begin with the <DCS> code (or its equivalent escape sequence,<ESC>P), and are terminated by the <ST> code (or its equivalent escape sequence, <ESC>\).The TCS recognizes only one Device Control String, the Down-Line Load Character Fontcommand. For more information, refer to the description of this command in Chapter 5.

3-8

� &RQWURO�6HTXHQFHVThe general format for a control sequence is:

<ESC>[<Pr><P1>;<P2>;...;<Pn><F>

or

<CSI><Pr><P1>;<P2>;...;<Pn><F>

where:

<ESC> [ = Control Sequence Introducer

<CSI> = Control Sequence Introducer

<Pr> = Optional private command code (?>)

<P1> = First optional parameter

<P2> = Second optional parameter

<Pn> = Last optional parameter

<F> = Final code

A control sequence always begins with the Control Sequence Introducer and ends with a Finalcode. The Control Sequence Introducer can be the two codes <ESC> [, or it can be the controlcode <CSI> when the TCS is set for 8-bit communication. The Final code is a single coderepresenting @ through ~ (40 through 7E hex, inclusive). The Final code varies, depending onthe command.

Between the Control Sequence Introducer and the Final code are an optional private commandcode and optional parameters.

If used, the private command code identifies the control sequence as a privately interpreted,ANSI-compatible control sequence. The private command code is either the code representing ?or >. The code ? identifies the control string as ANSI-compatible, DEC-private. The code >identifies the control string as ANSI-compatible, TCS-private.

An optional parameter is either a numeric parameter (which passes a numeric value) or aselective parameter (which selects a particular subfunction from a specified list). Numeric andselective parameters are described more completely under the next heading.

The following are examples of valid control sequences:

<ESC>[5B Moves the cursor down five lines

<ESC>[12;40H Moves the cursor to line l2, column 40

<ESC>[;;13w Adds a carriage return to all TCS reports

<ESC>[?7h Turns on Auto Wrap-Around Mode (a DEC-private command)

<ESC>[>3n Reads character under the cursor (a TCS-private command)

3-9

� &RQWURO�6HTXHQFH�3DUDPHWHUVA control sequence parameter is a string of the codes representing 0 through 9. The TCSinterprets the string of digits as a decimal number. Leading zeros are ignored.

If a control sequence contains more than one parameter, the parameters must be separated bysemicolons (;) (decimal 59). A semicolon is not required before the first parameter or after thelast parameter.

A control sequence can contain a maximum of 10 parameters. If more than 10 parameters arecontained in an otherwise valid control sequence, the right-most additional parameters areignored.

There are two types of parameters: numeric and selective. Each is described below.

� 1XPHULF�3DUDPHWHUVA numeric parameter is an optional parameter in a control sequence that passes a numeric valueto the TCS. This value controls the scope or range of a command.

If a control sequence uses multiple numeric parameters, the parameters must be separated bysemicolons (decimal 59). Any one of the parameters can be omitted from a control sequence, inwhich case the parameter assumes its default value.

For example, consider the Scrolling Region command. The Scrolling Region command (which isfully documented in Chapter 5) is a control sequence containing numeric parameters that definethe portion of the display which will be designated as the scrolling region. The Scrolling Regioncommand is issued by the host in the following format:

<ESC>[<Pt>;<Pb>r

Note that the Scrolling Region command uses two numeric parameters. The first numericparameter, <Pt>, designates the top line of the scrolling region; the second numeric parameter,<Pb>, designates the bottom line of the scrolling region.

The following examples of the Scrolling Region command show how numeric parametersdetermine the size of the scrolling region:

<ESC>[r

Both numeric parameters are omitted and assume their default values. Therefore <Pt>defaults to line 1 and <Pb> defaults to line 24. The entire display, lines 1 through 24, isdefined as the scrolling region. Note that r is the Final code for this control sequence.

<ESC>[;;30r

Same as above; the extra parameter (30) is ignored.

<ESC>[;18r

Lines 1 through 18 become the scrolling region.

<ESC>[4;r

Lines 4 through 24 become the scrolling region.

<ESC>[22;4r

3-10

The command is ignored because the parameter designating the bottom line of the scrollingregion (4) is less than or equal to the parameter designating the top line (22).

Numeric parameters outside the valid range are ignored or limited within a reasonable range, asspecified in the detailed description of each command.

� 6HOHFWLYH�3DUDPHWHUVA selective parameter is an optional parameter in a control sequence that selects a particulareffect from a list of possible effects.

Each effect is associated with a specific numeric value. When the value is passed to the TCS andthe command is executed, the effect specified by that value is produced. The list of selectiveparameters (together with the numeric parameters) can vary in length from zero to 10 parameters(inclusive).

Some control sequences allow multiple selective parameters to be combined in a single controlsequence to select a combination of effects. (When this is possible, it is noted in the detailedcommand description.) For these commands, the selective parameters can be combined in anyorder. If the selective parameters within a control sequence conflict with each other, the latest(rightmost) parameter is used. Invalid selective parameters are ignored.

For example, consider the Set Character Attributes command. The Set Character Attributescommand is a control sequence containing selective parameters that select the visual attributes(highlight, underline, blink) for displayed characters. The Set Character Attributes command isissued by the host in the following format:

<ESC>[<Ps>;...;<Ps>m

Each <Ps> represents one of 11 possible selective parameters.

The following examples of the Set Character Attributes command show how selectiveparameters control the visible attributes of displayed characters:

<ESC>[m All video attributes are turned off. The Final code is m.

<ESC>[4;1;5m Selects underline (parameter 4), highlight (parameter l), and blink (parameter 5) attributes. The Final code is m.

<ESC>[1;4;5m Same as above. The parameters can appear in any order.

<ESC>[1;4;5;25m Selects highlight (parameter l) and underline (parameter 4) attributes, and turns blinking off (parameter 25). Parameter 5 (select blinking) is overridden by parameter 25.

� +RZ�WKH�7&6�,QWHUSUHWV�&RQWURO�6HTXHQFHVThe TCS does the following two steps when it interprets a control sequence:

1. Control Sequence Parsing

During parsing, all codes in the control string are stored for use as a TCS command. If thecontrol sequence is not in a valid format, the TCS quits parsing the control sequence at thecode that caused the format to be invalid. If the sequence is properly formatted, the TCS doesstep 2.

3-11

2. Command Lookup

The TCS looks up a command using the combination of the control sequence’s privatecommand code, the Final code, and possibly the first parameter. The TCS does not have acommand for every possible control sequence combination. If the TCS has a correspondingcommand, the TCS accepts the parameters and performs the command. If the TCS does nothave a corresponding command, the TCS ignores the control sequence.

For example, the sequence

<ESC>[12;5F

is in the correct format, and can be parsed by the TCS. However, when it is looked up, nocorresponding command is found. Therefore, the sequence is ignored by the TCS.

The parsing step assumes that all parameters are omitted from the command. If a parameter isfound, its value is stored with the control sequence. When the command is executed, the list ofparameters is provided. If more parameters are specified in the sequence than expected for thecommand, the TCS ignores the additional parameters. If fewer parameters are specified thanexpected, the omitted parameters assume default values.

&DQFHOLQJ�&RQWURO�6WULQJVA control string can be canceled before the entire string is sent by sending either a <CAN> or<SUB> code to the TCS. Either code causes the TCS to ignore all previously received codes upto and including the previous <ESC> or <CSI> code.

� (UURUV�LQ�&RQWURO�6WULQJVGenerally, the codes <SP> through ~ (32 through 7E hex) are valid within control strings. Codeswithin this range do not cause a control string to be aborted, even if the TCS does not recognizethe resulting control string. Codes outside this range cause the interpretation of the control stringto be aborted immediately. The portion of the control string received prior to the invalid code isignored and re-interpretation of the input begins with the invalid code. If the invalid code is agraphic code (representing a character in the Extended Character Set), it will be displayed. If theinvalid code is a control code, it will be interpreted normally.

Under certain conditions, some control codes do not cause the interpretation of a control string tobe aborted. Table 3-3 lists these control codes and the conditions under which they can bereceived within a control string without affecting interpretation of the string. Note that if thestated conditions for a code are not met, the code aborts interpretation of any control stringwithin which it is found.

3-12

+2:�72�*(1(5$7(�5(027(�&200$1'6How remote commands are sent from the host computer to the TCS depends entirely on thespecific host computer and application software. Different computers and application programscan handle RS-232-E, I/O (input/output) communication differently.

The following examples of code fragments show how the BASIC and C programming languagescould be used to generate a control string. Both examples send the control string

<ESC>[2J

which clears the TCS display.

• Example using BASIC:

ES$ = CHR$(27)

PRINT #1, ES$;”[2J”;

• Example using C:

printf( “\033[2J” );

7DEOH������&RQGLWLRQ�IRU�$FFHSWDQFH�RI�&HUWDLQ�&RQWURO�&RGHV�ZLWKLQ�&RQWURO�6WULQJV

01(021,& +(;�9$/8( 1$0(&21',7,216�5(48,5('

)25�&2'(�72�%($&&(37('

�62+! �� 6WDUW�RI�+HDGHU $OZD\V

�67;! �� 6WDUW�RI�7H[W $OZD\V

�'/(! �� 'DWD�/LQN�(VFDSH $OZD\V

�'&�! �� 'HYLFH�&RQWURO����;21� $OZD\V

�'&�! �� 'HYLFH�&RQWURO����;2))� $OZD\V

�6<1! �� 6\QFKURQL]H $OZD\V

�(7%! �� (QG�RI�7H[W�%ORFN $OZD\V

�(27! �� (QG�RI�7UDQVPLVVLRQ 0XOWLGURS�DGGUHVV�LV�EHWZHHQ��DQG����LQFOXVLYH

�(14! �� (QTXLU\ $V�DERYH

For specific information about sending data to the TCS, check the documentation for the hostcomputer or application software in use.

3-13

67$786�5(3257�6800$5<The host can query the TCS for a wide range of status reports. The status reports allow the hostto read the contents and attributes of the TCS display, sense touch call closures, and verify thatthe TCS is operating properly.

� 6XPPDU\�RI�6WDWXV�4XHULHV�DQG�5HVSRQVHVThe host can query the TCS for the following information:

• The cursor position

• The character under the cursor

• The character attributes under the cursor

• Touch cell closures (when the Polled Touch Mode is set)

• Touch cell status (when the Polled Touch Mode is set)

• The existence of a stored screen

• The amount of screen memory remaining

• TCS type

• Operational status

• The type of error, if any

• Power-loss history

• Self-test results

Table 3-4 summarizes the commands the host can send to query the status of the TCS. Table 3-4also shows the status reports sent by the TCS in response to the host’s queries.

� 7\SHV�RI�6WDWXV�4XHULHV�DQG�5HVSRQVHV

The commands that query the status of the TCS (and the responses of the TCS) are of two types:

• ANSI-specified commands, which have the form:

<ESC>[...n

• ANSI-compatible TCS-private commands, which have the form:

<ESC>[>...n

The TCS responses to these commands follow the same format as the respective commandsexcept for the cursor position report, which has a terminator of R instead of n.

The Reporting Format command can be used to cause the TCS to append a common terminatingcode to all TCS status responses. The Reporting Format command can also be used to specifydifferent introducer codes. (This command is described in detail in Chapter 4.)

3-14

7DEOH������6XPPDU\�RI�6WDWXV�4XHULHV�DQG�5HSRUWV

+267�&200$1' 7&6�5(63216( 0($1,1*

�(6&!�>�F 5HTXHVW�7&6�7\SH�&RPPDQG�

�(6&!�>�3W!���3Y!��3P!���3G!���3Z!��3R!�F

7&6�W\SH�UHSRUW���3W!�LV���IRU���������IRU��������3Y!�LV�ILUPZDUHYHUVLRQ��PQQ� �YHUVLRQ�P�QQ����3P!�LV�WKH�DPRXQW�LQ�E\WHV�RI([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\���3G!� ����3Z!� ����DQG��3R!�LV�UHVHUYHGIRU�ODWHU�XVH�

�(6&!�>���Q 5HTXHVW�7&6�6WDWXV�FRPPDQG�5HTXHVWV�RSHUDWLRQDO�VWDWXV�RI�7&6�

�(6&!�>���Q 1R�PDOIXQFWLRQ�VLQFH�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�(6&!�>���Q 0DOIXQFWLRQ�VLQFH�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW���7&6�FRQWLQXHV�WRRSHUDWH��

�(6&!�>���Q 5HDG�&XUVRU�3RVLWLRQ�FRPPDQG��5HTXHVWV�FXUVRU�SRVLWLRQ�

�(6&!�>�3O!���3F!�5 7KH�FXUVRU�LV�DW�OLQH��3O!�DQG�FROXPQ��3F!�

�(6&!�>�!���Q 5HTXHVW�3RZHU�6WDWXV�FRPPDQG��&KHFNV�IRU�SRZHU�ORVV�VLQFHODVW�LQTXLU\�

�(6&!�>�!���Q 1R�SRZHU�ORVV�KDV�RFFXUUHG�

�(6&!�>!��Q 3RZHU�ORVV�KDV�RFFXUUHG���,I�WKH�3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�LV�VHW�WKLV�VHTXHQFH�LV�VHQW�DV\QFKURQRXVO\��

�(6&!�>�!�����3N!�Q 5HDG�7RXFKNH\�6WDWXV�FRPPDQG��5HTXHVWV�VWDWXV�RI�D�VSHFLILFWRXFKNH\�RU�WKH�ODVW�WRXFKNH\�WRXFKHG�EXW�QRW�\HW�UHSRUWHG�

�(6&!�>�!�����3N!�Q �([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�UHVHW���7RXFK�VWDWXV�RI�UHTXHVWHGWRXFKNH\�RU�ODVW�WRXFKNH\�WRXFKHG�EXW�QRW�\HW�UHSRUWHG��,I�3ROOHG7RXFK�0RGH�LV�UHVHW��WKLV�VHTXHQFH�FDQ�EH�JHQHUDWHGDV\QFKURQRXVO\�

�(6&!�>�!�����3N!��3V!�Q

�([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�VHW���7RJJOH�VWDWXV�RI�UHTXHVWHGWRXFKNH\��3N!�LV��3V!��,I�3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�LV�UHVHW��WKLVVHTXHQFH�FDQ�EH�JHQHUDWHG�DV\QFKURQRXVO\�

�(6&!�>�!���Q 5HDG�&KDUDFWHU�8QGHU�&XUVRU�FRPPDQG��5HTXHVWV�FKDUDFWHU�DWWKH�FXUUHQW�FXUVRU�SRVLWLRQ�

�(6&!�>�!�����3F!�Q 7KH�GHFLPDO�YDOXH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHU�LV��3F!�

3-15

7DEOH������6XPPDU\�RI�6WDWXV�4XHULHV�DQG�5HSRUWV�FRQWLQXHG

+267�&200$1' 7&6�5(63216( 0($1,1*

�(6&!�>�!���Q 5HDG�$WWULEXWHV�8QGHU�&XUVRU�FRPPDQG��5HTXHVWV�FKDUDFWHUDWWULEXWHV�DW�FXUUHQW�FXUVRU�SRVLWLRQ�

�(6&!�>!����3KL!��3XO!���3EOLQN!���3UY!��3F!�Q

�(6&!>!���3KL!��3XO!��3EOLQN!��3UY!��3F!��3IJ!��3EJ!��3FF!��Q

�3KL!� �KLJKOLJKW���� �RQ����� �RII���3XO!� �XQGHUOLQH���� �RQ���� �RII���3EOLQN!� �EOLQN���� �RQ����� �RII���3UY!� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR��� �RQ����� �RII���3F!� �FRQFHDOHG���� �RQ����� �RII�

&RORU�7&6

�3IJ!� �IRUHJURXQG�FRORU���������3FF!� �FRQFHDO�FRORU���������3EJ!� �EDFNJURXQG�FRORU��������

�(6&!�>�!���Q 5HTXHVW�520�7HVW�5HVXOWV�FRPPDQG��7HVWV�UHVXOWV�RI�520FKHFNVXP�WHVWV�

�(6&�>!����3ORRSV!��3IDLO!���3VXP!Q

520�WHVWHG��3ORRSV!�WLPHV�DQG�IDLOHG��3IDLO!�WLPHV��7KH�PRVWUHFHQW�VXP�LQ�HUURU�LV��3VXP!�

�(6&!�>�!���Q 5HTXHVW�1RQYRODWLOH�0HPRU\�7HVW�5HSRUW�FRPPDQG��5HTXHVWVUHVXOWV�RI�QRQYRODWLOH�PHPRU\�WHVWV�

�(6&!�>!�����3ORRSV!��3IDLO!���3VXP!�Q

1RQYRODWLOH�PHPRU\�WHVWHG��3ORRSV!�WLPHV�DQG�IDLOHG��3IDLO!WLPHV��7KH�PRVW�UHFHQW�VXP�LQ�HUURU�LV��3VXP!�

�(6&!�>�!���Q 5HTXHVW�5$0�7HVW�5HSRUW�FRPPDQG��5HTXHVWV�5$0�WHVWUHVXOWV�

�(6&!�>!�����3ORRSV!��3IDLO!���3DGGU!��3HUURU!���3KLVWRU\!��Q

5$0�WHVWHG��3ORRSV!�WLPHV�DQG�IDLOHG��3IDLO!�WLPHV��7KH�ODVWIDLOXUH�RFFXUUHG�DW�DGGUHVV��3DGGU!�DQG�UHVXOWHG�LQ�GDWD�ELWHUURUV�DV�VKRZQ�LQ��3HUURU!��7KH�KLVWRU\�RI�DOO�GDWD�ELW�HUURUV�LVLQ��3KLVWRU\!�

�(6&!�>�!���Q 5HTXHVW�7RXFK�3DQHO�7HVW�5HSRUW��5HTXHVWV�WRXFK�SDQHO�WHVWUHVXOWV�

�(6&!�>!�����3ORRSV!��3IDLO!���3HUURU!�Q

7RXFK�SDQHO�WHVWHG��3ORRSV!�WLPHV�DQG�IDLOHG��3IDLO!�WLPHV��7KHPRVW�UHFHQW�HUURU�RFFXUUHG�DW�WRXFK�FHOO��3HUURU!�

�(6&!�>�!�����Q 5HDG�6FUHHQ�0HPRU\�5HPDLQLQJ�&RPPDQG�

�(6&!>!�����3VX!��3EX!���3VU!���3EU!Q

6FUHHQ�PHPRU\�UHPDLQLQJ�UHSRUW���3VX!�LV�WKH�QXPEHU�RI�VWRUHGVFUHHQV�LQ�XVH���3EX!�LV�WKH�QXPEHU�RI�E\WHV�LQ�XVH���3VU!�LVWKH�QXPEHU�RI�VFUHHQV�UHPDLQLQJ��DQ�DYHUDJH�RI�WKH�QXPEHU�WKDWFRXOG�VWLOO�EH�VWRUHG����3EU!�LV�WKH�QXPEHU�RI�E\WHV�RI�VFUHHQPHPRU\�UHPDLQLQJ�

�(6&!�>�!�����Q 5HTXHVW�(UURU�6WDWXV�&RPPDQG�

�(6&!�>!������Q 1R�HUURU�KDV�RFFXUUHG�

�(6&!�>!�����3H!�Q $Q�HUURU�RI�W\SH��3H!�KDV�RFFXUUHG�

3-16

7DEOH������6XPPDU\�RI�6WDWXV�4XHULHV�DQG�5HSRUWV�FRQWLQXHG

+267�&200$1' 7&6�5(63216( 0($1,1*

�(6&!�>�!������3VFU!�Q

5HDG�6FUHHQ�([LVWHQFH�&RPPDQG�

�(6&!>!�������Q 6FUHHQ��3VFU!�GRHV�QRW�H[LVW�

�(6&!�>!�������Q 6FUHHQ��3VFU!�GRHV�H[LVW�

3-17

6800$5<�2)�6(/(&7$%/(�02'(6A TCS mode is a state that can be set or reset by the host or user to control TCS operation. TheTCS supports several modes specified by the ANSI standard. In addition, the TCS supportsseveral DEC-private and TCS-private modes. Table 3-4 provides a summary of these modes.

NOTEAll TCS modes are fully compatible with the ANSI standard, which provides for the use of private modes.

Each mode has two states: set or reset. As Table 3-5 indicates, some modes can be set or reset bythe host, some by the user, and some by both the host and the user.

The host can set or reset TCS modes one at a time (using individual mode commands) or incombination (using the Set Mode command or the Reset Mode command). For example, theSend-Receive Mode and the New Line Mode (both of which are ANSI-specified modes) can beset using two separate commands:

<ESC> [1 2 h (a form of the Send-Receive Mode command)

<ESC> [2 0 h (a form of the New Line Mode command)

Or they can be set with a single command, as follows:

<ESC> [1 2 ; 2 0 h (a form of the Set Mode command)

NOTEOnly modes of the same type can be set or reset within a single control string. For example, the ANSI-specified New Line Mode and the TCS-private Touch Panel Lockout Mode cannot be set with a single

control string.

A detailed description of each TCS mode is provided in this manual, with the description of therespective mode command. The Set Mode and Reset Mode commands are described under thenext heading.

3-18

7DEOH������6XPPDU\�RI�6HOHFWDEOH�0RGHV

02'( 01(021,& 6285&( �3V!

$16,�6SHFLILHG�0RGHV����

.H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW0RGH

.$0 5HPRWH �

6HQG�5HFHLYH�0RGH 650 /RFDO����5HPRWH ��

1HZ�/LQH�0RGH /10 /RFDO�5HPRWH ��

'(&�3ULYDWH�0RGHV����

6FUHHQ�%DFNJURXQG0RGH

'(&6&10 /RFDO�5HPRWH �

$XWR�:UDS�$URXQG0RGH

'(&$:0 /RFDO�5HPRWH �

2ULJLQ�0RGH '(&20 5HPRWH �

.H\SDG�0RGH���� '(&.3$0 5HPRWH �QRQH�

7&6�3ULYDWH�0RGHV����

3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH )370 5HPRWH �

7RXFK�3DQHO�/RFNRXW0RGH

)7/0 5HPRWH �

12&+$1*($WWULEXWH�0RGH

)1&$0 5HPRWH �

3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW0RGH

)38,0 5HPRWH �

6HWXS�/RFNRXW�0RGH )68/0 5HPRWH �

([WHQGHG�5HSRUW0RGH

)(50 5HPRWH �

(UURU�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH )(,0 5HPRWH �

)227127(6�

�� $16,�VSHFLILHG�PRGHV�DUH�VHW�DQG�UHVHW�E\�WKH�IROORZLQJ�FRPPDQGV�

�(6&!�>�3V!��������3V!�O��WR�UHVHW�

�(6&!>�3V!������3V!K�WR�VHW�

�� '(&�SULYDWH�PRGHV�DUH�VHW�DQG�UHVHW�E\�WKH�IROORZLQJ�FRPPDQGV�

�(6&!�>"��3V!���������3V!�O��WR�UHVHW�

�(6&!�>"��3V!�������3V!�K��WR�VHW�

�� 7&6�SULYDWH�PRGHV�DUH�VHW�DQG�UHVHW�E\�WKH�IROORZLQJ�FRPPDQGV�

�(6&!�>!�3V!������3V!�O��WR�UHVHW�

�(6&!>!�3V!������3V!K�WR�VHW�

�� 7KH�6HQG�5HFHLYH�PRGH�LV�FRQWUROOHG�ORFDOO\�E\�WKH�/RFDO�(FKR�SDUDPHWHU�LQ�WKH�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�

�� 7KH�.H\SDG�PRGH�LV�VHW�WR�DSSOLFDWLRQ�PRGH�E\��(6&!� �DQG�LV�VHW�WR�QXPHULF�PRGH�E\��(6&!!�

3-19

7&6�02'(�&200$1'6TCS Mode commands set or reset one or more TCS modes. The TCS Mode commands are:

• Reset Mode (Remote)

• Set Mode (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begin on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC- private commands.

3-20

5HVHW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�>50@��5HPRWH�The Reset Mode command allows the host to reset one or more TCS modes of the same type(ANSI-specified, DEC-private or TCS-private).

A detailed description of each TCS mode is provided with the description of the respective modecommand in Chapter 4.

� '()$8/7

Each mode has its own default value.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user can set four modes by changing parameters in the Setup Screen (Table 3-5).

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<Ps>; ... ; <Ps> l (for ANSI-specified modes)

<ESC>[?<Ps>;... ; <Ps> l (for DEC-private modes)

<ESC>[> <Ps>; ... ; <Ps> l (for TCS-private modes)

<Ps> is a selective parameter that determines which mode or modes are to be reset. Table 3-5shows the value of this parameter for each mode.

NOTEThe Final code for this command is a lowercase letter “L”, for “low” (ASCII 6c hex). Note that the Control

Sequence Introducer alone introduces ANSI- specified mode commands, while the optional privatecommand code specifies the type of mode.

• For ANSI-specified modes: <ESC>[

• For DEC-private modes: <ESC>[?

• For TCS-private modes: <ESC>[>

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If <Ps> is omitted or has the value 0, then that parameter is ignored.

If <Ps> is not a legal value (for the type of mode defined by the Control Sequence Introducer),that parameter is ignored.

3-21

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[2;12l

Resets the ANSI-specified modes, Keyboard Lockout Mode [KAM] and Send-Receive Mode[SRM].

<ESC> [? 5 l

Resets the DEC-private mode, Screen Background Mode (DECSCNM).

<ESC> [> 3;1l

Resets the TCS-private modes, NOCHANGE Attribute Mode {FNCAM} and Polled TouchMode {FPTM}.

3-22

6HW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�>60@��5HPRWH�The Set Mode command allows the host to set one or more TCS modes of the same type (ANSI-specified, DEC-private or TCS-private).

A detailed description of each TCS mode is provided with the description of the respective modein Chapter 4.

� '()$8/7

Each mode has its own default value.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user can set four modes by changing parameters in the Setup Screen (see Table 3-5).

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> [<Ps>;... ; <Ps> h (for ANSI-specified modes)

<ESC> [? <Ps>.... ; <Ps> h (for DEC-private modes)

<ESC> [> <Ps>;... ; <Ps> h (for TCS-private modes)

<Ps> is a selective parameter that determines which mode or modes are to be set. Table 3-5shows the value of this parameter for each mode.

The Final code for this command is h (for “high”).

Notice that the Control Sequence Introducer alone introduces ANSI-specified mode commands,while the optional private command code specifies the type of mode.

• For ANSI-specified modes: <ESC> [

• For DEC-private modes: <ESC> [?

• For TCS-private modes: <ESC> [>

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If <Ps> is omitted or has the value 0, then that parameter is ignored.

If <Ps> is not a legal value (for the type of mode defined by the Control Sequence Introducer),that parameter is ignored.

3-23

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[20h

Sets the ANSI-specified mode, New Line Mode [LNM].

<ESC>[?7h

Sets the DEC-private mode, Auto Wrap-Around Mode (DECAWM).

<ESC>[>4;5h

Sets the TCS-private modes, Power-Up Interrupt Mode (FPUIM) and Setup Lockout Mode(FSULM).

3-24

&2/25�7&6��6800$5<�2)�&2/25�352*5$00,1*The color TCS has eight basic colors programmed in Read-Only Memory (ROM): black, red,green, yellow, blue, magenta, cyan, and white.

For each character on the display, the foreground color and background color can beprogrammed independently. The character colors are handled like any other character attributes,except they can be selected locally from the Setup Screen, as well as remotely with the SetCommand Attributes command. For details see Character Interpretation Commands, Chapter 5.

� 'LVSOD\LQJ�DQG�(UDVLQJ�&RORU�&KDUDFWHULVWLFVMany TCS commands cause characters to be displayed or erased. Normally, the color TCSdisplays each character’s foreground and background in the currently selected colors. Whencharacters are erased, each erased character is replaced by a space character in the currentbackground color. However, the color TCS has several controls that provide much flexibilityover when and how foreground and background colors are actually used. These capabilities aresummarized in the following paragraphs.

� +LJKOLJKWLQJ�&RORU�&KDUDFWHUVEach of the eight basic colors has an associated highlight color which is generally a lighter orbrighter version of the basic color. When the highlight attribute is selected, using the SetCharacter Attributes command, the highlight color is sustained for the currently programmedforeground color.

� 5HYHUVLQJ�)RUHJURXQG�DQG�%DFNJURXQG�&RORUVThe TCS has two controls that cause the selected foreground and background colors to reversepositions: Screen Background Mode and the reverse-video character attribute.

• The Screen Background Mode command controls the foreground/background colorrelationship for the entire TCS display. While this mode is reset, normal video is in effect,while it is set, reverse-video is in effect. The Screen Background Mode command can beissued locally or remotely. Refer to Screen Appearance Commands in Section 5.

• The reverse-video character attribute is a parameter of the Set Character Attributescommand. For each character with this attribute selected, the foreground color replaces thebackground color and the background color replaces the foreground color.

These two controls interact such that when the Screen Background Mode is set and the reverse-video attribute is selected for a given character, the character is displayed with normalforeground/background color relationship.

3-25

� &RQFHDOLQJ�&RORU�&KDUDFWHUVColors can be concealed using the Set Character Attributes command to do two functions:

• select a conceal color

• select the concealed attribute for any characters you wish to temporarily conceal

Any of the eight basic colors can be selected as the conceal color. Normally, the conceal colorshould be the same as the background color used for most of the screen. When the concealedattribute is selected for any area of the screen , the currently programmed conceal color is used tofill the foreground and background of each character of that area.

Concealed characters can be made visible again by sending the Reverse Character Attributes in aRegion command to turn off the conceal attribute. See Region Commands in Section 6.

� 5HDGLQJ�D�&KDUDFWHU·V�$WWULEXWHVAn application program that runs on the host computer can determine which character attributesare in effect at any given time. The Read Character Attributes Under Cursor command (seeSection 5) can read the character attributes of a character under the cursor for any cursor positionon the display.

� &RORU�&RQWUROV�RQ�WKH�6HWXS�6FUHHQThree TCS features pertaining to color can be controlled locally:

• Screen Background Mode command

• Foreground Color

• Background Color

Refer to Color TCS Setup Screen Programming Considerations in Section 4 for moreinformation.

4-1

&+$37(5�����&21752//,1*�7+(�6(783�6&5((1�$1'6(5,$/�,17(5)$&(

� ,1752'8&7,21This chapter describes the commands that control the Setup Screen and serial interface in theTouch Control Screen (TCS). Topics include:

• An overview of the volatility of TCS functions

• Setup Screen programming considerations

• Setup Screen commands

• Communication commands

The Setup Screen commands control the user’s access to the Setup Screen. They can also be usedto save, recall, or reset Setup Screen parameters remotely.

The Communication commands have three functions:

• configuring the serial interface to meet the host communication requirements

• selecting whether the TCS accepts remote commands from the host computer or keyboard

• clearing user inputs

� 7&6�)81&7,21$/�92/$7,/,7<Table 4-1 provides an overview of the volatility of TCS functions. This table shows the state ofthe TCS immediately after the following events:

• First power-up or hard reset

• Subsequent power-ups or soft reset

• Execution of the Recall Setup command

A soft reset is executed on remote command from the host or when the user touches RESET ortypes Shift/Setup on the optional keyboard from within the Setup Screen. A hard reset isexecuted only on remote command from the host. Soft and hard resets are described in moredetail later in this chapter, under Reset Command.

The Recall Setup command is described later under its own heading.

4-2

7DEOH������2YHUYLHZ�RI�)XQFWLRQDO�9RODWLOLW\

)81&7,21 ),567�32:(5�8325�+$5'�5(6(7

/$7(5�32:(5�8325�62)7�5(6(7

5(&$//�6(783

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ

$GGUHVV�6WDWH $GGUHVVHG������� 8QDGGUHVVHG���� &RQGLWLRQDO�������

$GGUHVV 56������� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

%DXG�5DWH �������� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

'DWD�%LWV ����� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

3DULW\�(QDEOH 2II���� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

3DULW\�6HQVH 2GG���� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

6WRS�%LWV ����� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

;21�;2))�0RGH 2Q���� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

/RFDO�(FKR�0RGH 2II���� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

6HQG�5HFHLYH�0RGH 6HW���� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

/RFDO�5HPRWH�0RGH 5HPRWH 5HPRWH 8QFKDQJHG

+DUGZDUH�+DQGVKDNH 1RQH���� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

7UDQVPLW�0RGH 1RUPDO /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

6WDOO�8QVWDOO 8QVWDOOHG 8QVWDOOHG 8QFKDQJHG

(UURU�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH 2II 2II 8QFKDQJHG

3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH 2II 8QFKDQJHG 8QFKDQJHG

5HSRUWLQJ�)RUPDW 'HIDXOW 8QFKDQJHG 8QFKDQJHG

,QSXW�%XIIHU &OHDUHG &OHDUHG 8QFKDQJHG

2XWSXW�%XIIHU &OHDUHG &OHDUHG 8QFKDQJHG

576 2II�2Q 2II�2Q 8QFKDQJHG

'75 2II�2Q 2II�2Q 8QFKDQJHG

6576 2II��2Q 2II�2Q 8QFKDQJHG

7UDQVPLW�/LQHV 'ULYHQ������� 8QGULYHQ���� &RQGLWLRQDO�������

'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ

&RQWHQWV &OHDUHG &OHDUHG 8QFKDQJHG

6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW $6&,, $6&,, 8QFKDQJHG

([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW 6SHFLDO 6SHFLDO 8QFKDQJHG

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�6HOHFWHG 1RUPDO 1RUPDO 8QFKDQJHG

12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH 2II 2II 8QFKDQJHG

2ULJLQ�0RGH 5HVHW 5HVHW 8QFKDQJHG

6FUROOLQJ�5HJLRQ )XOO�GLVSOD\ )XOO�GLVSOD\ 8QFKDQJHG

4-3

7DEOH������2YHUYLHZ�RI�)XQFWLRQDO�9RODWLOLW\�&RQWLQXHG

)81&7,21 ),567�32:(5�8325�+$5'�5(6(7

/$7(5�32:(5�8325�62)7�5(6(7

5(&$//�6(783

'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ

&RORU�&RQWUDVW 'HIDXOW /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

&XUVRU�3RVLWLRQ +RPH +RPH 8QFKDQJHG

&XUVRU�7\SH 6ORZ�EOLQNLQJ�EORFN /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

6FUHHQ�%DFNJURXQG 1RUPDO /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

)RUHJURXQG�&RORU ����ZKLWH� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

%DFNJURXQG�&RORU ����EODFN� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

&RQFHDO�&RORU ����EODFN� /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

'LVSOD\�$FWLYLW\

6WRUHG�6FUHHQV

2Q

'HOHWHG

/DVW�VDYHG

8QFKDQJHG

/DVW�VDYHG

8QFKDQJHG

0LVFHOODQHRXV

6FUHHQ�6HOHFWHG ���'LVSOD\HG� ���'LVSOD\HG� 8QFKDQJHG

&KDUDFWHU�6HW�6HOHFWHG 6WDQGDUG 6WDQGDUG 8QFKDQJHG

'\QDPLF�&KDU��)RQW�� $6&,, 8QFKDQJHG 8QFKDQJHG

'\QDPLF�&KDU��)RQW�� 6SHFLDO 8QFKDQJHG 8QFKDQJHG

2S��6WDWXV�:LQGRZ &OHDUHG &OHDUHG 8QFKDQJHG����

$XWR�:UDS�0RGH 2II /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

1HZ�/LQH�0RGH 2II /DVW�VDYHG /DVW�VDYHG

15& 2II /DVW�6DYHG /DVW�VDYHG

7RXFK�3DQHO

7RXFK�3DQHO�/RFNRXW�0RGH 8QORFNHG 8QORFNHG 8QFKDQJHG

3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH 2II 2II 8QFKDQJHG

$XWR�5HSHDW�5DWH 2II 2II 8QFKDQJHG

7RXFK�$XGLEOH�$WWULEXWH�0RGH %HHS %HHS 8QFKDQJHG

([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH 2II 2II 8QFKDQJHG

7RXFKNH\V &OHDUHG &OHDUHG 8QFKDQJHG

7RXFKNH\�7\SHV $XWR�5HSHDW $XWR�5HSHDW 8QFKDQJHG

7RXFKNH\�9LVXDO�([WHQW 1RQH 1RQH 8QFKDQJHG

7RXFKNH\�7RJJOH�6WDWH 2II 2II 8QFKDQJHG

4-4

7DEOH������2YHUYLHZ�RI�)XQFWLRQDO�9RODWLOLW\�&RQWLQXHG

)81&7,21 ),567�32:(5�8325�+$5'�5(6(7

/$7(5�32:(5�8325�62)7�5(6(7

5(&$//�6(783

.H\ERDUG

6HW�8S�/RFNRXW�0RGH 8QORFNHG 8QORFNHG 8QFKDQJHG

.H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW�0RGH 8QORFNHG 8QORFNHG 8QFKDQJHG

&DSV�/RFN 8QORFNHG 8QORFNHG 8QFKDQJHG

6FUROO�/RFN 8QORFNHG 8QORFNHG 8QFKDQJHG

.H\SDG�0RGH 1XPHULF 1XPHULF 8QFKDQJHG

+DUGZDUH

6HOI�7HVWV 3HUIRUPHG 3HUIRUPHG 1RQH

%HHSHU 6RXQGHG 6RXQGHG 6LOHQW

1RWHV�

�� 7KHVH�LWHPV�DUH�XQFKDQJHG�GXULQJ�KDUG�UHVHW�WR�DYRLG�GLVWXUELQJ�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�ZLWK�WKH�KRVW�

�� 7UXH�RQO\�LI�D�QRQYRODWLOH�PHPRU\�FKHFNVXP�HUURU�GRHV�QRW�RFFXU�GXULQJ�WKH�RSHUDWLRQ�

4-5

� 6(783�6&5((1�352*5$00,1*�&216,'(5$7,216The following paragraphs explain how the host can interact with the Setup Screen. For SetupScreen operating instructions, refer to the Installation Guide. For additional information aboutparticular modes, refer to the table "Summary of TCS Commands" in Chapter 3 of theApplication Developer’s Guide.

� .H\ERDUG�/RFNRXWThe external keyboard can be locked out during normal operation, however, it is never locked outwhile the Setup Screen is displayed, even if the Keyboard Lockout Mode is set. The KeyboardLockout Mode setting takes effect again as soon as the Setup Screen is exited or theCommunication Monitor is entered.

� 7RXFK�3DQHO�/RFNRXWTouch panel input is never locked out while the Setup Screen is displayed, even if the TouchPanel Lockout Mode is set. The Touch Panel Lockout Mode setting takes effect again as soon asthe Setup Screen is exited or the Communication Monitor is entered.

� 'LVSOD\�$FWLYLW\Entering the Setup Screen is the only operation that temporarily overrides a Display Activityparameter setting of "off." (The Display Activity parameter controls whether the screen is lightor dark.)

If the display is dark because the Display Activity parameter is set to "off" (or because thedisplay has timed out), the display relights when the Setup Screen is called up.

If the Display Activity parameter is set to "off" while the Setup Screen is displayed, the displayremains lit until the Setup Screen is exited and then the display darkens.

� 'LVSOD\�&RQWHQWVWhen the Setup Screen is entered, the characters previously shown on the display are saved inmemory with their attributes. When the Setup Screen is exited, the previous screen is restored.

Changes to the Setup parameters can be initiated by the user or the host, while the Setup Screenis displayed or when it is not. While the Setup Screen is displayed, changes to the Setupparameters take effect immediately if they are initiated by the user. The changes can be viewedon the display as they are made, with the exception of changes to the Display Activity parameter,which take effect only after the Setup Screen has been exited. Changes to the Setup parametersinitiated by the host while the Setup Screen is being displayed are buffered and have no effectuntil the Setup Screen is exited. If the Setup Screen is not displayed, changes to the Setupparameters initiated by the host take effect immediately.

NOTEA change to the NRC affects only the characters received after the NRC has been changed.

4-6

� +RVW�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�GXULQJ�6HWXS�6HVVLRQWhile the Setup Screen is displayed, the TCS continues to receive codes from the host but doesnot display or otherwise act on them. The TCS stores the codes until its input buffer is 75% full,at which time the TCS stalls the host.

When the Setup Screen is exited, the TCS interprets the codes received from the host during theSetup session and unstalls the host.

� 0HWKRGV�RI�&KDQJLQJ�6HWXS�3DUDPHWHUVOn power-up, the TCS checks the nonvolatile Setup memory for valid Setup parameterinitialization data. If the data in the memory is valid, it is used. If the data in nonvolatile memoryis invalid, the default values contained in factory-programmed ROM are used as the initial valuesfor the parameters. Parameter values, after being initialized by powering on the TCS, can bechanged by any of the following three methods:

1. Changing individual parameters using local commands or (where allowed) remote commands.

The user can change any Setup parameter by using local commands (using the Setup Screen).The host can change only certain Setup parameters by sending remote commands. The sourceof control over individual Setup parameters is summarized in Table 4-2

7DEOH������&RQWURO�RYHU�,QGLYLGXDO�6HWXS�3DUDPHWHUV

6(783�3$5$0(7(5 6285&(�2)�&21752/

%DFNJURXQG /RFDO�5HPRWH

)RUHJURXQG�&RORU� /RFDO�5HPRWH

%DFNJURXQG�&RORU� /RFDO�5HPRWH

'LVSOD\�$FWLYLW\ /RFDO�5HPRWH

&XUVRU�7\SH /RFDO�5HPRWH

15& /RFDO�5HPRWH

$GGUHVV /RFDO

%DXG�5DWH /RFDO

'DWD�%LWV /RFDO

3DULW\�(QDEOH /RFDO

3DULW\�6HQVH /RFDO

6WRS�%LWV /RFDO

;21�;2)) /RFDO

/RFDO�(FKR /RFDO�5HPRWH�

/RFDO���5HPRWH /RFDO

1HZ�/LQH /RFDO���5HPRWH

$XWR�:UDS /RFDO�5HPRWH

+DUGZDUH�+DQGVKDNH /RFDO

7UDQVPLW�0RGH /RFDO

* For the color TCS only.

** The Local echo feature is controlled remotely by the Send-Receive Mode command.

2. Recalling all parameter values using the Recall Setup command.

4-7

The Recall Setup command replaces all the Setup parameters with the values stored by thelast Save Setup command. Recall Setup is executed when the user presses RECALL on theSetup Screen (or types Shift/R on the keyboard), or when the host sends the remotecommand Recall Setup. (See Recall Setup Command, later in this chapter.)

3. Resetting or recalling parameters by doing either a hard or soft reset with the Resetcommand.

The host can do either a hard or soft reset. The user can do a soft reset only (by pressingRESET on the Setup Screen or by typing Shift/Setup on the keyboard). For more informationon hard and soft resets, see Reset Command, later in this chapter.

� &RORU�7&6�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�3URJUDPPLQJ�&RQVLGHUDWLRQVColor attributes for characters displayed on the TCS are controlled with the Set CharacterAttributes command. Full control of this command is available by sending a control string fromthe host or by the keyboard in local mode. Refer to Character Interpretation Commands inSection 5 for details.

7KH�IRUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQG�FRORU�SDUDPHWHUV�RI�WKH�6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�FDQ�EHFRQWUROOHG�ORFDOO\�DQG�UHPRWHO\��7KHVH�SDUDPHWHUV�HQDEOH�WKH�KRVW�XVHU�WR�VHOHFW�DQ\�RI�HLJKW�FRORUVWR�GLVSOD\�FKDUDFWHU�FHOO�IRUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQG�DQG�DUH�OLVWHG�LQ�WKH�XSSHU�ULJKW�SRUWLRQ�RI�WKH6HWXS�6FUHHQ��7DEOH�����GHILQHV�WKH�QXPHULF�YDOXHV�IRU�WKH�IRUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQG�FRORUSDUDPHWHUV�

7DEOH������1XPHULF�9DOXHV�IRU�)RUHJURXQG�DQG�%DFNJURXQG�&RORU�3DUDPHWHUV

&2/25 )25(*5281' %$&.*5281'

%ODFN �� ����GHIDXOW�

5HG �� ��

*UHHQ �� ��

<HOORZ �� ��

%OXH �� ��

0DJHQWD �� ��

&\DQ �� ��

:KLWH ����GHIDXOW� ��

4-8

� &RORUV�8VHG�WR�'LVSOD\�WKH�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�,WV�6XEVFUHHQV

The Setup Screen and its subscreens are displayed using the white foreground and bluebackground whenever the Setup Screen is entered. The numeric values shown in the above tableindicate the colors last set by the Set Character Attributes Command for the screen that wasdisplayed before entering the Setup Screen.

While in the Setup screen, if either the foreground or background color is selected, the SetupScreen immediately displays in the foreground and background colors that match the numericvalues in the parameter list but the numeric value does not change. After the initial selection ofcolors, any subsequent selection of colors will change the numeric value and be displayedimmediately.

If the foreground and background are set to the same color, the selected numeric values areshown in the parameter list but the Setup Screen and its subscreens are displayed in defaultcolors to ensure setup information is always visible.

� (IIHFWV�RI�6FUHHQ�%DFNJURXQG�0RGH�RQ�&RORU�$WWULEXWHV

The Screen Background Mode can be controlled locally with the Background parameter on theSetup Screen and remotely by the control string from the host. Changes in the ScreenBackground Mode take effect immediately.

Assuming the reverse-video attribute is not in effect for any given character, the ScreenBackground Mode has the following effect on foreground and background colors:

• When Screen Background Mode is reset (normal), each character’s foreground is displayedin the selected foreground color and the background in the selected background color.

• When Screen Background Mode is set (reverse), each character’s foreground is displayed inthe selected background color and the background in the selected foreground color.

NOTECharacters with the reverse-video attribute selected are displayed with a foreground/background color

relationship opposite to that described above. For details, see Set Character Attributes Command inSection 5.

� 8VHU�+RVW�&RQIOLFW�5HVROXWLRQSeveral of the Setup parameters that can be controlled locally by the user from within the SetupScreen can also be programmed by the host with remote commands. (See Table 4-2.) Therefore,conflict between the actions of the user and the host can occur. Conflicts are resolved as follows:

1. Both the user and the host can change local/remote Setup parameters with equal priority. Thevalue of a Setup parameter remains unchanged until the value is changed by either the user orhost. (A value will also change if the TCS is turned off before a previous change is saved.)

2. Where the host must have absolute control over the configuration of the TCS, the SetupLockout Mode should be set. This prevents the user from entering the Setup Screen andchanging the configuration of the TCS in any way, yet still allows the user to enterinformation through the touch panel and optional keyboard. (To set the Setup Lockout Mode,see Setup Lockout Mode Command, later in this chapter.)

4-9

� 3HUPDQHQFH�RI�&KDQJHV�WR�6HWXS�3DUDPHWHUVTo ensure that the Setup parameter values currently in use are saved while the TCS is turned off,a Save Setup command must be executed. The Save Setup command causes the TCS to store theSetup parameters in nonvolatile Setup memory for automatic recall at the next power-up. (TheSave Setup command is described in detail later in this chapter.)

The programmer should be aware of three special cases regarding the permanence of changes tooperating parameters:

1. The setting of the Local/Remote Mode is never saved and is always restored as "remote."

This is a safety device that ensures the TCS never powers up or resets into the Local Mode,which could confuse the user or, in installations where the user is barred from the SetupScreen, trap the TCS in the Local Mode.

2. The reporting format is preserved during power losses.

This ensures that the TCS uses the correct reporting format when it sends a power-upinterrupt to the host. (The TCS sends a power-up interrupt only if the Power-Up InterruptMode is set.)

3. A hard reset, available only to the host, does not affect the communication-relatedparameters (Address, XON/XOFF Mode, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity Enable, Parity Sense,Stop Bits, Hardware Handshake, and Transmit Mode). The host cannot, therefore,inadvertently disrupt communication.

NOTEA remote soft reset is not recommended because it could change communication parameters. However, ifthe host is to perform a soft reset, the soft reset should be preceded by a Save Setup command to ensure

that communication parameters currently in use are not changed.

If display activity is set to "off" and saved with a Save Setup command, the next time power is applied tothe TCS, the TCS starts up with the screen off.

4-10

� 6(783�6&5((1�&200$1'6The Setup Screen commands are used to control the user’s access to the Setup Screen, and tosave, recall, or reset Setup parameters remotely.

The Setup Screen commands are:

• Setup Lockout Mode (Remote)

• Save Setup (Local/Remote)

• Recall Setup (Local/Remote)

• Reset (Local/Remote)

Setup Screen commands cannot be used to set Setup Screen parameters individually. Thecommand to set an individual parameter is grouped with commands functionally related to thatparameter. For example, to set the Baud Rate parameter, see Communication Commands, later inthis chapter.

The Setup Screen commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference,each command description begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-private commands.

4-11

� 6HWXS�/RFNRXW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�^)68/0`��5HPRWH�The Setup Lockout Mode command allows the host to lock the user out of the Setup Screen.

This command is useful when the other methods of preventing the user from changing SetupScreen parameters (locking the entire keyboard or making the SET UP switch inaccessible) areinappropriate. This feature gives the host complete control of the TCS.

The host controls the Setup Lockout Mode using the Set Mode and Reset Mode commands.When the Setup Lockout Mode is reset (the default), the user can enter the Setup Screen bypressing the SET UP switch on the optional keyboard, allowing the user to change the SetupScreen parameters. When the Setup Lockout Mode is set, the SET UP switch on the keyboardhas no effect on TCS operation.

The state of the Setup Lockout Mode is not preserved during loss of power. If a secure system isrequired, the host must immediately set the Setup Lockout Mode on reapplication of power. Thiscan be done by programming the host to respond to a power-up interrupt from the TCS. (Formore information about power-up interrupts, see Power-Up Interrupt Command, in this chapter.)

� '()$8/7

Reset. (This setting allows user access to the Setup Screen.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>5h

Sets the Setup Lockout Mode.

<ESC>[>5l

Resets the Setup Lockout Mode. (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l",ASCII 6C hex.)

4-12

� 6DYH�6HWXS�&RPPDQG�^)668`��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Save Setup command saves the current values of the Setup parameters in nonvolatileSetup memory.

The saved Setup parameter values are automatically recalled when the TCS is turned on or whena Recall Setup command or Soft Reset command is issued by the user or host.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user issues the Save Setup command by entering the Setup Screen and pressing the SAVEtouchkey or typing Shift/S on the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[1z

� 3266,%/(�(55256

When this command is given, the TCS always attempts to save the Setup parameters, even if thenonvolatile Setup memory is malfunctioning. A checksum is calculated and stored with the Setupparameters in nonvolatile memory. During power-up or execution of a Recall Setup command,the TCS reads back the parameter data and verifies its integrity with the checksum. If thechecksum is in error, the parameter values are not changed and an error is reported in theOperational Status Window of the Setup Screen.

4-13

� 5HFDOO�6HWXS�&RPPDQG�^)568`��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Recall Setup command allows the user or host to recall the Setup parameters that were ineffect when the Save Setup command was last executed.

When the Recall Setup command is issued, the Setup parameters in effect at the time areoverwritten by the most recently saved Setup parameters. This allows a program to temporarilymodify the TCS Setup parameters, then restore the Setup parameters to their original values.

The effects of the Recall Setup command are summarized in Table 4-l.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user issues the Recall Setup command by entering the Setup Screen and pressing theRECALL touchkey or typing Shift/R on the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[2z

� 3266,%/(�(55256

When previously saved Setup parameter values are recalled from nonvolatile Setup memory bythe Recall Setup command, the TCS verifies the checksum of the parameter data. If the checksumis in error, the nonvolatile memory has malfunctioned. The Setup parameter values are notchanged and an error is reported in the Operational Status Window of the Setup Screen.

4-14

� 5HVHW�&RPPDQG�>5,6@��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Reset command allows the user or host to reset the TCS. The host can perform a soft orhard reset.

The user can perform the soft reset only. Table 4-1 summarizes the effects of the hard andsoft resets.

The soft reset is the type of reset most frequently used. It is, in effect, the equivalent of turningthe power off and then on again. The soft reset returns the TCS to the operational state it was inimmediately following the last power-up, unless new Setup parameters have been saved since thelast power-up. (The soft reset recalls the Setup parameters most recently saved in nonvolatileSetup memory.)

The hard reset returns the TCS to its factory-programmed default setup state. This is useful whenthe host must guarantee that all parameters are in a known state without having to account forparameter values that may have been saved in nonvolatile Setup memory by a Save Setupcommand. The message “WAIT - INITIALIZING EXPANSION MEMORY” is displayed whenthe unit resets.

While the TCS executes a soft or hard reset, the host serial interface is temporarily disabled. Oncompletion of the reset, the TCS sends an XON to the host. The host can use the XON as noticeto resume transmission to the TCS. Alternatively, the host can wait for a specified amount oftime after issuing a Reset command in order to guarantee that the reset has been completed. Theamount of time required for the reset to complete depends on the type of reset.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user can perform a soft reset by touching RESET on the Setup Screen or by typingShift/Setup on the optional keyboard. The user can perform a hard reset only when Local/RemoteMode is set to local. See Local/Remote Mode-Command for details.

� +267�86$*(

<ESC><Ps>c

<Ps> is a selective parameter.

If <Ps> is omitted or 0, a soft reset is performed.

If <Ps> is l, a hard reset is performed.

CAUTIONA hard reset deletes stored screens and reinitializes the dynamic character fonts.

4-15

� 3266,%/(�(55256

When performing a soft reset remotely, use caution to avoid accidentally disrupting thecommunication between the TCS and the host. A soft reset reinitializes the host interfacecommunication parameters such as Baud Rate, Data Bits, or Parity Sense, using the values savedby the most recent Save Setup command.

NOTEGenerally, a remote soft reset is not recommended. However if the host must do a soft reset, it should bepreceded by a Save Setup command to ensure that current communication parameters are not changed.

4-16

� &20081,&$7,21�&200$1'6The Communication commands have three functions:

• configuring the serial interface to meet the communication requirements of the host

• selecting whether the TCS accepts remote commands from the host computer or from thekeyboard

• clearing user inputs

For a description of the serial interface, refer to Chapter 2, Interfacing to the Host Computer.

The Communication commands are:

• Address command (Local)

• Baud Rate command (Local)

• Data Bits command (Local)

• Parity Enable command (Local)

• Parity Sense command (Local)

• Stop Bits command (Local)

• XON/XOFF Mode command (Local)

• Local/Remote Mode command (Local)

• Hardware Handshake command (Local)

• Transmit Mode command (Local)

• Reporting Format command (Remote)

• Clear User Inputs command (Remote)

Many of the communication commands are local (that is, accessible only through the SetupScreen). This prevents the host from accidentally disrupting communication by setting aparameter incorrectly.

The Communication commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease ofreference, each command description begins at the top of a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-private commands.

4-17

� $GGUHVV�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Address command is used to specify the interface or when connected to the host in amultidrop configuration to set the address to which the TCS responds.

In RS-485, the address determines when and if the TCS is allowed to transmit over thecommunication link. It also determines whether commands sent by the host take effect on a givenTCS. The address is encoded to avoid confusion with other codes crossing the communicationlink. The numeric address as designated in the Setup Screen is added to the ASCII coderepresenting the character zero. The result forms the address code as it should be transmitted bythe host. Multidrop addresses and their resulting codes are as follows:

7DEOH������0XOWLGURS�$GGUHVVHV�DQG�&RGHV

,I�WKH�$GGUHVV�LV� 7&6�5HVSRQGV�WR�$GGUHVV�&RGH +(;�$6&,,�9DOXH

³56���´ 7&6�GRHV�QRW�XVH�PXOWLGURS�SURWRFRO BB

³56����´ 7&6�GRHV�QRW�XVH�PXOWLGURS�SURWRFRO BB

� � ��

� � ��

� � ��

� � ��

� � ��

� � ��

� � ��

� � ��

� � ��

�� � �$

�� � �%

�� � �&

�� �'

�� ! �(

�� " �)

�� # ��

�� $ ��

�� % ��

�� & ��

�� ' ��

�� ( ��

�� ) ��

4-18

7DEOH������0XOWLGURS�$GGUHVVHV�DQG�&RGHV�FRQWLQXHG

,I�WKH�$GGUHVV�LV� 7&6�5HVSRQGV�WR�$GGUHVV�&RGH +(;�$6&,,�9DOXH

�� * ��

�� + ��

�� , ��

�� - �$

�� . �%

�� / �&

�� 0 �'

�� 1 �(

�� 2 �)

�� 3 ��

If the address is set to “RS232” or “RS-422” the TCS and host communicate as if they were theonly devices on the communication link. The TCS leaves its transmitter connected to thecommunication link at all times, except during power-down and reset.

If the address is set to any value 1 through 32, the TCS operates using multidrop protocol andresponds to the address chosen. Address codes sent by the host with a value greater than P(greater than address 32) are ignored. When the host addresses a TCS individually, only theaddressed TCS connects its transmitter to the communication link. Regardless of the addresssetting, the TCS receiver is always connected.

The effects of multidrop address on control codes received by the TCS are as follows:

7DEOH������(IIHFWV�RI�0XOWLGURS�$GGUHVVHV�RQ�&RQWURO�&RGHV

$6&,,�+(; $6&,,�01(021,& 0HDQLQJ�:KHQ�$GGUHVV �´56���µ�RU�´56����µ

0HDQLQJ�:KHQ�$GGUHVV� ����

�� �(27! QRQH��LJQRUHG� (QG�RI�7UDQVPLVVLRQ

�� �(14! QRQH��LJQRUHG� (QTXLUH�LI�7&6�LVDGGUHVVHG

�� �$&.! QRQH��LJQRUHG� QRQH��LJQRUHG�

�� �'/(! QRQH��LJQRUHG� 'DWD�/LQN�(VFDSH

�� �1$.! QRQH��LJQRUHG� QRQH��LJQRUHG�

*This code is used in multidrop protocol, but is only transmitted by the TCS and is ignored if received.

The TCS at address 1 plays a special role during broadcast mode. This TCS is the only TCS onthe link to connect its transmitter during broadcast. The TCS at address 1 sends flow controlcodes only. It does not send keystrokes or reports (except Ctrl/S and Ctrl/Q keystrokes whenXON/XOFF mode is on). Broadcasting is further described in Chapter 2, Message TransferProcedure.

4-19

Refer to Chapter 2, Multidrop Communication Protocol for a complete description of thepurpose, implementation, and implications of multidrop protocol.

� '()$8/7

“RS232”

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user sets the address by entering the Setup Screen and setting the Address parameter to thedesired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If a multidrop address is set between 1 and 32 and the host attempts to communicate without firstaddressing the TCS, the TCS will not respond.

If the multidrop address is set to “RS232” or “RS-422” and the host attempts to communicateusing multidrop, the TCS will display the address portion of the communication establishmentrequest, and will not acknowledge the request.

4-20

� %DXG�5DWH�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Baud Rate command sets the transmission and reception speed to one of eight baud rates.The baud rate is selected by setting the Baud Rate parameter on the Setup Screen to one of thefollowing values: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200.

The baud rate setting selects both transmit and receive rates. The TCS cannot transmit at one rateand receive at another.

� '()$8/7

9600 baud

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the baud rate by entering the Setup Screen and setting the Baud Rate parameterto the desired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-21

� 'DWD�%LWV�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Data Bits command selects either seven or eight data bits per ASCII code. The number ofdata bits is selected by the user, who sets the Data Bits parameter on the Setup Screen to either 7or 8.

If the Data Bits parameter is set to 7, the next seven bits (following the start bit) received overthe host serial interface are interpreted as data. All codes sent from the TCS to the host when theData Bits is set to 7 use only seven data bits. Start, Stop, and Parity bits frame the Data bits andensure the data is received by the host. (See Chapter 2 for more information about data formats.)

Operation with seven data bits allows the host to send codes representing the lower 128characters (the Standard Character Set). This precludes sending codes which represent the upper128 characters (the Extended Character Set) from the host and requires the use of the SelectCharacter Set command to display Extended Characters. (See Chapter 5 for complete informationabout the Select Character Set command.)

If the Data Bits parameter is set to 8, the next eight bits following the start bit are interpreted asdata. This allows the host to send codes that represent the entire character set (128 Standard and128 Extended Characters).

NOTEOnly those characters within the Standard and Extended Character Sets that are represented by graphic

codes can be directly accessed for display. Characters that are represented by control codes are notdirectly displayable, as described in Chapter 3.

� '()$8/7

Eight (8) data bits

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the number of data bits by entering the Setup Screen and then setting the DataBits parameter to the desired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-22

� 3DULW\�(QDEOH�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Parity Enable command enables or disables parity checking and generation. (For anexplanation of parity checking, see Parity Bit, in Chapter 2.)

Parity checking and generation are enabled or disabled by setting the Parity Enable parameter onthe Setup Screen to one of the following values:

• off

• on

• ignore

When Parity Enable is set to "on," parity checking and generating are enabled. If the Parity Sensesetting is "even," the TCS transmits even-parity data by appending a parity bit and expectsreceived data to have even parity. If the TCS receives data that has odd parity, the data isdisplayed as a parity error (P

E). If the Parity Sense setting is "odd," the TCS transmits odd-paritydata by appending a parity bit and expects received data to have odd parity. If the TCS receivesdata that has even parity, the data is displayed as a parity error (P

E).

When Parity Enable is set to "ignore," parity checking is disabled, but even or odd paritygeneration is enabled. If the Parity Sense setting is "even," the TCS transmits even-parity data byappending a parity bit and expects received data to have a parity bit. However, the TCS does notcheck the parity of the received data. If the Parity Sense setting is "odd," the TCS transmits odd-parity data by appending a parity bit and expects received data to have a parity bit. However, theTCS does not check the parity of the received data.

When Parity Enable is set to "off," parity checking and generation are disabled. The TCS doesnot transmit a parity bit and does not expect parity bits in the data it receives. A received codewith an appended parity bit is displayed as a framing error (F

E).

� '()$8/7

Off. (Parity checking and generation are disabled.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user issues the Parity Enable command by entering the Setup Screen and setting the ParityEnable parameter to the desired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-23

� 3DULW\�6HQVH�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Parity Sense command determines whether the TCS uses odd or even parity checking andgeneration for communication with the host. (For an explanation of parity checking, see ParityBit, in Chapter 2.)

Parity checking is only active when Parity Enable is set to "on." Parity generation is active onlywhen Parity Enable is set to "on’’ or "ignore." (See the Parity Enable command in this chapter.)

Parity is selected by setting the Parity Sense parameter on the Setup Screen to one of thefollowing values:

• odd

• even

If the parity of the received data does not match that specified by the Parity Sense parameter (andParity Enable is set to "on,") the received data is assumed to be in error.

Whenever a parity error is detected (even within a control sequence) the special character PE isdisplayed at the cursor position and the cursor is advanced. In addition, the error message,"Communication parity error," is placed in the Operational Status Window of the Setup Screen.If the error occurs within a control sequence, the control sequence is ignored. The remainder ofthe control sequence (beyond the error) is interpreted as a string of graphic codes and is,therefore, displayed.

� '()$8/7

Odd parity

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the parity sense by entering the Setup Screen and setting the Parity Senseparameter to the desired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-24

� 6WRS�%LWV�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Stop Bits command sets the TCS to send and receive codes with either one or two stop bits.The number of stop bits is selected by setting the Stop Bits parameter on the Setup Screen toeither 1 or 2. If the Stop Bits parameter is set to l, then only one stop bit per code is used for bothtransmitting and receiving over the host serial interface. If the Stop Bits parameter is set to 2,then two stop bits are used for transmitting and only one stop bit is used for receiving.

� '()$8/7

One (1) Stop Bit

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the number of stop bits by entering the Setup Screen and setting the Stop Bitsparameter to the desired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-25

� ;21�;2))�0RGH�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The XON/XOFF Mode command sets or resets the TCS XON/XOFF Mode. On the SetupScreen, the user can select one of the following parameters:

• on

• off

The XON/XOFF Mode determines whether the TCS uses XON and XOFF codes forcommunication flow control. Regardless of the XON/XOFF Mode setting, the TCS always usesthe SRTS and CTS control lines for flow control, if they are connected to the host.

7DEOH������)ORZ�&RQWURO

;21�;2))�02'( 86,1*�;21�;2)))/2:�&21752/�86,1*�6576��&76

&21752/�/,1(6

2Q <HV <HV

2II 1R 1R

While the XON/XOFF Mode is set (on), the TCS automatically sends an XOFF or XON codewhen it needs to stall or unstall the host. The TCS treats XON and XOFF codes specially whileoperating in this mode. When sending these codes to the host, the TCS assigns priority andtransmits them immediately, ahead of any other codes that may be in the output buffer.

When the user types Ctrl/S or Ctrl/Q on the optional keyboard, the TCS handles these keystrokesas commands to stall or unstall the host. The TCS sends an XOFF or XON immediately to thehost and exercises the SRTS control line.

When an XON or XOFF is received from the host, the TCS always processes it immediately,even if the input buffer is full.

While XON/XOFF Mode is reset (off), the TCS does not automatically send XOFF or XONcodes to stall or unstall the host. XON and XOFF codes can be sent while this mode is reset, butonly when the user types Ctrl/Q or Ctrl/S respectively on the optional keyboard. In this case, theXON and XOFF codes, are not assigned priority and are handled like any other codes in theoutput buffer.

The TCS handles the Ctrl/S and Ctrl/Q keystrokes as though they were not intended to stall andunstall the host. The TCS sends the keystrokes in the order they are typed and does not exercisethe SRTS control line. When an XON or XOFF is received from the host, the TCS ignores it.The code is not treated as a communication control code, and it cannot be received when the TCSinput buffer is full.

The only time XON/XOFF Mode should be reset is when flow control is either not needed, or ishandled exclusively by control lines.

For further information on flow control, see Buffer Overflow Control, in Chapter 2.

4-26

� '()$8/7

On. (XON/XOFF Mode is enabled.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the XON/XOFF Mode by entering the Setup Screen and setting the XON/XOFFMode parameter to the desired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-27

� /RFDO�5HPRWH�0RGH�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Local/Remote Mode command controls whether the TCS accepts remote commands fromthe host computer or from the optional keyboard.

The Local/Remote command sets the TCS either to the Remote Mode (in which the TCS acceptsremote commands from the host) or to the Local Mode (in which the TCS accepts remotecommands from the keyboard).

The TCS is in the Remote Mode for normal operation. In the Remote Mode, the TCS interpretscommands received from the host over the serial interface as remote commands. Inputs receivedfrom the keyboard are passed on to the host.

When the TCS is in the Local Mode, the TCS temporarily ignores commands received from thehost. Instead, it interprets input received from the keyboard as if the input had come from thehost, with the following exceptions:

• The Setup key, which still calls up the Setup Screen

• User input within the Setup, Test, and Alignment Screens

The user can generate remote commands locally from the keyboard while the TCS is in the LocalMode. It is as if the keyboard were connected in place of the host. Any invalid remote commandsthat are entered through the keyboard are ignored (just as if the commands had come from thehost). Input that arrives from the host is queued up in the input buffer and is not interpreted untilthe TCS is returned to the Remote Mode.

NOTEIf a stored screen is selected when Local Mode is entered, any test or command typed at the keyboard will

go to the selected screen and will not be displayed.

� '()$8/7

Remote Mode. (This is the setting when the TCS is in normal use.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the Local or Remote Mode by entering the Setup Screen and, using touchkeys orthe optional keyboard, setting the Local/Remote parameter to one of the following values:

• remote

• local

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

NOTEThe Local/Remote Mode value is not stored and recalled by the Save Setup and Recall Setup commands.

4-28

� +DUGZDUH�+DQGVKDNH��/RFDO�The Hardware Handshake command determines which RS-232 handshake signals must beasserted before the TCS will transmit. In RS-232 systems, both CTS and DSR must be assertedbefore the terminal can transmit. This causes problems in three-wire systems (RX, TX, andGND) where CTS and DSR are not supported. In these situations, the Hardware Handshakeparameter must be set to “none” or the TCS will not transmit.

The handshake signals are selected by setting the Hardware Handshake parameter on the SetupScreen to one of the following values:

• none

• CTS

• DSR

• CTS/DSR

When Hardware Handshake is set to “none”, the TCS will not check any RS-232 signals beforetransmitting.

When Hardware Handshake is set to “CTS”, the TCS will only transmit while CTS is asserted.

When Hardware Handshake is set to “DSR”, the TCS will only transmit while DSR is asserted.

When Hardware Handshake is set to “CTS/DSR”, the TCS will only transmit while both CTSand DSR are asserted.

� '()$8/7

None

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the hardware handshake signals that are checked by TCS before transmitting byentering the Setup Screen and setting the Hardware Handshake parameter to the desired valueusing touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-29

� 7UDQVPLW�0RGH�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Transmit Mode command set the transmit buffer mode of the TCS. The UART in the TCShas a two character transmit buffer. When the host stalls the TCS, the terminal will terminatetransmission after the transmit buffer is emptied. In some systems, the host is not capable ofbuffering 2 characters after it has stalled the host. In this situation, the Transmit Mode must beset to “Single” to force the TCS to use a 1 character transmit buffer. The “Single” transmit modeis not as efficient as the “Normal” transmit mode and should only be used in situations where thehost cannot buffer the second character in the transmit buffer.

The transmit buffer mode is selected by setting the Transmit Mode parameter on the SetupScreen to one of the following values:

• Normal

• Single

When Transmit Mode is set to Normal, the TCS will double-buffer characters. As a result, up to2 characters can be sent to the Host after the Host has stalled the TCS.

When Transmit Mode is set to Single, the TCS will single-buffer the transmit characters. As aresult, no more than one character will be sent to the Host after the Host has stalled the TCS.

� '()$8/7

Normal

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the transmit buffer mode by entering the Setup Screen and setting the TransmitMode parameter to the desired value using touchkeys or the optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

4-30

� 5HSRUWLQJ�)RUPDW�&RPPDQG�^)5)`��5HPRWH�The Reporting Format command allows the host to specify non-standard introducing codes and aterminating code for all report sequences generated by the TCS.

This command allows the programmer to tailor TCS reports to match the format required by aparticular host computer. The Reporting Format command has no effect on the codes generatedby pressing keys on the optional keyboard (including multi-code sequences, such as thosegenerated by pressing the function keys).

The default format of a report from the TCS to the host is:

<ESC>[...<F>

The default introducer codes are <ESC> and [. The default final code <F>, is a single ASCIIcode that varies with the type of report. (TCS report sequences are summarized in Chapter 3.)

The Reporting Format command allows the host to reassign the two introducer codes to be anytwo codes (including control codes). In addition, the Reporting Format command allows the hostto specify an additional terminating code (such as <CR>) to be appended to the normal reportsequence. Once specified, the reporting format is the same for all TCS-to-host reports.

The reporting format is stored in nonvolatile memory. This allows the TCS to send a power-upinterrupt to the host using the reporting format programmed before the power was turned off.(The TCS sends a power-up interrupt only if the Power-Up Interrupt Mode is set.)

� '()$8/7

The default reporting format for TCS reports is:

<ESC>[...<F>

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<P1>;<P2>;<P3>w

<P1> is the decimal value of the ASCII code that is to be used as the first introducer code.

If <P1> is omitted, the TCS assigns the default decimal value 27 (the <ESC> code) to the firstintroducer code.

<P2> is the decimal value of the ASCII code that is to be used as the second introducer code.

If <P2> is omitted, the TCS assigns the default decimal value 91 (the [ code) as the secondintroducer code.

<P3> is the decimal value of the ASCII code that is to be appended to the normal final code.

If <P3> is omitted, no terminating code is appended to the normal final code.

4-31

NOTEIf <P1> or <P2> are omitted, their places must be held with semicolons. For example, to select the default

value for <P2>, use the command <ESC>[<P1>;;<P3>w.

<P1> and <P2> substitute for previous introducer codes; <P3> does not. <P3> is appended after theexisting final code.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

When the Data Bits parameter is set to 7, parameters larger than 127 (decimal), select the <DEL>control code (127 decimal, 7F hex). When the Data Bits parameter is set to 8, parameters largerthan 255 select the code 255 decimal (FF hex).

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[032;40;13w

Sets the introducer codes to <SP> and the appended terminator to <CR>.

<ESC>[w

Resets the introducer codes to their default values (<ESC>[) and specifies that no terminatorbe appended to the final code in the report sequence.

<ESC>[;;43w

Resets the introducer codes to their default values (<ESC>[) and sets the appended terminatorto +.

4-32

� &OHDU�8VHU�,QSXWV�&RPPDQG�^)&8,`��5HPRWH�The Clear User Inputs command allows the host to clear the output buffer of the TCS.

The TCS output buffer contains user input not yet transmitted to the host, and any untransmittedresponses to the host’s queries for status information. This command is useful when the hostwants to ensure that the user’s input stays in step with data the host is displaying, even if the hostbecomes busy for a moment and lags in reading input from the user.

If the user is pressing a touchkey when the Clear User Inputs command is received, andcontinuously presses the touchkey after the TCS output buffer is cleared, a new touch report isgenerated as if the user had released the touchkey and pressed it again.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[7z

4-33

� &20081,&$7,21�021,725The Communication Monitor provides easy troubleshooting of communications between the hostand TCS. Once the Communication Monitor is entered, the TCS translates all codes that crossthe communications link directly into their equivalent characters for display. While theCommunication Monitor is active, codes sent from the host do not affect TCS programming andhost report requests are ignored.

� (QWHULQJ�DQG�([LWLQJ�WKH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRUTo enter the Communication Monitor, first enter the Setup Screen, then either press theCOMMUNICATION MONITOR touchkey or type Shift/C on the optional keyboard.

While the Communication Monitor is active, the TCS operates as described below. For ideas onusing Communication Monitor capabilities to best advantage, see the last heading in this chapter,Using the Communication Monitor.

To exit the Communication Monitor, press the SETUP switch, or press the Set Up key on theoptional keyboard. Because one of the purposes of the Communication Monitor is to monitor thecontrol sequences generated by touching touchkeys, it is not possible to exit the CommunicationMonitor using the touch panel.

When the Communication Monitor is exited, the Setup Screen reappears. Subsequent codesreceived from the host are once again buffered and are not processed. For more informationabout how the TCS handles codes while the Setup Screen is active, refer to Host CommunicationDuring Setup Session, earlier in this chapter.

� +RZ�WKH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�'LVSOD\V�&KDUDFWHUVOn entering the Communication Monitor, the TCS display is cleared. Then, each 7- or 8-bit codereceived or sent by the TCS is directly mapped into its equivalent position within the Standard orExtended Character Set and the resulting character is displayed. This includes all codes receivedfrom the host from the time the Setup Screen was entered until the Communication Monitor isexited, and all codes generated either by touching the TCS touch panel or typing on the optionalkeyboard.

Figure 4-1 shows the Communication Monitor in operation. While it is active, theCommunication Monitor displays characters across the entire TCS display, in the order receivedand sent. If the TCS and host are transmitting simultaneously, the resulting character strings maybe interleaved on the display. To identify the source of each code, characters representing TCS-generated codes are highlighted, whereas characters representing host-generated codes aredisplayed normally (not highlighted). However, there is no visual distinction between TCS touchpanel input and keyboard input.

The specific character displayed for each code crossing the communication link depends on thecharacter font mapping in effect for the Displayed Screen. If the default mapping is in use (theStatic ASCII Character Font is mapped into the Standard Character Set and the Static SpecialCharacter Font is mapped into the Extended Character Set), the characters shown in Appendix C,Character Fonts, are displayed.

4-34

If the default mapping is not in effect for the Displayed Screen, the TCS displays whatevercharacter corresponds to the code crossing the communication link, according to the characterfont mapping in effect. See Chapter 5 for details about character font mapping.

)LJXUH������6DPSOH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�6FUHHQ

When characters have filled a line to the right margin of the TCS display, the TCS auto-wrapssubsequent characters to the next line. When it has filled with characters, the display scrolls. TheScroll Lock key on the optional keyboard can be used to stop and restart the display of newcharacters.

� 7&6�2SHUDWLRQ�:KLOH�WKH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�LV�$FWLYHWhile the Communication Monitor is active, the TCS displays a character for each code crossingthe communication link with the host. All TCS-generated codes (codes resulting from touchingthe TCS touch panel or typing on the optional keyboard) are sent to the host as well as displayed.

If multidrop operation is in effect while the Communication Monitor is active, the TCS displayscharacters for all codes received from the host, even if that particular TCS is not addressed. SeeChapter 2 for details of Multidrop operation.

Control codes, which do not usually cause characters to be displayed (ASCII 00 through 32 hex,80 through 9F hex, 7F hex and FF hex), can be seen and verified with the CommunicationMonitor. With two exceptions noted below, these codes are displayed as characters but are notacted on in a control fashion. That is, codes sent from the host while the Communication Monitoris active do not affect the programming of the TCS in any way.

4-35

For example, if a <BEL> code (ASCII 07 hex) is received from the host, and default characterfont mapping is in effect, the Communication Monitor displays L, but the beeper is not sounded.Two types of control codes are both displayed and acted on:

• Stall and unstall codes continue to control the data flow between the host and the TCS. SeeChapter 2 for details.

• Multidrop communications protocol codes continue to establish and disconnect thecommunication link.

With these two exceptions, the functional state of the TCS remains as when the Setup Screen isinitially entered.

If a command sequence is only partially received when the Setup Screen is entered, the TCS doesnot act on the command upon entering the Communication Monitor. Instead, when theCommunication Monitor is entered, the partial command sequence is canceled and does notaffect TCS functionality

When Local Echo Mode is in effect, codes that would normally cause characters to be echoed tothe display are shown as they cross the communication link, but are not locally echoed.Therefore, the resulting character is shown only once on the Communication Monitor.

When Local/Remote Mode is set to local, communication with the host is suspended and nocodes are translated for display within the Communication Monitor. If this happens, a specialmessage is displayed as follows:

LOCAL MODE - Communication Suspended

If this message is displayed, press the Setup key and change Local/Remote Mode to Remote.

When the Communication Monitor is entered, the Standard Character Set is automaticallyselected, regardless of the state of the Select Character Set command. Within the CommunicationMonitor, characters representing the codes corresponding to the Standard Character Set aredisplayed as received and are never shifted out to the Extended Character Set. Exiting theCommunication Monitor restores the previous state of the Select Character Set command, andcodes can once again be shifted out to the Extended Character Set.

While the Communication Monitor is active, all codes pass through the TCS input buffer,whether they are generated by the TCS or received from the host. As the input buffer fills, theTCS may stall the host as described in Chapter 2. While the host is stalled, keyboard and touchpanel entries continue to generate codes, so the input buffer may fill to overflowing. In this case,the TCS continues to send codes to the host, but is unable to display their characterrepresentations on the Communication Monitor. Instead, the Communication Monitor displays aBuffer Overflow error character (B

O). Normally only the host can cause such a buffer overflowerror; the TCS sends codes into its own input buffer only during Communication Monitoroperation.

The cursor appears as a slow-blinking block during the Communication Monitor session. Exitingthe Communication Monitor to the Setup Screen restores the cursor to its previous characteristics.

4-36

If the keyboard or touch panel were locked out before entering the Setup Screen, they will remainlocked while in the Communication Monitor. Exiting the Communication Monitor to the SetupScreen will cause the keyboard or touch panel to be temporarily unlocked if either one waslocked.

� 8VLQJ�WKH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRUThe Communication Monitor can be a powerful visual aid in configuring the TCS for datacommunications. The following paragraphs present ideas on how to use this tool to bestadvantage.

1. An application program running on the host is supposed to set Polled Touch Mode then gointo a loop, polling the TCS every 1.5 seconds. However touch reports are never received bythe host. Use the Communication Monitor to see if the Read Touchkey Status command isbeing received by the TCS.

2. TCS XON/XOFF Mode is set to on, yet Buffer Overflow errors occur. Use theCommunication Monitor to verify that the TCS sends XOFF to the host.

3. The TCS address is set for Multidrop operation (a value from 1 through 32). Use theCommunication Monitor to verify that the TCS is receiving the correct address sequence<address> <ENQ> from the host. The TCS should respond by sending <address> <ACK>. Ifthe TCS does not respond, or responds by sending any other string, there may be a problem.Check the Address setting in the Setup Screen.

4. When the user presses the touch panel, the application program does not detect the touch.Use the Communication Monitor to check that a touch report is sent by the TCS wheneverthe touch panel is pressed. If not, check whether the application program has set PolledTouch Mode or Touch Lockout Mode. If the TCS is sending a touch report, check to seewhether the reporting format of the report matches that expected by the application program.

5. When the numeric keypad on the optional keyboard is used, the application program does notrespond. Use the Communication Monitor to ensure that the TCS is sending codes to the hostwhen a key on the numeric keypad is pressed. If not, check whether the application programhas set the Keyboard Lockout Mode. If the TCS is sending codes, check to see if theapplication program is placing the numeric keypad into Application Mode rather thanNumeric Mode.

5-1

&+$37(5�����',63/$<,1*�&+$5$&7(56

� ,1752'8&7,21This chapter explains how to display characters on the Touch Control Screen (TCS) and alter theappearance of the screen. Topics include a description of the available character sets and relatedcommands.

For clarity of organization and ease of reference, the command descriptions are organized intosix functional groups:

• Screen Memory Commands

• Character Set and Character Font Commands

• Character Displaying Commands

• Character Interpretation Commands

• Cursor Commands

• Screen Appearance Commands

NOTEIn addition to these commands, Region commands can be used to outline and erase rectangular areas of

the screen and modify the character attributes within rectangular areas. Region commands are fullydocumented in Chapter 6.

Before continuing in this chapter, the reader should be familiar with the information aboutCommunication Codes in Chapter 3.

� 'LVSOD\LQJ�&KDUDFWHUVThe TCS contains two 128-position character sets known as the Standard and ExtendedCharacter Sets. These two character sets are used by the TCS when converting the incoming-graphic codes sent by the host into displayable characters. For each code value received from thehost, a corresponding character is located within one of the two character sets. If the code sent bythe host is a graphic code (and not part of a control string), the character at the locationcorresponding to the graphic code is displayed. For example, and using Figure C-1 as a reference,if the host sends a graphic code with value 48 hexadecimal, it specifies that the character fromcolumn 4, row 8 of the Standard Character Set (normally an “H”) be displayed.

5-2

Because each character set contains 128 characters, graphic codes with values less than 128decimal (80 hexadecimal) display characters from within the Standard Character Set. Graphiccodes with values greater than or equal to 128 decimal (80 hexadecimal) display characters fromwithin the Extended Character Set. Refer to Figure 5-1.

Only those characters within the character sets that correspond to graphic codes can be directlydisplayed. Characters within the character sets that are stored at locations corresponding tocontrol codes are only displayable indirectly (not by sending the corresponding code). Thisrestriction occurs because codes that correspond to these locations within the character sets aredefined by ANSI to be control codes that cause special actions. See the Control Codes heading inChapter 3 for a description of how and when such characters can be displayed.

Since code values below 128 decimal can be represented using only 7 data bits, whereas codevalues of 128 decimal and above require 8 data bits, the Standard Character Set can be accessedusing only 7 data bits, but the Extended Character Set cannot. The Select Character SetCommand described later in this chapter must be used to gain access to the Extended CharacterSet when communicating using only 7 data bits.

The characters within the Standard and Extended Character Sets can be changed by the hostprogram as described later in this chapter. The default contents of the Standard and ExtendedCharacter Sets are shown in Appendix C.

� 7KH�&XUVRUEach screen within the TCS contains a cursor. The cursor is a visual marker that identifies thelocation on the screen where the next character is to be displayed. Normally, the next graphiccode received by the TCS designates a corresponding character from either the Standard orExtended Character Set that is displayed at the cursor location, and the cursor is advanced to thenext location.

The cursor plays a key role in the display of characters on a screen because it determines thelocation where the next character will normally appear. The movement of the cursor during thedisplay of characters is controlled by two modes: the Auto Wrap Mode and the New Line Mode.Both modes are described in detail under the heading Character Interpretation Commands furtheron in this chapter. In addition, certain control codes, known as format effectors, are generallysent by the host to control cursor movement while characters are being displayed.

5-3

67$1'$5'&+$5$&7(5

6(7

(;7(1'('&+$5$&7(5

6(7

$&&(66(' %< &2'(6����) �KH[�

������� GHFLPDO�

$&&(66(' %< &2'(6�� �) �KH[�

��������� GHFLPDO�

)LJXUH������&RGHV�$FFHVV�WKH�&KDUDFWHU�6HWV

An area within each screen is defined to be a scrolling region. This is so characters can continueto be displayed without running off the bottom of the screen. When new characters are to bedisplayed and the cursor has advanced to the bottom line within the scrolling region, the area ofthe screen known as the scrolling region “scrolls.” In the case just described, the top line of thescrolling region disappears from the screen, each line within the scrolling region moves up oneline in position in the screen, and a new blank line is placed at the bottom of the scrolling region.

Although scrolling usually occurs in the upward direction just described, it can also occur in adownward direction during certain situations when the cursor is moving upward in the screen.

� )RUPDW�(IIHFWRUVSome of the control codes reserved by ANSI affect the format of displayed characters. Thesecontrol codes do not cause the display of any characters, but they affect the placement of theprintable characters that follow by moving the cursor.

Remember the following points when interspersing format effectors and graphic codes.

• If the cursor is on the bottom line of the scrolling region and the format effector causes thecursor to move downward, the screen scrolls upward, and the cursor remains on the sameline.

• If the cursor is on the top line of the scrolling region and the format effector causes thecursor to move upward, the screen scrolls downward, and the cursor remains on the sameline.

• If the cursor is outside the scrolling region and the format effector attempts to move thecursor above the top of the screen or below the bottom of the screen, the screen does notscroll, and the cursor remains on the same line.

5-4

7DEOH������)RUPDW�(IIHFWRUV

01(021O& +(;�9$/8( 1$0( 029(0(17�2)�&85625 )227127(

�%6! �� %DFNVSDFH %DFNZDUG�RQH�FROXPQ

�+7! �� +RUL]RQWDO�7DE )RUZDUG�WR�QH[W�WDE

�/)! �$ /LQH�)HHG 'RZQ�RQH�OLQH �

�97! �% 9HUWLFDO�7DE 'RZQ�RQH�OLQH �

�))! �& )RUP�)HHG 'RZQ�RQH�OLQH �

�&5! �' &DUULDJH�5HWXUQ %DFN�WR�ILUVW�FROXPQ �

�,1'! �� ,QGH[ 'RZQ�RQH�OLQH��VDPH�FROXPQ

�1(/! �� 1H[W�/LQH 'RZQ�RQH�OLQH��ILUVW�FROXPQ

�5,! �' 5HYHUVH�,QGH[ 8S�RQH�OLQH��VDPH�FROXPQ

)227127(6�

�� $OVR�PRYHV�WR�WKH�ILUVW�FROXPQ�ZKHQ�1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�LV�VHW�

�� $OVR�PRYHV�WR�WKH�QH[W�OLQH�GRZQ�ZKHQ�1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�LV�VHW�

The following example shows how format effectors are typically used during the display ofcharacters.

If the host sends:

<CR>Display a string<CR><LF><HT>here!

Assuming the cursor does not attempt to move below the bottom of the scrolling region or screen(and that New Line Mode is reset), the TCS displays:

Display a stringhere!

5-5

� 29(59,(:�2)�6&5((1�0(025<

� ,QWURGXFWLRQThe TCS can locally store multiple screens of information for later display upon host command.Each screen contains a complete set of display data and touch-panel programming representing astand-alone user interface. This advanced capability allows the host to dynamically change theentire user interface quickly, a capability that has many uses:

• In menu-based systems, the host can rapidly call up entirely new menus as the user makesnew selections.

• In applications where the host computer has limited capabilities or is extremely busy, screensthat were developed beforehand can be permanently stored within the TCS. The host runningthe application can then display these screens using a minimal amount of communicationwith the TCS.

• In an electrically noisy setting or anywhere a danger exists that a display will be corrupted,the host can quickly redisplay any screen from memory.

• In an environment where the data in the display is likely to change frequently, the user canview information on the display while the host edits another stored screen invisibly to theuser. When the newly edited information is needed, the host can change the display veryswiftly to show the edited information.

� 5HIHUULQJ�WR�6FUHHQVEach screen is assigned a number from 0 through 256 so the host is able to indicate which ofseveral screens are to be affected by a given command. Once a screen has been created andassigned a screen number, the host can use the screen number to manipulate the screen or itscontents at will. Although the TCS can store up to 256 screens, the actual number stored dependsupon the complexity of the screens.

Although the TCS can store many screens, only one screen is visible to the user; all other screensare invisible. This visible screen is the one the TCS is always displaying, and is referred to by thespecial screen number of zero (0). To display any other screen, the host must first copy it into theDisplayed Screen, screen number 0.

� 6HOHFWLQJ�D�6FUHHQ�IRU�(GLWLQJAll screen editing commands operate upon what is known as the Selected Screen, enabling theTCS to support standardized ANSI commands yet remain easy to use when storing many screens.Using the Select Screen command, the host program can designate which of several screens areto be affected by upcoming editing commands. Once the program selects a particular screen, allcommands that affect the display data or touch programming of a screen are directed toward theSelected Screen. If the host program never selects a screen, the Displayed Screen is automaticallyselected and the TCS directs all screen editing commands to the Displayed Screen.

5-6

SelectedScreen

Screen 0

Screen 0

Screen 0

Screen 0

CRT

Host

StoredScreens(Invisible)

DisplayedScreen

)LJXUH������6HOHFWLQJ�D�6FUHHQ�IRU�(GLWLQJ

Figure 5-2 shows how the multiple screens within the TCS are arranged. Notice that the host isalways editing the Selected Screen, which can be the Displayed Screen (Screen 0) or any of thestored screens.

� 6FUHHQ�0HPRU\�$OORFDWLRQBecause the complexity of each screen determines how many screens can be stored, only generalguidelines can be given concerning screen memory allocation. At most, the TCS can store up to256 screens, although each one would have to be extremely simple. Table 5-2 shows theapproximate screen storage capacity for "typical" screens. The table indicates how many screenswith display data and touch-programming matching that of the Setup Screen can be stored.

7DEOH������7\SLFDO�6FUHHQ�6WRUDJH�&DSDFLW\

12��2)�6&5((16 0(025<�86('

� QRQH

�� ��.

�� ��.

�� ��.

5-7

� 7HUPLQRORJ\���6FUHHQ��YV���'LVSOD\�Commands that modify the display data or touch-programming within a screen often use theterms "screen" and "display" interchangeably. In both cases, the command affects only the screenthat is currently selected for editing by the host. Since in the majority of instances the host sendssuch commands when the Displayed Screen is selected, the effects of the command are indeedvisible on the display of the TCS. However, if the host program has selected a stored screen andis making changes to it, the effects of the command are invisible to the user. Such commands donot affect what is on the display of the TCS because the Displayed Screen is not affected.However, whenever the stored screen is displayed by copying it into the Displayed Screen, thenthe visual effects of the command become apparent. In this sense, all such commands do changethe display when and if the screen being operated upon appears on the display of the TCS bybeing copied into the Displayed Screen.

When reading about these commands, it may be helpful to substitute "screen" whenever the word"display" is in the command description, keeping in mind that the effects of the command do notbecome apparent until the screen becomes visible.

5-8

� 6&5((1�0(025<�&200$1'6Seven commands create, modify, delete, and indicate the status of screens stored in memory. Allscreen commands are Remote; the host can issue them but the user normally cannot. Remotecommands can be issued by the user at the TCS only by first setting Local Mode. The screenmemory commands are:

• Initialize Screen command (Remote)

• Select Screen command (Remote)

• Copy Screen command (Remote)

• Delete Screen command (Remote)

• Delete All Screens command (Remote)

• Read Screen Memory Remaining command (Remote)

• Read Screen Existence command (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins at the top of a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC- private commands.

5-9

� ,QLWLDOL]H�6FUHHQ�&RPPDQG�^),6`��5HPRWH�The Initialize Screen command returns a screen to the default state. When changes have beenmade to a screen, the Initialize Screen command prevents the host from having to send all theindividual commands needed to return the screen to its default state.

The Initialize Screen command loads all screen-dependent items within a screen with theirdefault values shown in Table .

7DEOH������'HIDXOW�9DOXHV�RI�6FUHHQ�'HSHQGHQW�,WHPV

6&5((1�'(3(1'(17�,7(0 '()$8/7�9$/8(

&RQWHQWV��FKDUDFWHUV�DQG�DWWULEXWHV� FOHDUHG

&XUVRU�3RVLWLRQ KRPH

&XUVRU�7\SH VORZ�EOLQNLQJ�EORFN

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�6HOHFWHG QRUPDO

12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH RII

6FUHHQ�%DFNJURXQG QRUPDO

2ULJLQ�0RGH UHVHW

6FUROOLQJ�5HJLRQ IXOO�GLVSOD\

)RUHJURXQG�&RORU ZKLWH�����

%DFNJURXQG�&RORU EODFN�����

&RQFHDO�&RORU EODFN�����

&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�0DSSLQJ 6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LV�PDSSHG�LQWR�WKH�6WDQGDUG&KDUDFWHU�6HW��6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LV�PDSSHGLQWR�WKH�([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�

7RXFK�NH\V FOHDUHG

7RXFKNH\�7\SHV DXWR�UHSHDW

7RXFKNH\�9LVXDO�([WHQW QRQH

7RXFKNH\�$XGLEOH�$WWULEXWH EHHS

�)RUHJURXQG��%DFNJURXQG�DQG�&RQFHDO�&RORU�DSSO\�WR�WKH�FRORU�7&6�RQO\�

To initialize several screens to values slightly different from their default values, use theInitialize Screen command to initialize one screen, change the appropriate value, and replicatethe screen using the Copy Screen command. For example, this method could be used to initializeseveral screens to a non-default cursor type.

If a screen is being initialized by the Initialize Screen command before being involved in a copyoperation, then the Initialize Screen command can be omitted, because copying to or from ascreen that does not yet exist automatically creates (and initializes) it.

5-10

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[3s

� 3266,%/(�(55256

None.

� (;$03/(

<ESC>[2;20s

<ESC>[3s

These commands first select, then initialize Stored Screen 20 with the default values. If screen 20existed before being selected, the initialization command reinitializes it with the default values. Ifscreen 20 did not exist, the Select Screen command creates it and initializes it, so there is no needto send a separate Initialize Screen command. See the Select Screen command later in thischapter for more details.

5-11

� 6HOHFW�6FUHHQ�&RPPDQG�^)66`��5HPRWH�The Select Screen command provides a way for the host to edit a screen without necessarilychanging the Displayed Screen. After this command is issued, all screen-dependent commandshave an effect only on the selected screen; other screens are not affected. The screen-dependentcommands are:

Screen Appearance Commands

Screen Background Mode {DECSCNM}

Character Set and Character Font Commands

Map Character Font {FMCF}

Character Interpretation Commands

Set Character Attributes [SGR]

NOCHANGE Attribute Mode {FNCAM}

Scrolling Region Command (DECSTBM)

Origin Mode Command (DECOM)

Cursor Commands

Cursor Type {FCT}

Read Cursor Position [CPR]

Read Character Under Cursor {FRCUC}

Read Attributes Under Cursor {FRAUC}

Move Cursor Up [CUU]

Move Cursor Down [CUD]

Move Cursor Forward [CUF]

Move Cursor Backward [CUB]

Move Cursor to Absolute Position [CUP][HVP]

Move Cursor to Touchkey {FMCTTK}

Index [IND]

Reverse Index [RI]

Next Line [NEL]

Touch Panel Commands

Build Touchkey {FBTK}

Clear Touchkey {FCTK}

Touchkey Type {FTKT}

5-12

Touchkey Visual Extent {FTKVE}

Touchkey Audible Attribute {FTKAA}

Character Displaying Commands

Display Double-Width Line {DECDWL}

Display Double-Size Line {DECDHL}

Display Normal Line {DECSWL}

Place Double-Size Line {FDSL}

Erase Character [ECH]

Erase in Line [EL]

Erase in Display [ED]

Draw Bar for Bar Chart {FDBB}

Region Commands

Outline a Touchkey {FOTK}

Outline a Region {FOR}

Custom Outline a Touchkey {FCOTK}

Custom Outline a Region {FCOR}

Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkey {FMCAITK}

Modify Character Attributes in a Region {FMCAIR}

Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey {FRCAITK}

Reverse Character Attributes in a Region {FRCAIR}

Erase a Touchkey {FETK}

Erase a Region {FER}

Fill a Touchkey with a Character {FFTKC}

Fill a Region with a Character {FFRC}

All commands not listed, such as the communication or the status reporting commands, areglobal in nature; that is, they affect all screens. Any Setup Screen parameter changes madelocally by the user while the host has selected another screen affect the Displayed Screen only.

When the host sends the Select Screen command with a screen number of zero, subsequentscreen-dependent commands affect the Displayed Screen only. This is the way the TCS operatesif the command has never been issued.

If the screen specified in this command does not exist, a new screen is created and initialized asdescribed in the Initialize Screen Command chapter. The new screen exists until it is explicitlydeleted with the Delete Screen command or a hard reset is performed.

If the host selects a screen and never puts any information in it, the screen will contain thedefault screen-dependent information specified in the Initialize Screen Command chapter.

5-13

When the host selects a stored screen, the Displayed Screen is still available for user input:

• Touch reports sent to the host as a result of touchkey activity or in response to the ReadTouchkey Status command reflect the touchkeys that are part of the Displayed Screen.

• All automatic visual or audible responses associated with user activation of touchkeys stilloccur even while the Displayed Screen is not selected.

• Keyboard input that occurs while a stored screen is selected is still sent to the host, as long asthe keyboard is not locked out. If Send-Receive Mode is reset (local echo is on), user input isechoed to the Displayed Screen, regardless of which screen the host has selected for editing.If Send-Receive Mode is set (local echo is off), user input cannot appear on the DisplayedScreen unless the host selects the Displayed Screen with the Select Screen command andexplicitly echoes characters to the TCS.

� (',7,1*�6&5((16

When a stored screen is selected it is always placed into volatile memory and remains there aslong as the display is selected. A side effect is that the screen can be lost if power goes downwhile it is selected. In such a case, when power returns, the screen’s contents are restored to theirstate immediately prior to being selected. If a stored screen is being selected for the first time, itis restored with default values as if it had just been initialized by the Initialize Screen command.

To minimize the chances of losing the selected screen due to power loss, leave a stored screenselected only while editing it. When editing is finished, immediately select the Displayed Screenor another stored screen to protect the edited screen. Selecting a different screen causes thecurrently selected stored screen to be transferred back into nonvolatile memory where it is againsafe from power loss. To avoid the possibility of losing a complex screen that will require asignificant amount of time to rebuild, use the Copy Screen command periodically during editingto perform intermediate saves to a stored screen of a different number.

� '()$8/7

The Displayed Screen is selected.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[2;<Pscr>s

<Pscr> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 256 that specifies the number of the screen toselect. The Displayed Screen is 0 and a stored screen is non-zero.

If <Pscr> is 0 or omitted, the Displayed Screen is selected; this is the way the TCSoperates if the host has never sent a Select Screen command.

5-14

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Use care when editing a stored screen if the screen memory is almost full (see the Read ScreenMemory Remaining command). Changing text, attributes, or touch programming may increasethe complexity of the screen and require more memory space. This situation can cause anMemory Full error when the next screen is selected if there is not enough memory to store thecurrently selected screen. If this happens, the new screen is not selected, and the screen beingedited remains selected. The selected screen must then be simplified or deleted before anotherscreen can be successfully selected.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[2;87s

Select stored screen 87 so that upcoming screen-dependent commands affect only screen 87.

<ESC>[2s

Cause upcoming screen-dependent commands to affect the Displayed Screen only.

5-15

� &RS\�6FUHHQ�&RPPDQG�^)&6`�5HPRWH�The Copy Screen command copies the contents of one screen to one or more other screens. Thecommand copies all values, modes, display data, and touch programming. The Copy Screencommand is used as follows:

• To display a stored screen, copy it into the Displayed Screen.

• To save the Displayed Screen, copy it into a stored screen.

• To quickly build several screens that differ only slightly from each other, copy from onestored screen to several others, then make any modifications.

If the source or a destination screen specified in the command does not exist, the TCSautomatically creates a new screen before performing the copy and initializes it with the defaultvalues listed under the heading Initialize Screen Command.

If the screen already exists before the issuance of the Copy Screen command, all screen-dependent items (values and modes) are copied to the destination screen using the current valuesfrom the source screen, specifically:

• Contents (characters and attributes)

• Cursor Position

• Cursor Type

• Character Attributes Selected

• NOCHANGE Attribute Mode

• Screen Background

• Origin Mode

• Scrolling Region

• Character Font Mapping

• Touchkeys

• Touchkey Types

• Touchkey Visual Extent

• Touchkey Audible Attribute

The new screen exists until it is explicitly deleted with the Delete Screen command or a hardreset is performed.

When a screen is copied into Screen 0 (the Displayed Screen), some Set-Up parameters maychange because some screen-dependent items within the Displayed Screen are also Set-Upparameters.

5-16

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[1;<Psrc>;<Pdest>;... ; <Pdest> s

<Psrc> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 256 that specifies the number of the sourcescreen. The Displayed Screen is 0 and stored screens are non-zero.

If <Psrc> is omitted, 0 is used, and the Displayed Screen is the source.

<Pdest> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 256 that specifies the number of thedestination screen. The Displayed Screen is 0 and stored screens are non-zero.

If <Pdest> is omitted, 0 is used, and the Displayed Screen is the destination.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Possible sources of errors include:

1. Modifying a dynamic character font between two successive Copy Screen commands mayresult in the screen appearing differently than it originally did. For example, if you modifythe dynamic character font that a stored screen uses, and then copy the stored screen into theDisplayed Screen, the appearance of characters on the display will reflect the modifiedcharacter font, rather than having the appearance they did before modification.

2. Other programming considerations involve how the host program handles touch reportsduring the transition between screens. The TCS behaves predictably, but the host programmay not. For example, if the touch panel is pressed continuously during a copy operation andan automatic visual response is occurring, the automatic visual response is terminated. Forcomplete details about such considerations, refer to Appendix D.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[1;103s

Copy stored screen 103 into Screen 0 (the Displayed Screen). This recalls a stored screen fordisplay.

<ESC>[1;;94s

Copy Screen 0 (the Displayed Screen) into Stored Screen 94. This saves the DisplayedScreen as a stored screen.

<ESC>[1;12;23;243;3s

Copy Stored Screen 12 into Stored Screens 23, 243, and 3.

5-17

� 'HOHWH�6FUHHQ�&RPPDQG�^)'6`��5HPRWH�The Delete Screen command deletes one or more stored screens. When a screen is deleted, thememory used to store it becomes available for storing other screens. It is not possible to deletethe Displayed Screen because it always exists.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[4 ;<Pscr>;...;<Pscr>s

<Pscr> is a numeric parameter from 1 through 256 that specifies the number of a screen todelete.

If <Pscr> is 0 or omitted, no screens are deleted.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the screen currently selected by the host for editing is deleted, the Displayed Screen becomesautomatically selected.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[4;40s

Delete stored screen 40.

<ESC>[4;1;2;3;4;5;6;7s

Delete stored screens 1 through 7. If one of the screens was selected, the Displayed Screenwill be automatically selected.

<ESC>[4s

The command is ignored because the Displayed Screen cannot be deleted.

5-18

� 'HOHWH�$OO�6FUHHQV�&RPPDQG�^)'$6`��5HPRWH�The Delete All Screens command deletes all the stored screens.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[5s

� (;$03/(

<ESC>[5s

Delete all existing stored screens.

CAUTIONUse the Delete All Screens command with care because all stored screens will be lost.

5-19

� 5HDG�6FUHHQ�0HPRU\�5HPDLQLQJ�&RPPDQG�^)5605`��5HPRWH�The Read Screen Memory Remaining command provides a way for the host to determine howmuch space is available for creating new screens. Since memory can become too full for anymore screens to be created, it is sometimes helpful to know how close the TCS is getting to itsscreen memory limits.

Memory is shared between dynamic character fonts and stored screens. Screen memory is thatportion of memory available solely for storing screens and is always less than the total amount ofmemory available.

The Read Screen Memory Remaining command returns several pieces of information to the host:the amount of screen memory in use in number of screens and number of bytes, and the amountof screen memory available in number of estimated screens and number of bytes.

The number of screens available is calculated from the average size of all the currently storedscreens. When few screens are stored, this value may not be an accurate reflection of how manyscreens really could still fit into memory.

If all of the screen memory is available, the number of screens available indicates the maximumnumber that can be stored (256) no matter how much screen memory is installed.

If screen memory is so full that there isn’t enough room to fit a screen of average size (based onthe average screen size currently stored), zero is returned to the host for the number of screensremaining. Even in this situation, however, it may still be possible to fit one or more screens intomemory if they are less complex than the average stored screen.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>10n

The TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>10;<Psu>;<Pbu>;<Psr>;<Pbr>n

<Psu> is a numeric parameter indicating the number of screens currently used (stored).

<Pbu> is a numeric parameter indicating the number of bytes of screen memory currently inuse.

<Psr> is a numeric parameter indicating the number of screens remaining to be used (basedon the average size of those stored so far).

<Pbr> is a numeric parameter indicating the number of bytes of screen memory remainingfor use.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

5-20

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[> 10n

Host requests a report of screen memory remaining. If no screens have been stored yet, theTCS responds:

<ESC>[> 10;0;0;94464n

<ESC>[>10n

Host requests a Screen Memory Remaining Report. If almost all of screen memory has beenused up, the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>10;56;93758;0;606n

Even though the TCS reports that there is no room for more screens, the host may still beable to create a screen as long as it is not too complex to fit within 606 bytes.

5-21

� 5HDG�6FUHHQ�([LVWHQFH�&RPPDQG�^)56(`��5HPRWH�The Read Screen Existence command provides a way for the host to determine if a particularscreen exists. The command inquires about the existence of one screen at a time. The DisplayedScreen always exists; any other screen exists only if it was stored in nonvolatile screen memorybefore power-up or if the host created it since power-up by referring to it in one of the followingcommands:

• Initialize Screen Command

• Select Screen Command

• Copy Screen Command

An example use of the Read Screen Existence command is in an installation where the hostcommunicates with a set of TCSs each of which has a different collection of screens. The hostcan send a Read Screen Existence command to determine which screens a particular TCScontains.

This command can also be used to determine if a screen still exists if power was lost just as thehost was manipulating the screen. After power is restored, the host can send a Read ScreenExistence command to determine whether the screen still exists.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>12;<Pscr>n

<Pscr> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 256 that specifies the number of the screenwhose existence is to be reported. Displayed Screen is 0, stored screen is non-zero.

If <Pscr> is omitted or 0, the existence of the Displayed Screen is reported (it alwaysexists).

The TCS responds:

<ESC>[>12;0n

if the screen does not exist

<ESC>[>12;1n

if the screen exists

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

5-22

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[> 12;87n

Host asks if screen 87 exists. If this screen does not currently exist the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>12;0n

<ESC>[>12;1n

Host requests whether screen number 1 exists. If this screen exists, the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>12;1n

<ESC>[>12n

Host is requesting if the Displayed Screen exists. The Displayed Screen always exists, so theTCS responds:

<ESC>[>12;1n

5-23

� 29(59,(:�2)�&+$5$&7(5�6(76�$1'�&+$5$&7(5)2176Because the contents of the Standard and Extended Character Sets determine how charactersappear when graphic codes are sent by the host, the TCS allows the contents of these twocharacter sets to be altered by the host program at will. To facilitate changes to the character sets,the TCS contains four character fonts which, in conjunction with the character sets, can be usedto dynamically alter the appearance of characters displayed by the TCS.

Although both character sets and character fonts contain similar information (the sixelrepresentations of characters), the TCS uses only the character sets when a graphic code receivedfrom the host is translated into a character for display. The character fonts merely storeinformation that can be transferred (mapped) into use by the character sets.

Two of the character fonts are stored in ROM and provide the default contents for the Standardand Extended Character Sets as shown in Appendix C. The other two character fonts arechangeable (dynamic) and are programmable by the host.

� 6WDWLF�$6&,,�DQG�6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWVThe Static ASCII and Static Special Character Fonts are stored in ROM and cannot be changedby the host program. These two character fonts contain sixel information, which defines theappearance of characters when either of these fonts is mapped into the Standard or ExtendedCharacter Sets using the Map Character Font command.

The Static ASCII Character Font contains standard ASCII characters and special control codemnemonic characters, which are used within the Communication Monitor.

The Static Special Character Font contains special box drawing characters, internationalcharacters, graphics characters, and special error characters used by various commands withinthe TCS.

Unless the host specifies otherwise, the Static ASCII Character Font is mapped into the StandardCharacter Set, and the Static Special Character Font is mapped into the Extended Character Set.

The contents of these Static Character Fonts are shown in Appendix C.

� '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWVIn addition to the two Static Character Fonts already described, the TCS contains two DynamicCharacter Fonts known as Dynamic Character Font 1 and Dynamic Character Font 2.

Each of these dynamic fonts contains sixel information, which defines the appearance ofcharacters when either of these fonts is mapped into the Standard or Extended Character Setsusing the Map Character Font command.

The contents of each of these fonts can be modified by the host using the Copy Character Fontcommand and the Down-Line Load Character Font command. Both of these commands aredescribed later in this chapter.

5-24

Unless the host specifies otherwise, Dynamic Character Font 1 contains a copy of the StaticASCII Character Font and Dynamic Character Font 2 contains a copy of the Static SpecialCharacter Font. The default contents of these two fonts are shown in Appendix C.

� 0DQLSXODWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�6HWV�DQG�)RQWVTo change the appearance of characters on the display, several commands allow manipulating thecontents of the character sets and character fonts. The host program can copy between fonts,down-line load custom characters into the dynamic character fonts, and map any of the characterfonts into either the Standard or Extended Character Sets as shown in Figure 5-3.

StandardCharacter

Set

ExtendedCharacter

Set

Accessed by Codes00-7F (hex)

(0-127) decimal

Accessed by Codes80-FF (hex)

(128-255) decimal

Copy Character Font Command

Down-line Load Character Font Command

Character Fonts

Character Sets

Map Character Font Command

StaticASCII

CharacterFont

StaticSpecial

CharacterFont

DynamicCharacter

Font 1

DynamicCharacter

Font 2

)LJXUH������0DQLSXODWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�6HWV�DQG�)RQWV

The host program would typically use these commands as follows:

1. Send a Copy Character Font command to initialize one or both of the dynamic characterfonts from the static character fonts. (This may not be necessary because they areautomatically initialized by the TCS.)

2. Send a Down-Line Load Character Font command to load custom characters defined by thehost into either dynamic character font. The host may elect to change only a few of thecharacters or the contents of the entire dynamic character font.

3. Now that the dynamic character font contains the custom characters required by the hostapplication, the dynamic character font may be mapped into operation using the MapCharacter Font command. This causes the designated character font to become mapped into

5-25

the designated character set so the contents of the character set match that of the characterfont.

4. If the host subsequently changes the contents of a dynamic character font that is mapped intoone of the character sets, the change is reflected immediately in the appropriate character setand appears on the display.

The following pages describe each of the above commands. When manipulating character sets orcharacter fonts, remember the these points:

• The TCS uses only the Standard and Extended Character Sets to form the characters on thedisplay. Changes to either dynamic character font do not become visible until the dynamiccharacter font is mapped into a character set using the Map Character Font command. Oncethe dynamic character font is mapped into either character set by the Displayed Screen,subsequent changes to the dynamic character font are automatically reflected in the displaycontents.

• To change the contents of a dynamic character font without affecting the appearance of thedisplay, that dynamic font must not be mapped into either character set by the DisplayedScreen while it is being changed.

• The Static Character Fonts cannot be changed by the host program. They are stored in ROMand can only be mapped into the character sets or copied into the dynamic character fonts.

• Although the TCS can store many screens, there are only two character sets and fourcharacter fonts within the entire TCS. Each screen must share these resources. However, theCharacter Set Mapping that determines which of the four character fonts is mapped into thetwo character sets is screen-dependent. That is, each screen may specify a different mapping,which is automatically used whenever that screen is copied into the Displayed Screen. SeeScreen Memory Commands further on in this chapter for details.

� 'HIDXOW�&RQGLWLRQVThe host can successfully operate the TCS without using the available features of the charactersets and fonts because the TCS ensures that the character set mapping and the contents of thedynamic character fonts are initialized in such a way that the programmer need not worry aboutit.

Unless changed by the host, the TCS automatically:

• Maps the Static ASCII Character Font into the Standard Character Set.

• Maps the Static Special Character Font into the Extended Character Set.

• Copies the Static ASCII Character Font into Dynamic Character Font 1.

• Copies the Static Special Character Font into Dynamic Character Font 2.

5-26

� 9RODWLOLW\�RI�WKH�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWVThe dynamic character fonts are automatically stored in non-volatile memory. This ensures thatthe dynamic character fonts have the same volatility characteristics as the stored screens that usethem.

� &KDUDFWHU�6HW�$QG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�&RPPDQGV

The following pages describe the commands that operate on the Character Sets and CharacterFonts:

• Select Character Set command (Remote)

• Map Character Font command (Remote)

• Copy Character Font command (Remote)

• Down-Line Load Character Font command (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins at the top of a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-private commands.

5-27

� 6HOHFW�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�&RPPDQG�>6&6@��5HPRWH�The Select Character Set command provides the mechanism for addressing the ExtendedCharacter Set when the serial interface is set to operate with seven data bits.

When seven data bits are used, the Standard Character Set and the Extended Character Set areboth represented by the codes 0 through 127, decimal (0 though 7F, hex). The host shifts(selects) between the two character sets by sending the Select Character Set command.

To address the Extended Character Set with a 7-bit code, the host:

1. Sends the Shift Out code <SO> (14 decimal, E hex) to select the Extended Character Set.

2. Sends the 7-bit graphic code corresponding to each desired character. The TCS converts each7-bit code to an 8-bit code by adding a "l" as the most significant bit, selecting a character inthe Extended Character Set.

3. Sends the Shift In character <SI> (15 decimal, F hex) to return to the Standard Character Set.The TCS interprets any subsequent 7-bit graphic codes as selecting corresponding characterswithin the Standard Character set.

Once the TCS has received <SO>, the TCS interprets subsequent graphic codes as selectingExtended Characters until the TCS receives <SI>.

For compatibility, <SO> selects the Extended Character Set even when communicating witheight data bits. That is, 8-bit graphic codes that fall within the Standard Character Set also selectcorresponding characters from within the Extended Character Set.

NOTEControl codes are not affected by this command.

Once the TCS has received <SO> from the host, additional <SO> codes are ignored until <SI> isreceived. That is, it is permissible to send several <SO> codes without an intervening <SI>, orseveral <SI> codes without an intervening <SO>. In either case, the host is merely reselecting thecharacter set already in use. When the Extended Character set is selected, the NationalReplacement Code command has no effect.

� '()$8/7

The Standard Character set is selected.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

5-28

� +267�86$*(

<SO> (Shift Out, 14 decimal, E hex)

Selects the Extended Character Set.

<SI> (Shift In, 15 decimal, F hex)

Selects the Standard Character Set.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

When the Extended Character Set is selected, this command has priority over any NationalReplacement Code (NRC) that may be in effect. Codes are shifted out to the Extended CharacterSet and are not affected by the NRC.

When <SO> is in effect and 8-bit codes are received, the most-significant bit is replaced with a"l". This has the effect of mapping codes representing 8-bit Standard Characters into representing8-bit Extended Characters, while leaving codes representing 8-bit Extended Characterseffectively unchanged.

� (;$03/(6

<SI>123A45<SO>123A45<SI>

This sequence displays the following characters from the Standard Character Set:

31, 32, 33,41, 34 and 35 (hex)

and then displays the following characters from the Extended Character set:

B1, B2, B3, C1, B4, and B5 (hex).

If the Static Special Character Font is mapped into the Extended Character Set (the defaultcondition), the characters seen on the display would be:

1 2 3 A 4 5 è é ê i í î

5-29

� 0DS�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�&RPPDQG�^)0&)`��5HPRWH�

StaticASCII

CharacterFont

DynamicCharacter

Font 1

StandardCharacter

Set

ExtendedCharacter

Set

DynamicCharacter

Font 2

StaticSpecial

CharacterFont

Default Default

)LJXUH������&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�0DS�2SHUDWLRQV

The Map Character Font command allows the host to map any of the four character fonts intoeither of the two character sets. This allows the contents of the Standard and Extended CharacterSets to be dynamically altered. All the possible character font mapping operations are shown inFigure 5-4.

The Map Character Font command can be used to display custom characters instead of thedefault characters provided by the TCS. By changing the contents of a dynamic character font(using the Copy Character Font or Down-Line Load Character Font commands) and thenmapping the dynamic font into the Standard or Extended Character Sets, the host can causenormal graphic codes to display the newly defined custom characters.

When a character font is mapped into a character set, all 128 characters in the character set arereplaced by the corresponding characters from the character font. This affects the appearance ofall the characters in the character set, does not affect interpretation of any control codes whichcorrespond to locations within the character set, because control codes are interpretedindependently of the corresponding characters stored within the character set. Except for specialcircumstances when characters corresponding to control code locations are displayed, mappingnew characters into these locations in the character set has no affect upon TCS operation. SeeControl Codes in Chapter 3 for details.

When the TCS contains stored screens, each of the screens may specify a different character fontmapping. Even though the same four character fonts and two character sets are used by allscreens, the TCS automatically changes the character font mapping to match that specified by thestored screen when it is copied into the Displayed Screen. The character font mapping of a storedscreen can be changed by a number of methods, but the usual method is to send a Map CharacterFont command while the stored screen is selected for editing. Refer to the Select ScreenCommand for details.

5-30

When a character font is mapped into a character set, it is as if the contents of the character sethave been temporarily replaced with those of the character font. However, it is more than just acopy operation because subsequent changes to the character font are immediately reflected in thecharacter set. Since the Standard and Extended Character Sets are used by the TCS to translateincoming graphic codes into displayable characters, changes to a character font that is mappedinto a character set by the Displayed Screen have immediate visual effect. Changes to a characterfont that is mapped into a character set by a stored screen have no visual effect until the storedscreen becomes visible by being copied into the Displayed Screen.

Unless the host uses this command to change the default character font mapping, the StaticASCII and Static Special Character Fonts will be mapped into the Standard and ExtendedCharacter Sets, respectively, by every screen.

Character positions within each character font are numbered from 1 through 128 (decimal);communications codes that access the Standard Character Set range from 0 through 127(decimal); and those which access the Extended Character Set range from 128 through 255(decimal). Programmers should use care when determining the code value that must be sent toaccess a given character. Table 5-4 shows the necessary relationships between a character’sposition in the font and its corresponding communication code once the character font has beenmapped into a character set.

7DEOH������&RGH�9DOXHV�&RUUHVSRQGLQJ�WR�&KDUDFWHU�3RVLWLRQV

326,7,21�2)�&+$5$&7(5�,1&+$5$&7(5�)217

&+$5$&7(5�6(7�,172�:+,&+7+(�&+$5$&7(5�)217�,6

0$33('

&255(6321',1*&20081,&$7,21�&2'(�9$/8(

1 6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW 1����

1 ([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW ������1����

RU

�62!�1���

Before mapping a dynamic character font into either of the character sets, the programmer shouldbecome familiar with the default characters in the Standard and Extended character set that havespecial use within the TCS. Table 5-5 and Table 5-6 indicate the consequences of replacingcertain default characters within the Standard and Extended Character Sets with customcharacters when a dynamic character font is mapped into one of the character sets. It isrecommended that characters in these locations not be changed from their default values exceptwith care.

5-31

7DEOH������6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHUV�8VHG�)RU�6SHFLDO�3XUSRVHV

'(6&5,37,21 &255(6321',1*�'<1$0,&&+$5$&7(5�)217326,7,21�6���'(&,0$/�

&216(48(1&(�,)�&+$1*('�%<�+267�86,1*�'2:1�/,1(�/2$'�$1'�0$3�&+$5$&7(5�)217�&200$1'6

&RQWURO�FRGHPQHPRQLFV

��WKURXJK��� 6HYHQ�ELW�FRQWURO�FRGHV�ZLOO�EH�GLVSOD\HG�XVLQJ�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHUV�ZLWKLQ�WKH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�

6SDFH�FKDUDFWHU �� 6SDFH�FRGHV�DQG�HUDVXUH�RSHUDWLRQV�ZLOO�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHU�

&KDUDFWHU�SRVLWLRQV�ZLWKLQ�FKDUDFWHU�IRQWV�DUH�QXPEHUHG�IURP���WKURXJK������:KHQ�D�FKDUDFWHU�IRQW�LV�PDSSHG�LQWR�WKH�6WDQGDUG&KDUDFWHU�6HW��WKH�KRVW�VHQGV�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�FRGHV�UDQJLQJ�IURP���WKURXJK������)RU�H[DPSOH��D�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�FRGH�ZLWK�YDOXH����GHFLPDO��ZRXOG�DFFHVV�WKH�VSDFH�FKDUDFWHU�DW�SRVLWLRQ����LQ�WKH�6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�

7DEOH������([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHUV�8VHG�IRU�6SHFLDO�3XUSRVHV

'(6&5,37,21 &255(6321',1*�'<1$0,&&+$5$&7(5�)217326,7,21�6���'(&,0$/�

&216(48(1&(�,)�&+$1*('�%<�+267�86,1*�'2:1�/,1(�/2$'�$1'�0$3�&+$5$&7(5�)217�&200$1'6

%R[�W\SH���FKDUDFWHUV ��WKURXJK�� 7RXFK�NH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGV�XVH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[�W\SH���

%R[�W\SH�� ��WKURXJK��� 7RXFKNH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGVFKDUDFWHUV�XVH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[�W\SH���

%R[�W\SH���FKDUDFWHUV ���WKURXJK��� 7RXFKNH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGV�XVH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[�W\SH���

%R[�W\SH���FKDUDFWHUV ���WKURXJK��� 7RXFKNH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGV�XVH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[�W\SH���

6SDFH�FKDUDFWHU �� 6SDFH�FRGHV��ZKHQ�WKH�([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�LV�VHOHFWHG�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

2YHUUXQ�HUURUFKDUDFWHU

�� &RPPXQLFDWLRQV�RYHUUXQ�HUURUV�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHU�

%XIIHU�RYHUIORZ�HUURUFKDUDFWHU

�� &RPPXQLFDWLRQV�EXIIHU�RYHUIORZ�HUURUV�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHU�

,QWHUQDWLRQDO�15&FKDUDFWHUV

���WKURXJK��� 7KH�1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGH�FRPPDQG�GLVSOD\V�WKHFXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�

%DU�FKDUW�FKDUDFWHUV ���WKURXJK��� 7KH�'UDZ�%DU�IRU�%DU�&KDUW�FRPPDQG�GLVSOD\V�WKH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHUV�

*UD\�EORFN�FKDUDFWHU ��� &XVWRP�RXWOLQH�DQG�ILOO�FRPPDQGV�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHU�LI�QRQH�RWKHU�LV�VSHFLILHG�

5-32

7DEOH������([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHUV�8VHG�IRU�6SHFLDO�3XUSRVHV�FRQWLQXHG

'(6&5,37,21 &255(6321',1*�'<1$0,&&+$5$&7(5�)217326,7,21�6���'(&,0$/�

&216(48(1&(�,)�&+$1*('�%<�+267�86,1*�'2:1�/,1(�/2$'�$1'�0$3�&+$5$&7(5�)217�&200$1'6

)UDPLQJ�HUURUFKDUDFWHU

��� &RPPXQLFDWLRQV�IUDPLQJ�HUURUV�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

3DULW\�HUURU�FKDUDFWHU ��� &RPPXQLFDWLRQV�SDULW\�HUURUV�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

�&KDUDFWHU�SRVLWLRQV�ZLWKLQ�FKDUDFWHU�IRQWV�DUH�QXPEHUHG�IURP���WKURXJK������:KHQ�D�FKDUDFWHU�IRQW�LV�PDSSHG�LQWR�WKH�([WHQGHG&KDUDFWHU�6HW��WKH�KRVW�VHQGV�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�FRGHV�UDQJLQJ�IURP�����WKURXJK������)RU�H[DPSOH��D�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�FRGH�ZLWK�YDOXH�����GHFLPDO��DFFHVVHV�WKH�VSDFH�FKDUDFWHU�DW�SRVLWLRQ����LQ�WKH�([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW������ ���������������

� '()$8/76

The Static ASCII Character Font is mapped into the Standard Character Set.

The Static Special Character Font is mapped into the Extended Character Set.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> (0 map the Static ASCII Character Font into the Standard Character Set (default)

<ESC> (1 map Dynamic Character Font 1 into the Standard Character Set

<ESC> (2 map Dynamic Character Font 2 into the Standard Character Set

<ESC> (3 map the Static Special Character Font into the Standard Character Set

<ESC> )0 map the Static ASCII Character Font into the Extended Character Set

<ESC> )1 map Dynamic Character Font 1 into the Extended Character Set

<ESC> )2 map Dynamic Character Font 2 into the Extended Character Set

<ESC> )3 map the Static Special Character Font into the Extended Character Set (default)

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>(0

Map the Static ASCII Character Font into the Standard Character Set. This is the defaultcondition.

<ESC>)0

Map the Static ASCII Character Font into the Extended Character Set. Note that thiscondition will change the appearance of the characters used for drawing outlines and for

5-33

indicating communication errors. Because of the possible confusion this could cause, thiscommand is not recommended..

<ESC>)3

Map the Static Special Character Font into the Extended Character Set. This is the defaultcondition.

<ESC>)2

Map Dynamic Character Font 2 into the Extended Character Set. Mapping a user-definedcharacter font into the Extended Character Set is a convenient way to customize theappearance of the box characters used by the Outline a Region and Outline a Touchkeycommands.

5-34

� &RS\�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�&RPPDQG�^)&&)`��5HPRWH�The Copy Character Font command allows the host to initialize the contents of the dynamiccharacter fonts. This command might be issued as the first step in creating a new dynamiccharacter font.

The Copy Character Font command allows the contents of any of the four character fonts to becopied into either of the two dynamic character fonts as shown in Figure 5-5. The two staticcharacter fonts cannot be copied into because they are contained in ROM and cannot be changed.

If the contents of either dynamic character font are changed by the Copy Character Fontcommand while the dynamic character font is mapped into either the Standard or Extendedcharacter sets by the Displayed Screen the changes made by this command will immediatelybecome visible on the display.

� '()$8/76

The Static ASCII Character Font is copied into the Dynamic Character Font 1.

The Static Special Character Font is copied into the Dynamic Character Font 2.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

�

StaticASCII

CharacterFont

DynamicCharacter

Font 1

DynamicCharacter

Font 2

StaticSpecial

CharacterFont

Default

Default

)LJXUH������&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�&RS\�2SHUDWLRQV

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> [<Psrc>; <Pdest> }

<Psrc> = Numeric parameter that specifies the source character font.

<Psrc> = omitted or 0: The Static ASCII Character Font

1: Dynamic Character Font 1

2: Dynamic Character Font 2

3: The Static Special Character Font

<Pdest> = Numeric parameter that specifies the destination character font. Since fonts 0 and3 are static fonts, the command is ignored if any attempt is made to copy into these fonts.

5-35

<Pdest> = omitted or 0: Not a valid destination font

1: Dynamic Character Font 1

2: Dynamic Character Font 2

3: Not a valid destination font

� 3266,%/(�(55256

The Copy Character Font command is ignored if an attempt is made to copy into one of the staticcharacter fonts, which cannot be changed.

The Copy Character Font command is ignored if the source and destination character fonts arethe same.

� (;$03/(6

The following table shows all valid combinations of source and destination fonts. Othercombinations are ignored.

&200$1' &23,(6�)520 72

�(6&!�>����` 6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�(6&!�>����` 6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�(6&!�>����` '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�� '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�(6&!�>����` '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�� '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�(6&!�>����` 6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�(6&!�>����` 6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW '\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

5-36

� 'RZQ�/LQH�/RDG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�&RPPDQG�^)'/&)`��5HPRWH�The Down-Line Load Character Font Command allows the host to place custom characters intoDynamic Character Fonts 1 and 2. Then, when the dynamic character font is mapped into theStandard or Extended character set, the custom characters can be displayed.

For example, to create a dynamic character font that is only slightly different from the StaticASCII Character Font, one method is to use the Down-Line Load Character Font command todown-line load an entire new font of 128 characters into the Dynamic Character Font. This canbe somewhat tedious because all 128 characters, including characters which match those alreadystored in the Static ASCII Character Font, first have to be developed by the host application. Asimpler method is as follows:

• Using the Copy Character Font command, the host program copies the Static ASCIICharacter Font into the dynamic character font of interest.

• Using the Down-Line Load Character Font command, the host program replaces only thosecharacters in the dynamic character font that differ from the contents of the Static ASCIICharacter Font.

• Using the Map Character Font command, the host program maps the custom dynamiccharacter font into the appropriate character set (in this example, the Standard Character Set).

If the contents of either Dynamic Character Font is changed by the Down-Line Load CharacterFont command while the Dynamic Character Font is mapped into either the Standard orExtended character sets by the Displayed Screen, the changes immediately become visible on thedisplay.

Before down-line loading into a dynamic character font, the programmer should be aware of theeffects that the dynamic character font may have if its default contents are changed and thenmapped into one of the character sets.

Character positions within each character font are numbered from 1 through 128 (decimal);communications codes that access the Standard Character Set range from 0 through 127(decimal); and those which access the Extended Character Set range from 128 through 255(decimal). Programmers should use care when determining the code value that must be sent toaccess a given character. Table 5-4 shows the relationships needed between a character’s positionin the font and its corresponding communication code once the character font has been mappedinto a character set.

� (1&2',1*�&86720�&+$5$&7(56�)25�'2:1/2$',1*

The character fonts store sixel data in cells 8 dots wide by 10 dots high. Each dot in the cell isrepresented by a bit with a binary value of 1 or 0. A one (1) specifies that the dot becomes theforeground color and a zero (0) specifies that the dot becomes the background color.

For example, to place the character A into a dynamic character font, the first step is to design thecharacter as shown in Figure 5-6.

5-37

)LJXUH������([DPSOH�&XVWRP�&KDUDFWHU�'HVLJQ

It might seem that the simplest way to encode this character for transmission is to send 10 byteswith each of the 8 bits in the byte representing a dot. There are two reasons why this method isnot acceptable:

1. The host and TCS may be communicating using only 7 data bits.

2. Some bit sequences would be interpreted as control codes.

Therefore, it is necessary to encode the character in some other way. The encoding methoddescribed in the following discussion is compatible with the DEC down-line load characterformat.

Organize the character cell into columns of six bits each as shown in Figure 5-7. Each column isrepresented as a vertical 1 x 6 pattern of dots called a sixel. The columns are numbered in theorder they are to be sent to the TCS. The most significant bit is at the bottom and the leastsignificant bit is at the top of each column. The 10-dot character height is not a multiple of six, sothe columns on the bottom of the character cell consist of only four bits each. In these sixels, bits4 and 5 are ignored.

5-38

)LJXUH������'LYLGLQJ�WKH�&KDUDFWHU�LQWR�6L[HOV

Convert the binary values of each column to ASCII characters. Column codes are restricted to therange of 63 through 126 decimal (? to ~), so add an offset of decimal 63 (binary 111111) to eachcolumn value. Thus, the lowest binary value (000000) becomes decimal 63 (0 + 63); the highestbinary value (111111) converts to decimal 126 (63 + 63).

Convert the value resulting from adding the decimal 63 offset to the code representing itsequivalent character in the table in Appendix C. For example, the first column is binary 110000.Adding the offset yields:

110000

+11111

1101111 = 6F hexadecimal

or row 6, column 15 of the table. The character at that location is the ASCII character "o".Figure 5-8 shows the complete conversion of the example character "A".

After the desired characters have been designed and converted as described, they can then be sentfrom the host to the TCS using the Down-Line Load Character Font command.

5-39

� 6800$5<

To down-line load a custom character font, do the following:

1. Design the characters in a matrix 8 dots wide by 10 dots high.

2. Divide the characters into 2 sets of 8 sixels each sixes having 6-bit positions. The upper set iscomplete (6-bit sixels) and the lower one is made up of 4-bit sixels. The unused bits in eachof the 4-bit sixels should be zero in the conversions that follow.

3. Convert each sixes to a code representing an ASCII character in the range ? through ~ (63through 126 decimal) by adding an offset of binary 11111 (decimal 63).

4. Use the resulting codes as the sixel bit patterns in the Down-Line Load Character Fontcommand. Sixteen such sixel bit patterns are sent for each character thus encoded.

Several shortcuts are possible. Graph paper ruled into rectangles having 80 squares can greatlysimplify designing the custom characters particularly if they are custom borders or othercharacters that extend to the edges of the character cell.

5-40

�

)LJXUH������(QFRGLQJ�WKH�6L[HOV

5-41

� 6$03/(�352*5$0�)25�6,;(/�&219(56,21

A second shortcut might be to use a program to convert the bit patterns into the sixel codes. Thefollowing example program asks for 8 upper sixels, then for 8 lower sixels. The resulting codesare stored as characters in a string, and then displayed. The program could be enhanced by usingthe character string directly in a properly formatted Down-Line Load Character Font command.

This sample program runs on the IBM PC.

‘ ===================================================

110 ‘ Program to encode a TCS character into sixels.

120 ‘

130 ‘ The following DATA statements represent the

140 ‘ letter “A”. Periods represent background pixels.

150 ‘ Asterisks represent foreground pixels.

160 ‘ ========================================================

170 DATA “........”

180 DATA “...*....”

190 DATA “..*.*...”

200 DATA “.*...*..”

210 DATA “*.....*.”

220 DATA “*******.”

230 DATA “*.....*.”

240 DATA “*.....*.”

250 DATA “........”

260 DATA “........”

270 ‘

280 DIM pixrow$(9) ‘ Array to hold rows of pixels.

290 DIM binval%(9) ‘ Array to hold powers of two.

300 ‘

310 FOR row% = 0 to 9 ‘ For each row in the character.

320 READ pixrow$(row%) ‘ Read in pixel row.

330 binval%(row%) = 2 ^ row% ‘ Compute powers of two.

340 NEXT row% ‘ Enfor.

350

360 PRINT “For this character, send the string: “;

370 ‘ ________________________________________________________

380 ‘ Compute sixels for the top six rows

390 ‘ (in each column, the top six pixels form one sixel).

400 ‘ _______________________________________________________

410 FOR column% = 1 TO 8 ‘ For each column in the character.

420 sixel% = 63 ‘ Start with the sixel value

430 ‘ for no pixels lit.

440 FOR row% = 0 to 5 ‘ For the top rows in the column.

450 pixelon% = 0 ‘ Assume pixel is off.

5-42

460 ‘

470 IF MID$(pixrow$(row%),column%,1)= “*” THEN pixelon%= 1

480 ‘

490 ‘ Adjust value if pixel is on.

500 ‘

510 IF pixelon% = 1 THEN sixel% = sixel% + binval%(row%)

520 ‘

530 ‘ Add correct binary value if

540 ‘ the pixel is on (if the pixel

550 ‘ is off nothing is added).

560 NEXT row% ‘ Endfor.

570 PRINT CHR$(sixel%); ‘ Print the sixel.

580 NEXT column% ‘ Endfor.

590 ‘

600 PRINT “/”; ‘ End of top sixels.

610 ‘ ________________________________________________________

620 ‘ Compute sixels for the bottom four rows

630 ‘ (in each column, the bottom four pixels form one sixel).

640 ‘ ________________________________________________________

650 FOR column% = 1 TO 8 ‘ For each column in the character.

660 sixel% = 63 ‘ Start with the sixel value

670 ‘ for no pixels lit.

680 FOR row% = 6 TO 9 ‘ For the top rows in the column.

690 pixelon% = 0 ‘ Assume pixel is off.

700 ‘

710 IF MID$(pixrow$(row%),column%,1) = “*” THEN pixelon% = 1

720 ‘

730 ‘ Adjust value if pixel is on.

740 ‘

750 IF pixelon% = 1 THEN sixel% + binval%(row% - 6)

760 ‘

770 ‘ Add correct binary value if

780 ‘ the pixel is on (if the pixel

790 ‘ is off nothing is added).

800 NEXT row% ‘ Endfor.

810 PRINT CHR$(sixel%); ‘ Print the sixel.

820 NEXT column% ‘ Endfor.

830 ‘

840 PRINT

850 END

5-43

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> P <Pfn>;<Pcn>;<Pe>{<Sxbpl>;<Sxbp2>;... ; <Sxbpn> <ESC> \

<DCS> can be used in place of <ESC> P and <ST> can be used in place of <ESC> \ when theTCS is communicating using 8 data bits.

<Pfn> is a numeric parameter that specifies which dynamic character font is to be loaded.

When <Pfn> is:

0 or omitted: load Dynamic Character Font 1

1: load Dynamic Character Font 1

2: load Dynamic Character Font 2

<Pcn> is a numeric parameter that specifies the position within the dynamic character font tostart loading characters.

When <Pcn> is:

0 or omitted: start loading at 33rd position

1: start loading at start of dynamic character font

2: start loading at 2nd position

n: start loading at nth position

> 128: do not load any characters

<Pe> is a numeric parameter that specifies which characters to erase in the dynamiccharacter font before loading characters.

When <Pe> is:

0 or omitted: erase all characters in the dynamic character font before loading newcharacters

1: erase only where new characters are to be loaded

<Sxbpl> is the sixel bit pattern for first character.

<Sxbp2> is the sixel bit pattern for second character.

<Sxbpn> is the sixel bit pattern for last character.

Each sixel bit pattern has the form:

S...S/ S...S where the first S...S represents the upper columns of sixels, the slash(2/5) advances to the lower half of the character, and the second S . . . Srepresents the lower columns of sixels. Columns are sent starting withthe leftmost sixel of the appropriate half of the character cell. Each Smust be a code from 3F through 7E hex (corresponding to characters ?through~).

5-44

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If no sixel bit patterns are specified and <Pe> is 1, none of the characters in the dynamic fontbuffer are changed.

If incomplete sixel patterns are given for a character, the incomplete portions of the character cellwill be blank (matching the screen background). If extra sixel patterns are given for a character,they will be ignored.

If the command contains codes that are acceptable within any Device Control String (code values20 through 7E hex) but are not valid for this command, the command is ignored once it iscompleted.

If the command contains codes outside the range for any Device Control String the command isignored and the TCS displays the remainder of the characters in the command.

All sixel bit patterns for characters beyond the 128th character are ignored.

The dynamic character font is only loaded when the TCS receives a proper terminator sequence(<ESC> \ or <ST>).

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>P;;{<ESC> \

This sequence causes the contents of the entire Dynamic Character Font 1 to be erased.

<ESC>P1;53;{ogcacgo?/B?????B?<ESC> \

This sequence causes the character A (as shown in the preceding figures) to be loaded intothe 53rd position of the Dynamic Character Font 1. If the Dynamic Character Font 1 ismapped into the Standard Character Set, to display the custom character "A", the host wouldsend the code 52 decimal, (representing the character "4" normally in position 53 of theStandard Character Set).

5-45

� &+$5$&7(5�',63/$<,1*�&200$1'6The Character Displaying commands display and erase characters on the screen and modify theirappearance. These commands affect the characters already on the screen when the command isexecuted.

The Character Displaying commands are:

• Display Double-Width Line command (Remote)

• Display Double-Size Line command (Remote)

• Place Double-Size Line command (Remote)

• Display Normal Line command (Remote)

• Draw Bar for Bar Chart command (Remote)

• Erase Character command (Remote)

• Erase in Line command (Remote)

• Erase in Display command (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC- private commands.

� &RORU�)HDWXUHVFor the color TCS, these features affect the Character Displaying commands:

• Commands that cause characters to be displayed normally use the current foreground,background, and conceal color attributes. However, there are several controls that can affecthow and when these attributes are used. For details, refer to Set Character AttributesCommand in this chapter.

• Commands that cause characters to be erased use a space character in the current backgroundcolor and turn off the highlight, underline, blink, reverse-video, and concealed attributes foreach erased character.

5-46

� 'LVSOD\�'RXEOH�:LGWK�/LQH�&RPPDQG�^'(&':/`��5HPRWH�The Display Double-Width Line command displays the line occupied by the cursor (and only thatline) using double-width characters.

Since each double-width character occupies twice the normal character width, all charactersoccupying the right half of the normal line disappear from the screen. The right half thatdisappears from the screen is preserved in memory and can be retrieved using the DisplayNormal Line command.

When a line is changed to double-width, the cursor may move horizontally across the screen inorder to remain in the same character column position. If the line was originally a normal lineand the cursor was past the midpoint of the line, then the cursor is repositioned to the end of thedouble-width line.

NOTEThis command affects both characters that were previously on the line, and those on the line that arrive

after the command is issued.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>#6

Changes the line occupied by the cursor to appear in double-width.

5-47

� 'LVSOD\�'RXEOH�6L]H�/LQH�&RPPDQG�^'(&'+/`��5HPRWH�The Display Double-Size Line command changes the line occupied by the cursor to appear as adouble-size line. Double-size lines are both double-height and double-width.

Each of the two lines that make up the double-size line is also double-width, so the charactersthat appeared on the right half of the screen disappear when a normal line is converted to double-size. The characters in the right half can be made to reappear when the line is restored to normalsize with the Display Normal Line command.

When a line is changed to double-size, the cursor may move horizontally across the screen inorder to remain in the same character column position. If the line was originally a normal lineand the cursor was past the midpoint of the line, then the cursor is repositioned to the end of thedouble-size line.

NOTEThis command affects both the characters that were previously on the line, and those on the line that arrive

after the command is issued.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>#3

Changes the line that the cursor is on to display the top half of double-size characterscurrently in the line. Changes the line below the cursor to display the bottom half of double-size characters currently in the line that the cursor is on.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If only one line is changed to double-sized, then the line contains only half (top or bottom,according to the command) of the double-sized characters that appear in the line.

5-48

� 3ODFH�'RXEOH�6L]H�/LQH�&RPPDQG�^)'6/`��5HPRWH�The Place Double-Size Line command creates a double-size line with a single command,providing a simpler alternative to the Display Double-Size Line command for making a double-size line.

When this command is processed, the text and attributes on the line occupied by the cursor areduplicated on the line below. The line the cursor is on becomes the top half of a double-size linewhile the line below the cursor becomes the bottom half of a double-size line. This commandmakes a single normal size line both double-high and double-wide. For example, assume thefollowing lines are being displayed before the Place Double-Size Line command is received:

This is the line the cursor is on.

... this is the next line...

... and this is the third line.

When the host sends the Place Double-Size Line command, the TCS displays:

This is the line the cursor is on...... and this is the third line.

As with double-wide lines, the characters on the right half of a normal size line disappear whenthe line is converted to double-size. The characters in the right half of both the top and bottomlines reappear when the lines are restored to normal with the Display Normal Line command.

When a double-size line is placed, the cursor may move horizontally across the screen in order toremain in the same character column position. If the line was originally a normal line and thecursor was past the midpoint of the line, then the cursor is repositioned to the end of the double-size line.

The Place Double-Size Line command never causes any scrolling. The region of the displayaffected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region when Origin Mode is set. When thiscommand is issued, only the top half of the double-size line will be displayed if the cursor is atthe bottom of the screen (or of the scrolling region with Origin Mode set).

To change any characters in the double size line that this command has created, there are twoalternatives: the host can change the characters in the top line and then issue the command asecond time, or else change the characters in both the top and bottom halves of the double-sizeline.

Any characters this command replicates retain their original NRC translation (if any).

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>#2

5-49

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>#2

Change the line that the cursor is on to display the top half of double-size characters currently inthe line. Change the line below the cursor to display the bottom half of double-size characterscurrently in the line the cursor is on.

5-50

� 'LVSOD\�1RUPDO�/LQH�&RPPDQG��'(&6:/���5HPRWH�The Display Normal Line command displays the line occupied by the cursor (and only that line)using normal characters.

To normalize a double-size line, the host must send the Display Normal Line command for bothof the lines that make up the double-size line; (the top and bottom halves must both benormalized). In many cases, after both lines have been normalized, the host should send acommand to delete one of the lines, as one line usually contains exactly the same characters asthe other.

If the host normalizes a double-width or double-size line, the hidden normal-sized characters thatoriginally occupied the right-half of the line are restored. The cursor position remains in the samecharacter column positionthe cursor follows the character it resides on across the screen whenthe line is normalized.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>#5

Changes the line occupied by the cursor to appear normal sized.

5-51

� 'UDZ�%DU�IRU�%DU�&KDUW�&RPPDQG�^)'%%`��5HPRWH�The Draw Bar for Bar Chart command provides a convenient way to display and update a barchart. The command supports both horizontal or vertical bar charts. To use the command, thehost specifies:

• The maximum length or height of the bar

• The amount of the bar to be filled in one-tenth of one percent precision (.0% through100.0%)

The bar is drawn using block characters. If necessary, the TCS uses partial characters at the edgeof the bar to represent the proper fill percentage. The part of the bar beyond the portion filledwith block characters is automatically erased.

The bar starts at the current cursor position and extends upward for a vertical bar, or to the rightfor a horizontal bar. The host can also specify how thick the bar is to be drawn. If a bar is beingdrawn and a thickness greater than 1 is specified, the thickness extends to the right of the cursorfor a vertical bar or below the cursor for a horizontal bar.

Figure 5-9, which represents bars that are two characters in thickness, shows how a bar is drawnrelative to the cursor position.

The bar chart command automatically takes into account the line type of the area in which thebar is drawn, as long as the line types in the area are not mixed (all normal, all double-wide, orall alternating double-size). Note that the resolution of partial characters placed on a double-sizeline is reduced when a vertical bar is drawn. In this situation, the resolution of the partial fillcharacter is reduced from 1/10th of a line to 1/5th of a line. Unless double-size lines are requiredfor text that shares the same lines as the vertical bar (such as labels), it is recommended thatdouble-wide lines be used instead. This provides a vertical bar of the same physical size, but withpartial characters of twice the resolution.

)LJXUH������9HUWLFDO�DQG�+RUL]RQWDO�%DUV

The Draw Bar for Bar Chart command does not change the cursor position.

5-52

The area of the display this command affects is restricted to the scrolling region when OriginMode is set.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[1;<Ps>;<Pr>;<Pd> ;<Pt>x

<Ps> is a numeric parameter specifying the maximum size in lines (vertical bar) or characters(horizontal bar) of the bar when it is 100% filled.

When <Ps> is:

0 or omitted: Ps = 24 lines (vertical bar)

Ps = 80 characters (horizontal bar)

> 24 (vertical bar): Ps = 24 lines

> 80 (horizontal bar): Ps = 80 characters

<Pr> is a numeric parameter specifying the percentage amount to fill the bar. The parametermust be in the range of 0 through 1000 and represents .0% through 100.0% fill.

If <Pr> is greater than 1000, 1000 is used, and the entire bar is filled.

If <Pr> is omitted, 0 is used, and the bar is not filled.

<Pd> is a selective parameter specifying the direction the bar is to be drawn.

If <Pd> is 0 or omitted, a vertical bar is drawn. If <Pd> is 1, a horizontal bar is drawn.

<Pt> is a numeric parameter specifying the thickness of the bar in lines (horizontal bar)number of characters (vertical bar).

When <Pt> is:

0 or omitted: Pt = 1

> 24 (horizontal bar): Pt = 24

>80 (vertical bar): Pt = 80

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the size specified for the full 100% length or height of the bar is greater than the area availablebetween the cursor and the edge of the screen, the bar is automatically scaled so the amount ofroom remaining becomes the full length (100%).

If the thickness specified for the bar is greater than the area available between the cursor and theedge of the screen, the thickness of the bar is truncated at the screen edge.

When Origin Mode is set, the edges of the scrolling region are treated as if they were the edgesof the screen.

5-53

The bar may appear jagged if it crosses a mixture of line types.

If the extended character set does not have the appropriate characters (for example, DefaultDynamic Font 1 copied to extended set) the bar will not appear correctly.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[1;20;665x

Draws a vertical bar 66.5% of 20 lines high and one character wide (thick). The filled portionof the bar would be about 13 and 1/3rd lines tall.

<ESC>[1;75;916;1;2x

Draws a horizontal bar 91.6% of 75 characters wide and two lines high (thick) starting at thecurrent cursor position. The filled portion of the bar would be about 68 and 3/4 characterswide.

5-54

� (UDVH�&KDUDFWHU�&RPPDQG�>(&+@��5HPRWH�The Erase Character command erases the character under the cursor and as many characters asdesired following it up to the end of the line.

Each character erased is replaced by a blank (the ASCII Space character) with characterattributes "off." The cursor does not move when the TCS executes this command.

NOTEIf the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set, erased characters are replaced with blanks, but their character

attributes remain unchanged. This makes it easier to erase within a field of attributes.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<Pn>X

<Pn> is a numeric parameter, specifying the total number of characters to be erased.

If <Pn> is 0 or omitted, only the character under the cursor is erased.

If <Pn> is n (where n is a number of characters other than zero), the character under thecursor and n-1 characters following it are erased.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If (<Pn>) exceeds the number of characters remaining on the line to the right of the cursor,erasure does not continue beyond the end of the line (regardless of the state of the Auto Wrap-around Mode).

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[X

Erases the character at the cursor.

<ESC>[24X

Erases the character at the cursor and the 23 characters that follow it. The cursor is notmoved.

5-55

� (UDVH�LQ�/LQH�&RPPDQG�>(/@��5HPRWH�The Erase in Line command erases a specified chapter of the line occupied by the cursor.

Each character erased is replaced by a blank (the ASCII Space character) with characterattributes "off." The cursor does not move when the TCS executes this command.

NOTEIf the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set, erased characters are replaced with blanks, but their character

attributes remain unchanged. This makes it easier to erase within a field of attributes. The line typeremains unchanged regardless of the state of the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> [<Ps>K

<Ps> is a selective parameter, specifying the portion of the current line to be erased.

If <Ps> is 0 or is omitted, characters from the cursor through the end of the line areerased.

5-56

If <Ps> is 1, characters from the start of the line through the cursor are erased.

If <Ps> is 2, the entire line is erased.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[K

Erases from the cursor through the end of the line. The cursor is not moved.

<ESC>[2K

Erases the entire line. The cursor is not moved.

5-57

� (UDVH�LQ�'LVSOD\�&RPPDQG�>('@��5HPRWH�The Erase in Display command erases all or part of the display.

This command can be used to erase the area preceding the cursor, the area following the cursor,or the entire screen. Each erased character is replaced by a blank (the ASCII Space character, 20Hex) with character attributes "off." The cursor does not move when this command is executed.

If the entire screen is erased, all line types are reset to normal. If a portion of the screen is erased,all lines except the line occupied by the cursor are reset to normal. In the line occupied by thecursor, the line type remains unchanged.

NOTEWhen the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set, erased characters are replaced with blanks, but the

character attributes within the erased area remain unaffected. This makes it easier to erase within a field ofattributes.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> [<Ps>J

<Ps> is a selective parameter, specifying the portion of the screen to be erased.

If <Ps> is 0 or omitted, characters from the cursor through the end of the screen(inclusive) are erased.

5-58

If <Ps> is 1, characters from the beginning of the screen through the cursor position(inclusive) are erased.

If <Ps> is 2, the entire screen is erased.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[J

Erases from the cursor through the end of the screen. The cursor does not move. The linecontaining the cursor retains its line type; all other erased lines are reset to normal.

<ESC>[1J

Erases from the beginning of the screen through the cursor position. The line containing thecursor retains its line type; all other erased lines are reset to normal.

5-59

� &+$5$&7(5�,17(535(7$7,21�&200$1'6Character Interpretation commands determine the appearance and placement of characters thatarrive after the command is received. The Character Interpretation commands are:

• Auto Wrap-Around Mode command (Local/Remote)

• Send-Receive Mode command (Local/Remote)

• New Line Mode command (Local/Remote)

• NOCHANGE Attribute Mode command (Local/Remote)

• National Replacement Code command (Local/Remote)

• Set Character Attributes command (Remote)*

• Scrolling Region command (Remote)

• Origin Mode command (Remote)

* For the color TCS, the Set Character Attributes command has two parameters that can becontrolled remotely or locally: foreground color and background color.

Commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, each commanddescription begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC- private commands.

5-60

� $XWR�:UDS�$URXQG�0RGH�&RPPDQG��'(&$:0���/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Auto Wrap-Around Mode command sets and resets the Auto Wrap-Around Mode.

The Auto Wrap-Around Mode determines how the cursor responds when the TCS receivescharacters that run off the right margin of the display.

• When the Auto Wrap-Around Mode is "off" (reset), a character received when the cursor isat the right margin replaces the previously displayed character and the cursor remainsstationary.

• When the Auto Wrap-Around Mode is "on" (set), another character received (other than thetab character <HT>) after a character had already been placed at the right margin isdisplayed on the next line at the left margin. This causes the screen to scroll if the new linewould be below the bottom of the scrolling region. The tab character <HT> never moves thecursor to the next line.

� '()$8/7

Off (Reset).

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user sets the Auto Wrap-Around Mode by entering the Setup Screen and, using touchkeys orthe optional keyboard, setting the Auto-Wrap parameter to one of the following states:

• off (reset)

• on (set)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[?7l

Resets the Auto Wrap-Around Mode to "off." (The terminator for the reset command is theletter "l", ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[?7h

Sets the Auto Wrap-Around Mode to "on."

5-61

� 6HQG�5HFHLYH�0RGH�&RPPDQG�>650@��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Send-Receive Mode command sets and resets the Send-Receive Mode, which controls theLocal Echo feature of the TCS. The Local Echo feature echoes user input from the optionalkeyboard to the TCS. Touch cell reports and other TCS-to-host strings are not affected (and arenever echoed locally).

• When the Send-Receive Mode is reset, the Local Echo feature is turned on. User input fromthe keyboard is sent to both the host and the TCS; the TCS interprets the input as if it hadbeen sent (echoed) by the host. This relieves the host from the burden of echoing charactersto the TCS.

• When the Send-Receive Mode is set, the Local Echo feature is turned off. User input fromthe keyboard is sent only to the host; the input is not interpreted by the TCS. The host can, atits own discretion, echo the input back to the TCS.

The user can set or reset the Send-Receive Mode by setting the Local Echo parameter within theSetup Screen to "off" or "on", respectively.

NOTES1. The Send-Receive Mode and the Local Echo parameter both control the Local Echo feature. However,they operate as opposites. That is, the Local Echo feature is off when the Local Echo parameter is off andthe Send-Receive Mode is set. Likewise, the Local Echo feature is on when the Local Echo parameter is on

and the Send-Receive Mode is reset.

2. Locally echoed information is always echoed to the Displayed Screen, even while the host has selected astored screen for editing. This allows the TCS to provide proper visual feedback via the display to the user

even while the host is working with an invisible stored screen.

� '()$8/7�9$/8(

Set. (Local Echo feature is off.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user sets or resets the Send-Receive Mode (and thus the Local Echo feature) by entering theSetup Screen and setting the Local Echo parameter to one of the following values:

• on (Local Echo feature is on and Send-Receive Mode is reset.)

• off (Local Echo feature is off and Send-Receive Mode is set.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[12l

Resets the Send-Receive Mode (Local Echo is "on"). (The terminator for the reset commandis the letter "l", ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[12h

Sets the Send-Receive Mode (Local Echo is "off").

5-62

� 1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�&RPPDQG�>/10@��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The New Line Mode command determines which control characters are transmitted by the TCSwhen the Return key or Enter key is pressed on an optional keyboard. The New Line Modecommand also determines the action taken by the TCS when it receives Line Feed <LF>, FormFeed <FF>, and Vertical Tab <VT> characters.

The effect of the New Line Mode on the Return and Enter keys is shown in Table 5-7. The effectof the New Line Mode on cursor movement is shown in Table 5-8.

� '()$8/7

Off (reset).

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user sets or resets the New Line Mode by entering the Setup Screen and, using touchkeys orthe optional keyboard, setting the New Line parameter to one of the following values:

• on (Sets New Line Mode)

• off (Resets New Line Mode.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[20l

Resets New Line Mode to "off." (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l",ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[20h

Sets New Line Mode to "on."

7DEOH������(IIHFWV�RI�WKH�/LQH�0RGH�RQ�WKH�5HWXUQ�DQG�(QWHU�.H\V

.(<%2$5' &+$5$&7(56�6(17�72�7+(�+267

,1387 1HZ�/LQH�0RGH��RII� 1HZ�/LQH�0RGH��RQ�

5HWXUQ 7&6�VHQGV��&5! 7&6�VHQGV��&5!�/)!

(QWHU 7&6�VHQGV��&5! 7&6�VHQGV��&5!�/)!

�:KHQ�WKH�DX[LOLDU\�NH\SDG�LV�LQ�WKH�1XPHULF�0RGH

7DEOH������(IIHFWV�RI�WKH�1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�RQ�&XUVRU�0RYHPHQW

+267 &85625�029(0(17

287387 1HZ�/LQH�0RGH��RII� 1HZ�/LQH�0RGH��RQ�

�/)!���))!��RU�97!

0RYHV�FXUVRU�WR�QH[W�OLQH��VDPHFROXPQ�

0RYHV�FXUVRU�WR�QH[W�OLQH��OHIW�PDUJLQ�

5-63

� 12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH�&RPPDQG�^)1&$0`��5HPRWH�The NOCHANGE Attribute Mode command sets and resets the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode.

The NOCHANGE Attribute Mode allows the host to freeze the visual attributes (characterattributes and line type) of the display.

When the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set, the host can modify the character contents withinan area of the display without affecting the visual attributes in use in the area. Commands thatdirectly call for changes to visual attributes override the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode. Thesecommands are listed in Table 5-10.

The NOCHANGE Attribute Mode command can prevent all other commands from changing thevisual attributes. The effect of the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode on these commands is shown inTable 5-9.

NOTEThe NOCHANGE Attribute Mode prevents the Set Character Attributes command from changing theattributes of characters subsequently placed on the display. To change the character attributes of any

position on the display when the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set, the Modify Character Attributes in aRegion command must be used.

� '()$8/7

Reset.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>3l

Resets NOCHANGE Attribute Mode. (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l",ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[>3h

Sets NOCHANGE Attribute Mode.

5-64

7DEOH������&RPPDQGV�$IIHFWHG�E\�12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH

&200$1' 23(5$7,21�2)�&200$1'�:+(112&+$1*(�$775,%87(�02'(�,6�5(6(7

�2))�

23(5$7,21�2)�&200$1'�:+(112&+$1*(�$775,%87(�02'(�,6�6(7

�21�

&KDUDFWHUV�VHQW�IRUGLVSOD\

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�GLVSOD\HG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�GLVSOD\HG�

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

(UDVH�&KDUDFWHU &KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�WXUQHG�RII�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

(UDVH�LQ�/LQH &KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�WXUQHG�RII�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

(UDVH�LQ�'LVSOD\ &KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�WXUQHG�RII�

/LQHV�FDQ�KDYH�WKHLU�OLQH�W\SHV�UHVHW�WRQRUPDO�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

/LQH�W\SHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

6FUROOLQJ 1HZ�OLQHV�VFUROOLQJ�LQWR�WKH�UHJLRQ�KDYH�D�OLQHW\SH�RI�QRUPDO��WKHLU�FKDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHVWXUQHG�RII��DQG�WKHLU�FKDUDFWHU�FRQWHQWVHUDVHG�

1HZ�FKDUDFWHUV�GLVSOD\HG�LQ�WKH�OLQH�KDYHDWWULEXWHV�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH�6HW�&KDUDFWHU$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

1HZ�OLQHV�VFUROOLQJ�LQWR�WKH�UHJLRQ�KDYH�WKHLUFKDUDFWHU�FRQWHQWV�HUDVHG�EXW�WKHLU�OLQH�W\SHDQG�FKDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�PDWFK�WKRVH�RI�WKHOLQH�WKDW�MXVW�VFUROOHG�RXW�RI�WKH�UHJLRQ�

(UDVH�D�5HJLRQ &KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�WXUQHG�RII�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�HUDVHG�

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

(UDVH�D�7RXFKNH\ &KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�WXUQHG�RII�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

2XWOLQH�D�5HJLRQ &KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

2XWOLQH�D7RXFKNH\

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

&XVWRP�2XWOLQH�D5HJLRQ

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

&XVWRP�2XWOLQH�D.H\

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

5-65

7DEOH������&RPPDQGV�$IIHFWHG�E\�12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1' 23(5$7,21�2)�&200$1'�:+(112&+$1*(�$775,%87(�02'(�,6�5(6(7

�2))�

23(5$7,21�2)�&200$1'�:+(112&+$1*(�$775,%87(�02'(�,6�6(7

�21�

)LOO�5HJLRQ�ZLWK&KDUDFWHU

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

)LOO�7RXFKNH\�ZLWK&KDUDFWHU

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

'UDZ�%DU�IRU�%DU&KDUW

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�FRPPDQG�

&KDUDFWHUV�DUH�UHSODFHG�

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�

� For the color TCS, when nochange attribute mode is reset, commands that erase characters turnoff the highlight, underline, blink, reverse-video, and concealed attributes and fill the erased areausing the currently selected color attributes. When nochange attribute mode is set, thesecommands function exactly as they do on the monochrome TCS.

� (;$03/(6

1) Suppose the operator frequently needs to work some distance from the TCS and could noteasily see normal characters. The following technique could be used to make the displayreadable at greater distances.

a) The host sets each line in the scrolling region to be a double-wide line.

b) Then, the host sets the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode.

c) From this point on, the TCS displays all incoming characters in double-wide format withno further action required by the host. If this technique is used, the host should be sure tosend lines no longer than 40 characters (or set the Auto-Wrap Mode) to ensure that allcharacters are visible.

d) The entire scrolling region retains its double-wide line attributes as new charactersarrive, even with the display scrolling

2) The following sequence illustrates another typical use of the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode:

a) The host sends the Set Character Attributes command to select highlighted characters,then sends the message, "WARNING. . . HEAT RISING." The message is displayed inhighlighted characters.

b) The host sends the Set Character Attributes command to select new character attributes(for example, normal attributes), then sends a less important message for displayelsewhere on the screen, using the new attributes.

c) The host sets the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode.

5-66

d) The host replaces the earlier warning message with the new message, "DANGER...OVER LIMIT." The new message is displayed with the same attributes as the previouswarning message (highlighted).

The host can continue to update the various messages on the screen using their previouscharacter attributes without having to send the Set Character Attributes command each time.

If the host sends a command specifically calling for a change in visual attributes, that commandwill be executed regardless of the state of the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode. Commands that areunaffected by the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode are listed in Table 5-10.

7DEOH�������&RPPDQGV�8QDIIHFWHG�E\�12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH

&200$1' $&7,216�&$86('�5(*$5'/(66�2)�7+(�12&+$1*(�$775,%87(02'(�6(77,1*

6FUHHQ�%DFNJURXQG�0RGH 7KH�FKDUDFWHU�IRUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQG�DSSHDU�UHYHUVHG�IURP�SUHYLRXVVWDWH�

'LVSOD\�1RUPDO�/LQH 7KH�OLQH�W\SH�LV�FKDQJHG�WR�QRUPDO�

'LVSOD\�'RXEOH�:LGWK�/LQH 7KH�OLQH�W\SH�LV�FKDQJHG�WR�GRXEOH�ZLGWK�

'LVSOD\�'RXEOH�6L]H�/LQH 7KH�OLQH�W\SH�LV�FKDQJHG�WR�GRXEOH�VL]H�

3ODFH�'RXEOH�6L]H�/LQH 7KH�OLQH�W\SH�LV�FKDQJHG�WR�GRXEOH�VL]H�

6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV &KDQJHV�FXUUHQW�DWWULEXWHV�VHOHFWHG���1RWH�WKDW�DOWKRXJK�FXUUHQW�DWWULEXWHVDUH�FKDQJHG��WKH�QHZ�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�QRW�XVHG�ZKLOH�12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH0RGH�LV�VHW��6HH��&KDUDFWHUV�VHQW�IRU�GLVSOD\��LQ�7DEOH�����

6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV &KDQJHV�FXUUHQW�DWWULEXWHV�VHOHFWHG�

0RGLI\�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D5HJLRQ

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH�6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHVFRPPDQG�

5HYHUVH�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D5HJLRQ

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�UHYHUVHG�

0RGLI\�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D7RXFKNH\

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�GHWHUPLQHG�E\�WKH�6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHVFRPPDQG�

5HYHUVH�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D7RXFKNH\

&KDUDFWHU�DWWULEXWHV�DUH�UHYHUVHG�

7RXFKNH\�9LVXDO�([WHQW 7KH�YLVXDO�H[WHQW�LV�DXWRPDWLFDOO\�XSGDWHG�DV�VSHFLILHG�ZKHQ�WKH�WRXFKNH\LV�SUHVVHG�

*For the color TCS, when the foreground and background color parameters of the Set CharacterAttributes command are changed locally, the Setup Screen and the screen displayed beforeentering the Setup Screen are repainted with the new colors.

5-67

� 1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGH�&RPPDQG�^)15&`��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The National Replacement Code (NRC) command lets the user or host substitute a designated setof international characters in place of some standard ASCII characters on the display.

This command allows text containing characters unique to one of 11 languages to be displayedand manipulated without a special keyboard or 8-bit codes. Table 5-11 shows the default contentsof the character sets and the characters that are replaced.

The NRC command selects a value for the NRC parameter.

• When the NRC parameter is “off,” 7-bit graphic codes sent from the host are directly mappedto the Standard Character Set.

• When the NRC parameter is set to a country designator, some 7-bit graphic codes sent fromthe host for display are remapped using the National Replacement Code specified by theNRC value.

The NRC selection affects the TCS display only, not the communication between the TCS andhost. International characters are substituted on the display only, not in the codes transmittedbetween the TCS and host.

For example, after setting the NRC value to “German,” the user can create a text file thatcontains standard ASCII characters. When this text file is displayed, the appropriate Germancharacters are displayed. However, if the same file is viewed with the NRC set to “off,” thedisplayed international characters which were peculiar to the German NRC appear as standardASCII symbolic characters; for example, an “a umlaut” (ä) is displayed as a left-brace ({).

NOTE1. A change to the NRC affects only the codes received after the NRC is changed.

2. Which characters the TCS displays depends on the contents of the Extended Character Set. It isrecommended that the Static Special Character Font be mapped into the Extended Character Set whenever

any National Replacement Code is in use. This is the default situation unless the host has issued a MapCharacter Font command involving the Extended Character Set.

� '()$8/7

Off.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the National Replacement Code by entering the Setup Screen and usingtouchkeys or the optional keyboard, setting the NRC parameter to one of the following values:

• off

• Danish

• Dutch

• French

• Canadian

5-68

• Finnish

• German

• Italian

• Spanish

• Swedish

• Swiss

• UK

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> [4 ; <Ps> z

<Ps> is the NRC selective parameter.

If <Ps> NRC is

0 off

1 Danish

2 Dutch

3 French

4 Canadian

5 Finnish

6 German

7 Italian

8 Spanish

9 Swedish

10 Swiss

11 UK

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the Extended Character Set is selected by the Select Character Set command, graphic codeswill be shifted-out to the Extended Character Set and will not be affected by the NRC. The NRConly operates on graphic codes when the Select Character Set command is selecting the StandardCharacter Set.

5-69

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[4;7z

Sets the NRC to Italian.

<ESC>[4z

Sets the NRC to "off". (No replacements are made.)

<ESC>[4;11z

Sets the NRC to UK.

5-70

7DEOH�������1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGH�&KDUDFWHUV

1$7,21$/,7< &+$5$&7(55(&(,9('

&+$5$&7(5',63/$<('

'(6&5,37,21�2)',63/$<('&+$5$&7(5

'DQLVK #@@?ÖC`^_a

bc��hln ¡�

$�XPODXW$�ULQJ$�(�OLJDWXUH2�6ODVK8�XPODXWD�XPODXWD�ULQJD�H�OLJDWXUHR�VODVKX�XPODXW

'XWFK �#>?@^_`a

�ôL�Mò_�¦ó¶

SRXQG�V\PEROIUDFWLRQ����L�M�OLJDWXUHIUDFWLRQ����YHUWLFDO�EDUXPODXW��EDUH�VFULSW�IIUDFWLRQ����VLQJOH�TXRWH

)UHQFK �@>#?`^_a

���joqp��

SRXQG�V\PEROVHFWLRQ�VLJQGHJUHH�VLJQD�JUDYHF�FHGLOODH�JUDYHH�DFXWHX�JUDYHXPODXW��EDUH�

&DQDGLDQ #>?`^@ÖC_a

jkoqprv{��

D�JUDYHD�FLUFXPIOH[F�FHGLOODH�JUDYHH�DFXWHH�FLUFXPIOH[L�FLUFXPIOH[R�FLUFXPIOH[X�JUDYHX�FLUFXPIOH[

5-71

7DEOH�������1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGH�&KDUDFWHUV�FRQWLQXHG

1$7,21$/,7< &+$5$&7(55(&(,9('

&+$5$&7(5',63/$<('

'(6&5,37,21�2)',63/$<('&+$5$&7(5

)LQQLVK >@?Ö^`C_a

bcghlnq|�

$�XPODXW$�ULQJ2�XPODXW8�XPODXWD�XPODXWD�ULQJH�JUDYHR�XPODXWX�XPODXW

*HUPDQ #>?@a^_`

�bgh�l|�

VHFWLRQ�VLJQ$�XPODXW2�XPODXW8�XPODXW*HUPDQD�XPODXWR�XPODXWX�XPODXW

,WDOLDQ �#>a^?`@_C

���ujoqpz�

SRXQG�V\PEROVHFWLRQ�VLJQGHJUHH�VLJQL�JUDYHD�JUDYHF�FHGLOODH�JUDYHH�DFXWHR�JUDYHX�JUDYH

6SDQLVK >�#^@?`_

£���¢fox

LQYHUWHG��SRXQG�V\PEROVHFWLRQ�VLJQGHJUHH�VLJQLQYHUWHG�"1�WLOGHF�FHGLOODQ�WLOGH

5-72

7DEOH��������1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGH�&KDUDFWHUV�FRQWLQXHG

1$7,21$/,7< &+$5$&7(55(&(,9('

&+$5$&7(5',63/$<('

'(6&5,37,21�2)',63/$<('&+$5$&7(5

6ZHGLVK #>@?Ö^`C_a

Êbcghlnq|�

(�JUDYH$�XPODXW$�ULQJ2�XPODXW8�XPODXWD�XPODXWD�ULQJH�JUDYHR�XPODXWX�XPODXW

6ZLVV #^?±>@ÖC_a`

jloqprv{|��

D�JUDYHD�XPODXWF�FHGLOODH�JUDYHH�DFXWHH�FLUFXPIOH[L�FLUFXPIOH[R�FLUFXPIOH[R�XPODXWX�FLUFXPIOH[X�XPODXW

8. � � SRXQG�V\PERO

5-73

� 6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�&RPPDQG�>6*5@��0RQRFKURPH��5HPRWH&RORU��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Set Character Attributes command selects the visual attributes for displayed characters.

Separate parallel areas within memory store characters and their attributes. A convenient visualmodel is to think of the display as being a composite view through translucent planes, as shownin Figure 5-9. The Set Character Attributes command can be thought of as a way to select whichattributes will be active in the attributes plane when upcoming characters are placed in thecharacter plane for display.

)LJXUH�������&RQFHSWXDO�0RGHO��&KDUDFWHUV�DQG�7KHLU�$WWULEXWHV

After the Set Character Attributes command has been sent, new characters displayed by the TCSappear with the selected attributes unless the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set. If scrollingcauses characters to move, the characters’ attributes move with them, regardless of where thecharacters are placed on the screen.

One or more attributes can be changed at a time. Changing an attribute does not turn off the otherattributes already selected. An attribute can be turned on or off individually, or all attributes canbe turned off at once.

The TCS can display characters with the following attributes:

• Highlight

The character is displayed with increased intensity.

Color TCS: Each of the eight basic colors has an associated highlight color which issubstituted for the currently programmed foreground color when the attribute is selected. Thehighlight colors are generally a lighter or brighter version of the basic color.

5-74

• Underline

The character is underlined.

• Blink

The character blinks on or off every second with a 50% duty cycle.

NOTEA 50% duty cycle means the character is "on" half of the time.

• Reverse-Video

The character cell foreground matches the screen background, and the character cell backgroundmatches the screen foreground.

Color TCS: For each character with the reverse-video attribute selected, the foreground coloris replaced with the background color and vice versa.

• Concealed

The character appears blank. Blank means that the character cell foreground is the same as thecharacter cell background. While the concealed attribute is on, the highlight, underline, blink,and reverse-video attributes are temporarily suppressed in the concealed area.

Color TCS: The character cell foreground and background are both displayed in the currentlyprogrammed conceal color, causing concealed characters to disappear. When the concealedattribute is on, the highlight, underline, blink, and reverse-video attributes are temporarilysuppressed in the concealed area.

NOTEEven concealed, the character and its attribute information is stored in screen memory and can be madevisible again by sending the Reverse Character Attributes in a Region command to "undo" the conceal

attribute.

• Foreground Color (color TCS only)

Any of eight basic colors can be selected for the foreground color attribute. The currentlyselected background color is used to display the inactive dot area in each character cell. Thisattribute can be controlled remotely or locally.

• Background Color (color TCS only)

Any of the eight basic colors can be selected for the background color attribute. Thecurrently selected background color is used to display the inactive dot area in each charactercell. This attribute can be controlled remotely or locally.

• Concealed Color (color TCS only)

Any of the eight basic colors can be selected for the conceal color attribute. This single coloris used to fill the foreground and background of all characters that have the conceal attributeturned on. The conceal color should normally be programmed to match the background colorused on most of the screen.

5-75

� '()$8/76

The highlight, underline, blink, reverse-video, and concealed attributes are turned off.

Color TCS: The foreground color is white (37) and the background is black (40). The concealcolor is black (70).

� 23(5$725�86$*(

For the monochrome TCS, this is a remote command only.

Color TCS: Foreground and background color are the only attributes that can be set locally bythe Setup Screen. These attributes are equally controllable by the user and host; each remains setto the value last specified until changed by either the user or host.

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<PS>;...;<PS>m

<Ps> is a selective parameter, designating the character attribute(s).

If <Ps> is 0 or omitted, turn off all attributes.

If <Ps> is 1, highlight.

If <Ps> is 22, turn off highlight.

If <Ps> is 4, underline.

If <Ps> is 24, turn off underline.

If <Ps> is 5, blink.

If <Ps> is 25, turn off blink.

If <Ps> is 7, reverse-video.

If <Ps> is 27, turn off reverse-video.

If <Ps> is 8, conceal.

If <Ps> is 28, turn off conceal.

NOTEThe parameter values can be combined to select multiple character attributes with a single control string

(see examples, below). Invalid selective parameters are ignored.

Color TCS: Table 5-12 shows additional <Ps> values for the Set Character Attributes command.These parameters are valid for the color TCS only.

7DEOH�������&RORU�3DUDPHWHUV�RI�WKH�6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�&RPPDQG

&2/25 )25(*5281' %$&.*5281' &21&($/

%ODFN �� �� ��

5HG �� �� ��

*UHHQ �� �� ��

5-76

7DEOH�������&RORU�3DUDPHWHUV�RI�WKH�6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�&RPPDQG�FRQWLQXHG

&2/25 )25(*5281' %$&.*5281' &21&($/

<HOORZ �� �� ��

%OXH �� �� ��

0DJHQWD �� �� ��

&\DQ �� �� ��

:KLWH �� �� ��

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the host specifies two or more incompatible character attributes in the same control (such asconcealed followed by not concealed), the last character attribute (not concealed) takes effect.

Color TCS: If the user or host sets foreground and background to the same color, textualinformation outside the Setup Screen will not be visible when upcoming characters are placed inthe character plane for display.

If the Save Setup command is executed while the foreground and background are set to the samecolor, the next the TCS is powered up the display will appear blank.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[7;5m

Select reverse-video and blink in addition to any attributes previously selected.

<ESC>[m

Turn off all video attributes. New characters displayed after this command appear normally(all attributes off).

Color TCS:

<ESC>[33;41;5m

Select yellow foreground, red background, and blink attributes.

<ESC>[4;74m

Select the underline attribute and fill all currently existing and upcoming concealed areaswith blue.

5-77

� 6FUROOLQJ�5HJLRQ�&RPPDQG��'(&67%0���5HPRWH�The Scrolling Region command limits scrolling to a portion of the screen.

This feature is useful when one area of the screen must display immobile objects (such as touchtargets) while another area of the screen displays scrolling information.

A scrolling region is designated by specifying the top and bottom lines of the region. Theminimum size of a scrolling region is two lines. When specifying a scrolling region, the linenumber of the top must be less than the line number of the bottom. (Lines on the TCS screen areconsecutively numbered from top to bottom.)

The scrolling region specifies which portion of the screen can scroll and the area within whichrelative cursor movements are limited.

NOTEOnce inside the scrolling region, relative cursor commands cannot cause the cursor to leave the scrolling

region. Only the Move Cursor to Absolute Position command can move the cursor out of the scrollingregion (and then only when Origin Mode is reset). When the Origin Mode is set, the cursor can never leave

the scrolling region, even with a Move Cursor to Absolute Position command. See the discussion of theOrigin Mode command in this chapter.

If a scrolling region is specified while the Origin Mode is reset, the cursor moves to the homeposition (column 1, line 1) of the screen. If a scrolling region is specified while the Origin Modeis set, the cursor moves to the home position of the scrolling region (column I of the top line ofthe scrolling region).

Normally, when a line scrolls out of a scrolling region, its characters disappear, its line typereverts to normal, its character attributes are set to "off", and it reappears as the new line on theother end of the scrolling region. However, if the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set, when aline scrolls out of a scrolling region, only the characters disappear; the line type and characterattributes of the line remain unchanged when the line reappears (as a new line) at the other end ofthe scrolling region. This allows character attributes and line types of each line within a scrollingregion to be preserved throughout scrolling operations.

� '()$8/7

The scrolling region is the full screen.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

5-78

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<Pt>;<Pb>r

<Pt> is a numeric parameter, designating the top line of the scrolling region.

If <Pt> is omitted or 0, the top line of the scrolling region is set to line 1.

<Pb> is a numeric parameter, designating the bottom line of the scrolling region.

If <Pb> is omitted or 0, the bottom line of the scrolling region is set to 24.

NOTEIf <Pb> is less than or equal to <Pt>, the command is ignored.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[5;20r

Changes the scrolling region to be from line 5 through line 20, inclusive.

<ESC>[r

Changes the scrolling region to be the entire screen (line 1 through line 24, inclusive).

5-79

� 2ULJLQ�0RGH�&RPPDQG��'(&20���5HPRWH�The Origin Mode command sets or resets the Origin Mode. The Origin Mode performs threefunctions: it determines whether the lines of the screen are numbered relative to the screen as awhole or relative only to the scrolling region; whether the cursor can be moved out of thescrolling region; and whether the Erase in Display and Region commands affects the entirescreen or only the scrolling region. (Also refer to "Scrolling Region Command" in this chapter.)

When Origin Mode is reset (off):

• Line numbering begins with line 1 at the top of the screen and continues through line 24 atthe bottom of the display.

• The cursor can be moved out of the scrolling region, but only by a Move Cursor to AbsolutePosition command sent by the host. (Refer to Move Cursor to Absolute Position Commandlater in this chapter.)

• The Erase in Display and Region commands affect the entire screen.

• The cursor is moved to the absolute home position of the entire display. The home position isat the upper-left character position of the screen.

5-80

When the Origin Mode is set (on):

• Line numbering begins with line 1 at the top of the scrolling region and continues throughthe bottom of the scrolling region.

• The cursor cannot be moved out of the scrolling region.

• The Erase in Display and Region commands affects the scrolling region.

• The cursor is moved to the home position relative to the scrolling region. The home positionis the upper-left character position within the scrolling region.

When the Origin Mode is set, the scrolling region can, in effect, become a smaller independentscreen within the entire screen. Host software can treat the scrolling region as an independentscreen without regard for those areas outside of the region. This technique is useful when thehost software operating within the scrolling region may not be aware of touch targets drawnabove or below the region. Since erasure and Region commands cannot extend out of thescrolling region, any data or targets previously placed outside the region cannot be modified(unless Origin Mode is explicitly reset).

� '()$8/7

Reset ("off").

5-81

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[?6l

Resets the Origin Mode. (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l", ASCII 6Chex.)

<ESC>[?6h

Sets the Origin Mode.

5-82

� &85625�&200$1'6The Cursor commands determine the appearance and/or location of the cursor. The cursorcommands are:

• Move Cursor to Absolute Position command (Remote)

• Move Cursor to Touchkey command (Remote)

• Move Cursor Forward command (Remote)

• Move Cursor Backward command (Remote)

• Move Cursor Up command (Remote)

• Move Cursor Down command (Remote)

• Next Line command (Remote)

• Index command (Remote)

• Reverse Index command (Remote)

• Read Cursor Position command (Remote)

• Read Character Under Cursor command (Remote)

• Read Attributes Under Cursor command (Remote)

• Cursor Type command (Local/Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebracket [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces{} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC- private commands.

5-83

� 0RYH�&XUVRU�WR�$EVROXWH�3RVLWLRQ�&RPPDQG�>&83@>+93@��5HPRWH�The Move Cursor to Absolute Position command moves the cursor to an absolute characterposition on the screen, specified in lines and columns.

The maximum number of lines is 24. On a normal line, the maximum number of columns is 80;on a double-wide or double-size line, the number of columns is 40.

NOTELines are numbered from top to bottom. Columns are numbered from left to right.

The absolute cursor position can appear at different physical locations on the screen, dependingon whether the Origin Mode is set or reset.

If the Origin Mode is reset:

• The line number specified by this command is relative to the first line of the screen.

• If the Origin Mode is set:

• The line number specified by this command is relative to the first line of the scrolling region.

• The cursor cannot be moved outside the scrolling region with this command. If an attempt ismade to move the cursor to an absolute position outside the scrolling region, the cursor stopsat the edge of the scrolling region.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<P1>;<Pc>H

<Pl> is a numeric parameter, designating a line number.

If <Pl> is 0 or omitted, the cursor moves to the first line.

If <P1> is n (where n is a number between 1 and 24 inclusive), the cursor moves to linen.

If <P1> is greater than 24, the cursor moves to the last line.

<Pc> is the numeric parameter, designating a column number.

If <Pc> is 0 or omitted, the cursor moves to the first column.

If <Pc> is n (where n is a number between 1 and 80), the cursor moves to

column n.

If <Pc> is greater than 80, the cursor moves to the last column.

If <Pc> is greater than 40 and the line is double-width or double-size, the cursor movesto the last column.

5-84

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[H

Moves the cursor home (line 1, column 1).

<ESC>[5;062H

Moves the cursor to line 5, column 62.

<ESC>[24H

Moves the cursor to line 24, column 1.

<ESC>[;30H

Moves the cursor to line 1, column 30.

<ESC>[30H

Moves the cursor to line 24, column 1. (<P1> is greater than 24; therefore, the cursor movesto the last line on the screen.)

5-85

� 0RYH�&XUVRU�WR�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)0&7.`��5HPRWH�The Move Cursor to Touchkey command provides a way to easily position the cursor at aparticular touchkey without specifying character coordinates. Then, using relative cursormovement commands and text display commands, the host can change the visual data at thetouchkey. The command positions the cursor at the upper left character cell within the specifiedtouchkey.

If a touch cell number that is part of a larger touchkey (but not the master cell) is given in thecommand, the cursor goes to the upper left character of the specified touch cell rather than theupper left character of the touchkey. For more details, refer to the discussion of touchkeys inChapter 6.

If the Origin Mode is set, the cursor cannot be moved outside the scrolling region with thiscommand. If an attempt is made to move the cursor to a touchkey whose upper left character cellis outside the scrolling region, the cursor stops at the edge of the scrolling region.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[><Pn>H

<Pn> is a numeric parameter specifying the touchkey number in which to position the cursor.

If <Pn> is 0 or omitted, the cursor is placed in the upper left corner of Touchkey 1 (thehome position).

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[>90H

The cursor moves to the upper left corner of Touchkey 90.

<ESC>[>H

The cursor moves to the upper left corner of Touchkey 1 (the home position).

5-86

� 0RYH�&XUVRU�)RUZDUG�&RPPDQG�>&8)@��5HPRWH�The Move Cursor Forward command is a relative cursor movement command. It moves thecursor forward (towards the right) without affecting its vertical position.

The cursor cannot be moved beyond the right margin of the screen by this command. The cursorremains at the right margin and does not move to another line, even if the Auto Wrap-AroundMode is set ("on").

There are 40 character positions in a double-width or double-size line and 80 in a normal line.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<Pn>C

<Pn> is a numeric parameter, designating the number of characters to move.

If <Pn> is 0 or omitted, the cursor moves forward (right) one character.

If <Pn> is greater than 0, the cursor moves forward (right) <Pn> characters.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If <Pn> is greater than the number of columns to the right of the cursor position, the cursor ismoved only as far as the right margin of the current line. If an attempt is made to move the cursorforward past the right margin of the current line, the cursor does not move to another line.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[C

Moves the cursor forward (right) one character position.

<ESC>[062C

Moves the cursor forward (right) 62 character positions, or to the right margin of the screenif it is less than 62 characters to the margin.

5-87

� 0RYH�&XUVRU�%DFNZDUG�&RPPDQG�>&8%@��5HPRWH�The Move Cursor Backward command is a relative cursor movement command. It moves thecursor backward (left) on the screen without affecting its vertical position.

The cursor cannot be moved beyond the left margin of the current line with this command. Thecursor will not move to the line above it.

There are 40 character positions in a double-width or double-size line and 80 in a normal line.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> [<Pn>D

<Pn> is a numeric parameter, designating the number of characters to move.

If <Pn> is 0 or omitted, the cursor moves backward (left) one character.

If <Pn> is greater than 0, the cursor moves backward (left) <Pn> characters.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If <Pn> is greater than the number of columns to the left of the cursor position, the cursor ismoved only as far as the left margin of the current line. The cursor does not move to another linewhen an attempt is made to move it beyond the left margin of the current line.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[D

Moves the cursor backward (left) one character position.

<ESC>[029D

Moves the cursor backward (left) 29 character positions. If less than 29 character positionsremain to the left margin of the current line, the cursor moves to the left margin of the screenand stops.

5-88

� 0RYH�&XUVRU�8S�&RPPDQG�>&88@��5HPRWH�The Move Cursor Up command is a relative cursor movement command. It moves the cursor upthe screen without affecting its column position.

Once the cursor enters a scrolling region, the cursor cannot be moved outside the scrolling regionwith a relative cursor movement command. The cursor stops at the edge of the scrolling regionand the region is not scrolled. However, if the cursor is already outside the scrolling region, thiscommand can move the cursor until it reaches the top edge of the screen.

When the cursor reaches the top line of the screen, the cursor cannot be moved any farther bythis command. The cursor remains on the top line, and the screen is not scrolled when an attemptis made to move the cursor past the top line.

When the cursor is moved between normal lines and double-width or double-size lines, thecursor moves across the screen horizontally as well as vertically. This is because the cursorfollows character column positions, which are in different physical locations on the screen fornormal and double-width (or double-size) lines. (Double-width and double-size lines are 40columns wide, and normal lines are 80 columns wide.) For example, as the cursor movesbetween column 40 on a double-size line and column 40 on a normal line, the cursor’s physicalposition jumps from the right margin of the screen on the double-size line to the center of thescreen on the normal line.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<Pn>A

<Pn> is numeric parameter, designating the number of lines to move.

If <Pn> is 0 or omitted, the cursor moves up one line.

If <Pn> is greater than 0, the cursor moves up <Pn> lines.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

No scrolling occurs when an attempt is made to move the cursor above the top line of thescrolling region or above the top of the screen.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[A

Moves the cursor up one line.

<ESC>[021A

Moves the cursor up 21 lines. If the cursor was originally less than 21 lines down from thetop of the screen (or scrolling region), the cursor is moved to the top line of the screen (orscrolling region).

5-89

� 0RYH�&XUVRU�'RZQ�&RPPDQG�>&8'@��5HPRWH�The Move Cursor Down command is a relative cursor movement command. It moves the cursordown the screen without affecting its column position.

Once the cursor enters a scrolling region the cursor cannot be moved outside the scrolling regionwith a relative cursor movement command. The cursor stops at the edge of the scrolling regionand the region is not scrolled. However, if the cursor is already outside the scrolling region, theMove Cursor Down command can move the cursor until it reaches the bottom edge of the screen.

When the cursor reaches the bottom line of the screen, the cursor cannot be moved any farther bythis command. The cursor remains on the bottom line and the screen is not scrolled when anattempt is made to move the cursor past the bottom line.

When the cursor is moved between normal lines and double-width or double-size lines, thecursor moves across the screen horizontally as well as vertically. This is because the cursorfollows character column positions, which are in different physical locations on the screen fornormal and double-width (or double-size) lines. (Double-width and double-size lines are 40columns wide, and normal lines are 80 columns wide.) For example, as the cursor movesbetween column 40 on a double-size line and column 40 on a normal line, the cursor’s physicalposition jumps from the right margin of the screen on the double-size line to the center of thescreen on the normal line.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<Pn>B

<Pn> is a numeric parameter, designating the number of lines to move.

If <Pn> is 0 or omitted, the cursor moves down one line.

If <Pn> is greater than 0, the cursor moves down <Pn> lines.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

No scrolling occurs when an attempt is made to move the cursor below the bottom line of thescrolling region or below the bottom of the screen.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[B

Moves the cursor down one line.

<ESC>[021B

Moves the cursor down 21 lines. If the cursor was originally less than 21 lines up from thebottom of the screen (or scrolling region), the cursor moves to the bottom line of the screen(or scrolling region).

5-90

� 1H[W�/LQH�&RPPDQG�>1(/@��5HPRWH�The Next Line command is a relative cursor movement command. It moves the cursor to column1 (the first position) on the next line.

The Next Line command has the following effects:

• If the cursor is on the bottom line of the scrolling region when the command is received, theregion is scrolled up.

• If the scrolling region is the entire screen and the cursor is on the bottom line when thecommand is received, the screen is scrolled up.

• If the cursor is outside the scrolling region when the command is received, the cursor ismoved down one line until it reaches the bottom edge of the screen. Subsequent attempts tomove the cursor beyond the bottom edge of the screen do not move the cursor and do notscroll the screen.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> E

-or-

<NEL> can be used when the host and TCS are communicating using 8 data bits.

Moves the cursor to column 1 of the next line down. If the cursor is already on the bottomline of the scrolling region, this command causes the region to scroll up.

5-91

� ,QGH[�&RPPDQG�>,1'@��5HPRWH�The Index command is a relative cursor movement command. It moves the cursor down one linewithout affecting its column position.

The Index command differs from the Move Cursor Down command in that if the cursor is on thebottom line of the scrolling region when the Index command is sent, the region is scrolled up. (Ifthe scrolling region is the entire screen, the screen is scrolled up.)

If the cursor is outside the scrolling region when this command is sent, the cursor is moved downone line until it reaches the bottom edge of the screen. Subsequent attempts to move the cursorbeyond the bottom edge of the screen are ignored and do not scroll the screen.

When the cursor is moved between normal lines and double-width or double-size lines, thecursor moves across the screen horizontally as well as vertically. This is because the cursorfollows character column positions, which are in different physical locations on the screen fornormal and double-width (or double-size) lines. (Double-width and double-size lines are 40columns wide, and normal lines are 80 columns wide.) For example, as the cursor movesbetween column 40 on a double-size line and column 40 on a normal line, the cursor’s physicalposition jumps from the right margin of the screen on the double-size line to the center of thescreen on the normal line.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>D

-or-

<IND> can be used when the host and TCS are communicating using 8 data bits.

Moves the cursor down one line in the same column. If the cursor is already on the bottomline of the scrolling region, this command causes the region to scroll up.

5-92

� 5HYHUVH�,QGH[�&RPPDQG�>5,@��5HPRWH�The Reverse Index command is a relative cursor movement command. It moves the cursor up oneline without affecting the cursor’s column position.

The Reverse Index command differs from the Move Cursor Up command in that if the cursor ison the top line of the scrolling region when the Reverse Index command is sent, the region isscrolled down. (If the scrolling region is the entire screen, the screen is scrolled down.)

If the cursor is outside the scrolling region when this command is issued, the cursor is moved upone line until it reaches the top edge of the screen. Subsequent attempts to move the cursorbeyond the edge of the screen are prevented and do not scroll the screen.

When the cursor is moved between normal lines and double-width or double-size lines, thecursor moves across the screen horizontally as well as vertically. This is because the cursorfollows character column positions, which are in different physical locations on the screen fornormal and double-width (or double-size) lines. (Double-width and double-size lines are 40columns wide, and normal lines are 80 columns wide.) For example, as the cursor movesbetween column 40 on a double-size line and column 40 on a normal line, the cursor’s physicalposition jumps from the right margin of the screen on the double-size line to the center of thescreen on the normal line.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>M

-or-

<RI> can be used when the host and TCS are communicating using 8 data bits.

Moves the cursor up one line in the same column. If the cursor is already on the top line ofthe scrolling region, this command causes the region to scroll down.

5-93

� 5HDG�&XUVRU�3RVLWLRQ�&RPPDQG�>&35@��5HPRWH�The Read Cursor Position command allows the host to determine the cursor’s position on thescreen.

After receiving the Read Cursor Position command from the host, the TCS reports the verticaland horizontal position of the cursor by responding with a string in the following format:

<ESC>[<P1>;<Pc>R

<P1> is a numeric parameter, designating a line number.

<P1> is a number between 1 and 24 (inclusive). It represents the relative line number ofthe cursor. If the Origin Mode is set, line 1 is at the top of the scrolling region. If OriginMode is reset, line 1 is at the top of the screen.

<Pc> is a numeric parameter, designating a column number.

<Pc> is a number between 1 and 80 (inclusive) for normal lines or a number between 1and 40 (inclusive) for double-width or double-size lines. It represents the charactercolumn occupied by the cursor and properly takes into account double-width columnswhich occur within double-size or double-width lines.

The format of this response string can be changed by the Reporting Format command, which isdiscussed in detail in Chapter 4.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[6n

� (;$03/(

<ESC>[6n

This command requests the TCS to report the cursor position. If the cursor is located halfwaydown and halfway across the screen on a normal line (not double-width or double-size), theTCS responds with:

<ESC>[12,40R

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Please

refer to the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

5-94

� 5HDG�&KDUDFWHU�8QGHU�&XUVRU�&RPPDQG�^)5&8&`��5HPRWH�The Read Character Under Cursor command causes the TCS to identify (for the host) thecharacter under the cursor, in effect, allowing the host to read any character displayed on thescreen.

The uses of this command include:

• Reading the entire screen and sending it to a printer.

• Saving a message that is displayed on the screen, displaying a new message in the same area,and then restoring the previous message.

• Testing the character memory of the TCS remotely.

After receiving the Read Character Under Cursor command from the host, the TCS responds bysending a control string to the host that identifies the character at the current position of thecursor. The control string takes the form:

<ESC>[>3;<Pc>n

<Pc> is the decimal value of the character under the cursor. For example, if <Pc> is 43, aplus ("+") is under the cursor.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

A character may have been displayed in one of two ways:

• The host can send a graphic code directly to the TCS (either as a 7- or 8-bit code or as a 7-bitASCII code shifted to the Extended Character Set with the Select Character Set command).

• The host can designate a National Replacement Code (NRC) and then send a graphic code tothe TCS. The TCS uses the NRC to "translate" the graphic code into the appropriateinternational character on the display.

If the character under the cursor was placed there using a National Replacement Code, thecharacter is reported in the form:

<ESC>[>3;<Pnrc>n

<Pnrc> is the decimal value of the graphic code that was originally sent by the host beforethe code was translated for display as an international character.

(It is the responsibility of the host to ensure that the NRC in effect when this command issent matches the NRC used when the character was originally sent to the TCS.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

5-95

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>3n

� 3266,%/(�(55256

The TCS assumes that the NRC in effect when the Read Character Under Cursor command issent is the same as when the character was originally displayed by the TCS.

If this is not the case, when the Read Character Under Cursor command is received by the TCS,the TCS will return a control string to the host identifying a code that may not match the codeoriginally sent by the host.

For example, assume the German NRC is selected and the host sends the code representing anASCII "{" character that translates into an a umlaut (ä) for display on the screen. Now assume theNRC is changed to Italian. If the Read Character Under Cursor command is sent, the TCS willattempt to find an a umlaut (ä) in the Italian NRC set and reverse map it to the code representingthe original ASCII character. It will not be able to do so and will, therefore, return a stringidentifying the a umlaut (ä) as if it had been placed there without the use of an NRC.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[>3n

Requests the TCS to report the character under the cursor.

If the character is "g" (103 decimal, 67 hex), the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>3;103n

If the character is "e grave" (e) and the current NRC is "Italian", the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>3;125n

NOTE"e grave "(e) maps into "}’, which is represented by the code 7D in hex and 125 in decimal.

If the cursor is over the upper-left corner of Boxtype 2 (1 36 decimal, 88 hex), the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>3;136n

5-96

� 5HDG�$WWULEXWHV�8QGHU�&XUVRU�&RPPDQG�^)5$8&`��5HPRWH�The Read Attributes Under Cursor command allows the host to read the character attributesshown on the screen.

The Read Attributes Under Cursor command is used to:

• Read the entire screen and send it to a printer.

• Save a message displayed on the screen, display a new message in the same area, and thenrestore the previous message.

• Test the attribute memory of the TCS remotely.

After receiving this command, the TCS responds by sending the host the attributes of thecharacter at the current position of the cursor as follows:

Monochrome TCS:

<ESC> [>4 ;<Phi> ;<Pul> ;<Pblink> ;<Prv> ;<Pconcl> n

Color TCS:

<ESC> [>4 ;<Phi> ;<Pul> ;<Pblink> ;<Prv> ;<Pconcl> ;<Pfg> ; <Pbg> ;<Pcc> n

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Please

refer to the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details

<Phi> is the Highlight attribute.

If <Phi> is 1, Highlight is on.

If <Phi> is 22, Highlight is off.

<Pul> is the Underline attribute.

If <Pul> is 4, Underline is on.

If <Pul> is 24, Underline is off.

<Pblink> is the Blink attribute.

If <Pblink> is 5, Blink is on.

If <Pblink> is 25, Blink is off.

<Prv> is the Reverse-Video attribute.

If <Prv> is 7, Reverse-Video is on.

If <Prv> is 27, Reverse-Video is off.

<Pconcl> is the Concealed attribute.

If <Pconcl> is 8, Conceal is on.

If <Pconcl> is 28, Conceal is off.

5-97

The following parameters are valid for the color TCS only. Table 5-13 shows the definitions forthe color attributes.

<Pfg> is the foreground color attribute

<Pbg> is the background color attribute

<Pcc> is the conceal color attribute that shows conceal color activity for the entire screen,regardless of cursor position.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>4n

Requests the TCS to report the attributes of the character at the current cursor location.

� (;$03/(

The host requests the TCS to report the attributes under the cursor by sending:

<ESC>[>4n

Monochrome TCS: If the character under the cursor is normally blinking, but is temporarilyconcealed, the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>4;22;24;5;27;8n

Color TCS: If the character under the cursor is displayed blinking, with red foreground and blackbackground and the conceal color is blue, the TCS responds:

<ESC>[>4;22;24;5;27;28;31;40;74n

The conceal color is always reported even if the character under the cursor is notcurrently concealed.

7DEOH�������&RORU�$WWULEXWH�'HILQLWLRQV��� � �'HIDXOW�

&2/25 �3IJ! �3EJ! �3FF!

%ODFN �� �� ��

5HG �� �� ��

*UHHQ �� �� ��

<HOORZ �� �� ��

%OXH �� �� ��

0DJHQWD �� �� ��

&\DQ �� �� ��

:KLWH �� �� ��

5-98

� &XUVRU�7\SH�&RPPDQG�>)&7@��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Cursor Type command selects one of the following types of cursors:

• Non-Blinking, Reverse-Video Block

The cursor appears as a reverse-video, full character cell block and does not blink.

• Slow-Blinking, Reverse-Video Block

The cursor appears as a full character cell block and blinks every second with a 50% dutycycle.

NOTEA 50% duty cycle means that the cursor is "on" half of the time.

• Fast-Blinking Reverse-Video Block

The cursor appears as a full-character cell block and blinks every 0.5 seconds with a 50%duty cycle.

• Non-Blinking Underline

The cursor appears as an underline and does not blink.

• Slow-Blinking Underline

The cursor appears as an underline and blinks every second with a 50% duty cycle.

• Fast-Blinking Underline

The cursor appears as an underline and blinks every 0.5 with a 50% duty cycle.

• Invisible

The cursor is not visible.

� '()$8/7

Slow-blinking reverse-video block.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the cursor type by entering the Setup Screen and, using touchkeys or theoptional keyboard, setting the Cursor Type parameter to the desired cursor type.

When the Cursor Type is changed by the user through the Setup Screen, the cursor itself isdisplayed as the parameter’s value in the Parameter List Area of the Setup Screen. The displayedcursor type changes immediately when the cursor type is changed.

5-99

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[<Ps>;...;<Ps>v

<Ps> is a selective parameter, designating a cursor type.

If <Ps> is 0 or omitted, the previous cursor type is made visible. If <Ps> is 1, the currentcursor type is made invisible.

If <Ps> is 2, the cursor is an underline.

If <Ps> is 3, the cursor is a reverse-video block.

If <Ps> is 4, the cursor is non-blinking.

If <Ps> is 5, the cursor is slow-blinking.

If <Ps> is 6, the cursor is fast-blinking.

NOTEThe parameter values can be combined to select multiple cursor attributes with a single control string (see

examples, below). Invalid selective parameters are ignored.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the host asks for two or more incompatible cursor characteristics in the same control string(such as underline followed by reverse-video block), the last cursor characteristic (reverse-videoblock) takes precedence.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[3v

Selects the reverse-video block cursor. The cursor blinks at the same rate as the previouscursor. The cursor is invisible if the previous cursor was invisible.

<ESC>[2;4;0v

Selects the underline cursor and makes it non-blinking and visible.

<ESC>[4;6v

Makes the cursor fast-blinking. The fast-blinking characteristic takes precedence over thenon-blinking characteristic because it is the last cursor characteristic in the control string.(This example has no practical use, but shows how conflicting requests are resolved by theTCS.)

5-100

� 6&5((1�$33($5$1&(�&200$1'6The Screen Appearance commands affect the appearance of the entire screen. The ScreenAppearance commands are:

• Screen Background Mode command (Local/Remote)

• Display Activity command (Local/Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in brace {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-private commands.

5-101

� 6FUHHQ�%DFNJURXQG�0RGH�&RPPDQG��'(&6&10���/RFDO�5HPRWH�Monochrome TCS: The Screen Background Mode command sets or resets the ScreenBackground Mode, which determines whether the background of the screen is dark or light.

• When the Screen Background Mode is set ("reverse"), the background of each character(without reverse-video attributes) is lit and the foreground is unlit. This creates a litbackground with dark characters.

• When the Screen Background Mode is set ("reverse"), the background of each character(without reverse-video attributes) is lit and the foreground is unlit. This creates a litbackground.

Color TCS: When the Screen Background Mode is reset, the foreground of each character(without reverse-video attributes) is displayed in the currently selected foreground color and thebackground in the currently selected background color.

• When the Screen Background Mode is set, the foreground of each character (without reverse-video attributes) is displayed in the currently selected background color and the backgroundin the currently selected foreground color.

• Foreground and background colors are selected with the Set Character Attributes command.

The above descriptions assume that the reverse-video attribute is not in effect. For characters withthe reverse-video attribute in effect (selected with the Set Character Attributes command), settingScreen Background Mode reverses the character cell foreground / background relationship.

Changes in the Screen Background Mode take affect immediately, whether the command isissued locally from the Setup Screen (by the user) or remotely (by a control string from the host).

� '()$8/7

Reset. (Normal video.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user selects the screen background by entering the Setup Screen and, using touchkeys or theoptional keyboard, setting the Background parameter to the one of the following values:

• "normal" (reset)

• "reverse" (set)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[?5l

Resets the background to "normal". (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l",ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[?5h

Sets background to "reverse".

5-102

� 'LVSOD\�$FWLYLW\�&RPPDQG�^)'$`��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Display Activity command turns the display on or off, or programs an automatic timeout (thescreen is automatically turned off) following periods of inactivity.

CAUTIONSetting Display Activity off then saving the Setup Screen is a relatively common source of confusion for new TCS

operators. The Setup Screen is always available regardless of the setting of Display Activity, so in case a darkscreen makes the TCS appear inoperative, be sure to check the setting.

The automatic timeout is a feature that turns off the display during periods of inactivity longerthan 30 minutes, thereby extending the life of the phosphor on the display.

• When the display activity is set to "on", the display stays lit (even during extended periods ofinactivity).

• When the display activity is set to "off", the screen is turned off. Even though the displayappears blank, data continues to be processed normally by the TCS just as if the display wereturned on. The display remains off, even if there is user or host activity, until the displayactivity is changed to "on" or "timeout", or the Setup Screen is entered.

NOTERegardless of the display activity setting, the screen always turns on when the Setup Screen is entered.

• When the display activity is set to "timeout", the display turns off if 30 minutes elapsewithout user or host activity. After the display has timed out, any activity by the user or hostcauses the display to turn back on. For example, the screen turns back on if the user pressesthe any key or touches the touch panel, or if the host sends a character or command.

After timeout has occurred, the first user activity sensed by the TCS (including activation of theSetup Screen) turns on the screen and starts a new timeout cycle, but the TCS does not interpretthis activity as a command to be sent to the host. For example, if the user wants to transmit thespace character to the host after the display has timed out, he must press any key or touch thedisplay, then press the space bar. However, the first activity from the host after a timeout hasoccurred causes the screen to turn on and is interpreted as a command. If the user activity occurson a portion of the TCS that is locked out, then the screen is not turned on after a timeout hasoccurred. The touch panel, keyboard, or Setup Screen can be locked by Remote commands.

NOTEIf display activity is set to "off" and saved with a Save Setup, the next time power is applied to the TCS, the

TCS starts up with the screen off

� '()$8/7

On.

5-103

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user sets the display activity by entering the Setup Screen and, using touchkeys or theoptional keyboard, setting the Display Activity parameter to one of the following values:

• on

• off

• timeout

The display activity setting does not take effect until the Setup Screen is exited.

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[3;<Ps>z

<Ps> is a selective parameter, designating the Display Activity.

If <Ps> is 0 or omitted, Display Activity is set "on".

If <Ps> is 1, Display Activity is set "off".

If <Ps> is 2, Display Activity is set to "timeout".

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[3z

Turns the display on immediately.

<ESC>[3;1z

Turns the display off immediately.

<ESC>[3;2z

Enables automatic timeout of the display after 30 minutes of inactivity.

6-1

&+$37(5�����352*5$00,1*�7+(�728&+�3$1(/

� ,1752'8&7,21This chapter describes how to create touchkeys on the Touch Control Screen (TCS). Topicsinclude:

• The touch panel

• Touch reporting

• The commands used to create touchkeys and touch targets

For ease of reference, the commands are divided into two groups, consisting of functionallyrelated commands:

• Panel Commands

• Region Commands

Appendix A includes a sample touch panel program.

� 7+(�728&+�3$1(/The transparent touch panel is the key feature of the TCS that allows the user to communicatewith the host simply by touching labeled, touch-sensitive blocks on the display.

The programmer creates each touch-sensitive block and defines its function in the host program.The user then touches the block to make a menu selection, control a process, or direct theoperation of a program.

� 7RXFK�&HOOVThe touch panel consists of a thin, transparent, flexible switch matrix affixed to the front of theTCS display. The switch matrix contains 120 individual switches called touch cells. The touchcells are activated (closed) at the touch of a fingertip (or other soft object).

The 120 touch cells are arranged in a grid 10 columns wide by 12 rows high. Each touch cellcovers an area 8 characters wide by 2 characters high and is identified by a unique number thatthe TCS can report to the host when the touch cell is touched. Touch cell numbers allow the hostto respond appropriately to touch cell reports from the TCS. Figure 6-1 shows the touch cellnumber assignments.

6-2

)LJXUH������7RXFK�&HOO�1XPEHU�$VVLJQPHQWV

� 7RXFKNH\V�DQG�7RXFK�7DUJHWVThe host application program can incorporate touch cells into units called touchkeys. A touchkeycan consist of a single touch cell or a group of cells that function as if they were a single touchcell.

To show the TCS operator exactly where on the screen a touchkey is located, and what functionit performs, touchkeys are usually defined in conjunction with visual targets called touch targets.Touch targets are usually outlined and labeled. Touchkeys are usually defined to include as manytouch cells as necessary to cover the touch target.

The advantage of using touchkeys that consist of multiple touch cells is they allow for anenlarged target. This eliminates the difficulty of trying to touch a single touch cell, and greatlyreduces the chance of parallax error.

Touchkeys that contain more than one touch cell are defined with the Build Touchkey command.Their attributes and reporting reflect that of the upper left touch cell of the group, called themaster cell. When the user presses any touch cell within the touchkey, the TCS uses theattributes of the master cell to determine what action to take.

Figure 6-2 shows a touch target for a touchkey composed of four touch cells.

6-3

)LJXUH������([DPSOH�7RXFKNH\

Depending on the number of touch cells that have been grouped together, the term touchkey canrefer to a single touch-sensitive area as large as the entire display or as small as a single touchcell.

� 7RXFKNH\�9LVXDO�([WHQWMany applications need to be able to easily change the visual contents of the character cellswithin a touchkey. Depending on the application requirements, slightly different areas within atouchkey need to be affected by changes. To help simplify the programming tasks associatedwith this type of operation, the TCS features the following visual regions within a touchkey:

• Border: The border is the portion of the touchkey composed of only the character cells on theperimeter of the physical boundaries of the touchkey. This area appears as an unfilledrectangle, except in one case. A single-height touchkey is only one touch cell (twocharacters) high. Therefore, the entire contents of a single-height touchkey are the border.

• Inner: The inner part of a touchkey is the entire area within the physical boundaries of thetouchkey except for the border. This area appears as a solid rectangle. Since a single-heighttouchkey is only two characters high, the entire touchkey is the inner portion.

• All: The entire area within the physical boundaries of the touchkey, including both theborder and inner areas.

A touchkey that is two touch cells high and a single touch cell wide has visual regions as shownin Figure 6-3.

6-4

)LJXUH������7RXFKNH\�9LVXDO�([WHQW

6-5

� 728&+�5(3257,1*The touch panel is divided into 12 rows and 10 columns of individual touch cells, one or more ofwhich can form a single touchkey. (See Figure 6-1.) Each touchkey has a unique numeric valuedetermined by the master cell in its upper left corner, which the TCS reports to the host. TheTCS can send touch reports either spontaneously (whenever a touchkey is touched) or only whenthe TCS is polled for a response (using the Polled Touch Mode).

Normally, the TCS spontaneously sends a touch report to the host whenever a touchkey istouched. However, when the host is busy or has particularly slow input/output service, it may beadvantageous to operate the touch panel in the Polled Touch Mode. In the Polled Touch Mode,the TCS sends the host a touch report only when the host requests (polls) the TCS to do so. Thislessens the burden on the host and minimizes the possibility of data overruns and lost characters.The Polled Touch Mode is fully documented later in this chapter.

In either case, the TCS sends each touch report in the following format:

<ESC>[>2;<Pk>n

<Pk> is a three-digit, zero-filled ASCII numeric string (000 through 120, inclusive) thatrepresents the number of the touchkey.

For example, if the user activates touchkey number 81, the following report is sent to the host:

<ESC>[>2;081n

NOTEThe TCS supports several touch reporting controls and formats. The host can select the touch report

introducers or terminator by using the Reporting Format command described in Chapter 4. The host canget more information about a touchkey by using the Extended Report Mode command, described later in

this chapter.

6-6

� 728&+�3$1(/�&200$1'6The Touch Panel commands control the operation of the touch panel. The Touch Panelcommands are:

• Build Touchkey command (Remote)

• Clear Touchkey command (Remote)

• Touchkey Type command (Remote)

• Touchkey Visual Extent command (Remote)

• Touchkey Audible Attribute command (Remote)

• Auto-Repeat Rate command (Remote)

• Polled Touch Mode command (Remote)

• Read Touchkey Status command (Remote)

• Extended Report Mode command (Remote)

• Touch Panel Lockout Mode command (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in brace {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-private commands.

6-7

� %XLOG�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)%7.`��5HPRWH�The Build Touchkey command groups touch cells together into a single rectangular touchkey.Building touchkeys provides an easy way to handle larger portions of the touch panel as singletouch-sensitive areas, and eliminates the programming overhead associated with translating andhandling individual touch cells.

The built touchkey takes on the attributes and reporting identification of the touch cell in itsupper left corner (the master cell). If any touch cell is touched within the touchkey, the entiretouchkey responds with the attributes programmed for the master cell (ignoring the individualattributes of the touch cell pressed), including generating a touch report with the master cell’snumber.

Once a touchkey is built, the host refers to it solely by its master cell number. The touchkey actsas a single unit until a Clear Touchkey command is issued. Any modification of the attributes oftouch cells (other than the master cell) within the touchkey has no effect on operation of thetouchkey. Only the master cell attributes affect operation of the touchkey.

After a Clear Touchkey command is issued, the touch cells that made it up revert to operating ina manner consistent with their individual attributes as last programmed by the host. Thisprogramming of individual touch cells could even have occurred while the touch cells were partof the larger touchkey.

Any commands that can be applied to individual touch cells can also be applied to touchkeys. Asfar as the host is concerned, there is no operational distinction made between touch cells andtouchkeys except for their potential size differences.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[5;<Pk>;<Ph>;<Pw>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the master cell within the touchkey to be built(the upper left touch cell).

If <Pk> is omitted or 0, clears all touchkeys.

<Ph> is a numeric parameter that specifies the height of the touchkey in touch cell units.

If <Ph> is 0 or omitted, height is l.

If <Ph> is greater than 12, height is 12.

<Pw> is a numeric parameter that specifies the width of the touchkey in touch cell units.

If <Pw> is 0 or omitted, width is l.

If <Pw> is greater than 10, width is 10.

CAUTIONIssuing a Build Touchkey command with all parameters set to zero or with all parameters missing constitutes a Clear

Touchkey command, and will CLEAR ALL TOUCHKEYS. Refer to the Clear Touchkey command for details.

6-8

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the host attempts to build a touchkey that overlaps an already existing touchkey, the previoustouchkey is cleared before the new one is built.

Omitting <Pw> and <Ph> or setting them both to 1 in this command constitutes a ClearTouchkey command.

If this command changes a touchkey that is currently being pressed and a visual response is inprogress for the touchkey, the visual response is prematurely terminated.

If this command changes a touchkey that is currently being pressed and the touchkey is auto-repeating, auto-repeating is terminated.

If this command changes a toggle touchkey that is toggled on, the touchkey is toggled off and thevisual state of the touchkey is set to off.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[5;21;3u

Builds a touchkey 3 touch cells high by 1 touch cell wide at master cell 21.

<ESC>[5;6;10;4u

Builds a touchkey 10 touch cells high by 4 touch cells wide at master cell 6.

<ESC>[5;47u

Builds a l by l touchkey at master cell 47. This command effectively clears any largertouchkey at master cell 47, since a 1 by 1 touchkey is the same as a single touch cell.

<ESC>[5u

Clears all touchkeys.

6-9

� &OHDU�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)&7.`�5HPRWH�The Clear Touchkey command reverses the effect of a previous Build Touchkey command.

While touch cells are grouped as a larger touchkey, changing the attributes of the touchkey onlyaffects the attributes stored at the master cell. All other touch cells retain their unique attributes,which are temporarily ignored while they are grouped as the touchkey. When the Clear Touchkeycommand clears the touchkey, the individual touch cells resume operation as specified by theirindividual attributes.

The Clear Touchkey command does not automatically undo any visual effect related to thetouchkey. For example, if a border was placed around a touchkey with the Outline a Touchkeycommand, use the Erase a Touchkey command to remove the border before clearing thetouchkey.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[5;<Pk>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey to be cleared.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, all touchkeys are cleared.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Touchkeys are cleared only if the Clear Touchkey command specifies the master cell. The TCSignores any request to clear other cells within the touchkey.

If this command changes a touchkey that is currently being pressed and a visual response is inprogress for the touchkey, the visual response is prematurely terminated.

If this command changes a touchkey that is currently being pressed and the touchkey is auto-repeating, then auto-repeating is terminated.

If this command changes a toggle touchkey that is toggled on, the touchkey is toggled off and thevisual state of the touchkey is set to off.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[5u

Clears all touchkeys.

<ESC>[5;0u

Clears all touchkeys.

<ESC>[5;47u

Clears touchkey with master cell 47.

6-10

� 7RXFKNH\�7\SH�&RPPDQG�^)7.7`�5HPRWH�The Touchkey Type command specifies how the TCS controls a touchkey. Each type can take onone of the following values:

• Dead: The touchkey does not generate a touch report when touched. A touchkeyprogrammed as dead acts as if there were no touch-sensitive area at its location.

• Press: The touchkey generates a single report whenever it is pressed.

• Press and Release: The host can detect touchkey presses and releases if extended reportingmode is enabled. This allows an operation to remain enabled for the duration of the touchkeypress and disabled when the touchkey is released.

• Auto-Repeat: The touchkey generates a report when it is initially pressed. If continuouslypressed for more than 1/2 second and the auto-repeat rate is not disabled, reports aregenerated at the auto-repeat rate set by the host until the touchkey is released. If the auto-repeat rate is disabled, an auto-repeat touchkey acts like a press touchkey.

• Toggle: The touchkey generates a report whenever it is pressed. If Extended Report Mode isset, the touch report indicates that the touchkey is either toggled on or off. The initial state ofthe touchkey is off. After the first press, the touchkey is on. Each subsequent press alternatesthe touchkey between off and on. See the Extended Report Mode command for details.

The touchkey type also determines how other attributes of a touchkey are handled when thetouchkey is activated. For example, the Touchkey Visual Extent command is affected bytouchkey type.

� '()$8/7

All touchkeys are auto-repeat.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[4;<Pk>;<Pt>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey whose type is to be assigned.

If <Pk> is omitted or 0, all touchkeys are set to the specified type.

<Pt> is a selective parameter that specifies the type to be assigned to the touchkey.

If <Pt> is omitted or 0, the touchkey type is dead.

If <Pt> is 1, the touchkey type is press.

If <Pt> is 2, the touchkey type is auto-repeat.

If <Pt> is 3, the touchkey type is toggle.

If <Pt> is 4, the touchkey type is press and release.

6-11

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the type of the touchkey that is currently being pressed is changed and a visual response is inprogress for the touchkey, the visual response is prematurely terminated.

If the type of the touchkey that is currently being pressed is changed and the key was auto-repeating, auto-repeating is terminated.

If the Touchkey Type command causes an existing toggle touchkey to be changed to a new typeand the toggle touchkey was on, the toggle state and the visual representation of the toggle stateare both set to off.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[4u

<ESC>[4;0;0;u

These are equivalent commands. When both parameters are set to zero or omitted, alltouchkeys are set to dead. Either command disables the touch panel.

<ESC>[4;0;3u

Sets all touchkeys to toggle.

<ESC>[4;45,1u

Sets Touchkey 45 to press.

6-12

� 7RXFKNH\�9LVXDO�([WHQW�&RPPDQG�^)7.9(-`�5HPRWH�The Touchkey Visual Extent command specifies the portion of a touchkey that automaticallyresponds visually when activated by the user. Each visual extent can take on one of the followingvalues:

• Border: The border is the portion of the touchkey composed only of the character cells onthe perimeter of the physical boundaries of the touchkey. This area appears as an unfilledrectangle, except in the case of a single-height touchkey. A single-height touchkey is onlytwo characters high, so the entire touchkey contents are the border.

• Inner: The inner part of a touchkey is the entire area within the physical boundaries of thetouchkey except for the border. This area appears as a solid rectangle. Since a single-heighttouchkey is only two characters high, the entire touchkey is the inner portion.

• All: The entire area within the physical boundaries of the touchkey, including both theborder and inner areas.

• None: None of the character cells within the physical boundaries of the touchkey respondsvisually when activated.

The automatic visual response interacts with the touchkey types as follows:

• Dead: There is no automatic visual response, regardless of the visual extent value.

• Press: The area of the touchkey specified by the visual extent reverses its video and staysreversed until the touchkey is released.

• Auto-repeat: The area of the touchkey specified by the visual extent reverses its video andstays reversed until the touchkey is released.

• Toggle: The area of the touchkey specified by the visual extent reverses its video when thetouchkey is pressed and a touch report is sent to the host. The touchkey stays reversed untilthe touchkey is pressed again and another touch report is sent to the host. Each time thetouchkey is pressed and a touch report is sent to the host, the touchkey alternates its visualstate. When the touchkey is in the off state, the area of the touchkey specified by the visualextent appears as set by the host. When the touchkey is in the on state, the area of thetouchkey specified by the visual extent appears in reverse video from that set by the host.

The automatic visual response is intimately tied to the touch report sent to the host. If the TCSoutput buffer is so full that a touch report cannot be sent to the host, automatic visual responsedoes not occur. An automatic visual response occurs only when a touch report fits in the outputbuffer and will eventually be sent to the host. This guarantees the user is given immediatefeedback only when the host is guaranteed to be notified of the change in the state of thetouchkey.

� '()$8/7

The visual extents of all touchkeys are set to none.

6-13

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[3;<Pk>;<Pv>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey whose visual extent is to beassigned.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, the visual extents of all touchkeys are set as specified in thiscommand.

<Pv> is a selective parameter that indicates the visual extent to be assigned to the touchkey.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, no characters in the touchkey respond visually.

If <Pv> is 1, only the inner characters respond visually.

If <Pv> is 2, only the border characters respond visually.

If <Pv> is 3, all characters in the touchkey respond visually.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

The host should not explicitly change any attributes of characters within press, auto-repeat, ortoggle touchkeys having automatic visual response by the TCS. If the host changes any of theseattributes, the automatic visual response is affected.

If the visual extent for a press or auto-repeat touchkey is changed after the touchkey is pressed,but before it is released, the visual extent in effect when the touchkey was pressed is used whenthe touchkey is released. Subsequent touchkey presses will use the new visual extent.

If the visual extent for a toggle touchkey is changed while the touchkey is on, the next press willuse the new visual extent, turning the toggle touchkey off. Unwanted visual effects can occur ifthe visual extent for a toggle touchkey is changed while the touchkey is on.

Undesirable visual effects may result if this command is used for a touchkey that contains amixture of line types.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[3u

Sets all touchkey’s visual extent to none.

<ESC>[3;0;2u

Sets all touchkey’s visual extent to border.

<ESC>[3;45;1u

Sets the visual extent of Touchkey 45 to inner.

6-14

� 7RXFKNH\�$XGLEOH�$WWULEXWH�&RPPDQG�^)7.$$`�5HPRWH�The Touchkey Audible Attribute command specifies whether the TCS beeps when a touchkey isactivated by the user. Each touchkey can be assigned one of two audible attributes:

• Silent: The TCS does not beep when the touchkey specified within this command is touched.

• Beep: The TCS automatically beeps in accordance with the touchkey type whenever thetouchkey is touched.

The automatic beep interacts with the touchkey types attributes as follows:

• Dead: No automatic beep is generated, regardless of audible attribute.

• Press: An automatic beep is generated whenever the touchkey is pressed and a touch report issent to the host.

• Auto-Repeat: An automatic beep is generated when the touchkey is initially pressed and atouch report is sent to the host. If the touchkey is held beyond the initial delay and beginsauto-repeating, each time the touchkey auto-repeats and a report is sent to the host, anautomatic beep is generated.

• Toggle: An automatic beep is generated whenever the touchkey is pressed and a touch reportis sent to the host.

NOTEIf the Touchkey Audible Attribute is set to beep and if auto-repeating is enabled and an auto-repeattouchkey is held beyond an initial delay, the TCS beeps at the auto-repeat rate until the touchkey is

released.

If the TCS is in the Polled Touch Mode and the Touchkey Audible Attribute is set to beep, the TCS beepsimmediately when a press, auto-repeat, or toggle touchkey is touched. However, the TCS does not beep if

the TCS has already queued a touch report that the host has not yet read.

� '()$8/7

Beep.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

6-15

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[1;<Ps>;<Pk>u

<Ps> is a selective parameter that specifies the audible attribute being assigned to thetouchkey.

If <Ps> is 0 or omitted, the audible attribute is silent.

If <Ps> is 1, the audible attribute is beep.

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey whose audible attribute is beingassigned.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, the audible attribute of all touchkeys is specified.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[1u

Sets the audible attribute of all touchkeys to silent.

<ESC>[1;0;1u

Sets the audible attribute of Touchkey 1 to silent.

<ESC>[1;1;45u

Sets the audible attribute of Touchkey 45 to beep.

6-16

� $XWR�5HSHDW�5DWH�&RPPDQG�^)$55`��5HPRWH�The Auto-Repeat Rate command allows the host to set the auto-repeat rate for touchkeyreporting.

The auto-repeat rate is the rate at which touch reports are sent (or made available) to the hostwhen a touchkey is pressed continuously. The auto-repeat rate can be any value from 0 (off)through 25.5 seconds.

The effect of this command is determined by the setting of the Polled Touch Mode:

• If the Polled Touch Mode is reset and a touchkey is pressed continuously, the auto-repeatrate is the rate at which the TCS spontaneously sends touch reports to the host.

• If the Polled Touch Mode is set and a touchkey is pressed continuously, the auto-repeat rateis limited by the rate at which the host requests (polls) the TCS to send touch reports.

When a touchkey is first pressed, there is a 1/2-second delay before the auto-repeat rate takeseffect. The auto-repeat rate then stays in effect as long as the touchkey is pressed.

NOTEIf the user continues to press the touchkey after the Clear User Inputs command is received, a touch report

will be generated for the touchkey as if it had been pressed for the first time. See the description of theClear User Inputs command, in Chapter 4.

� '()$8/7

0 (off)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[2;<Pn>u

<Pn> is a numeric parameter (from 0 through 255)that specifies the delay (in tenths ofseconds) between automatic repetitions.

If <Pn> is 0 or omitted, auto-repeating is disabled.

If <Pn> is 1 through 255, the auto-repeat rate is set to <Pn> multiplied by 0.1 seconds(0.1 through 25.5 seconds).

6-17

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[2;3u

The auto-repeat rate is set to 0.3 seconds.

<ESC> [2;100u

The auto-repeat rate is set to 10 seconds.

<ESC>[2u

Auto-repeating is disabled.

6-18

� 3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�&RPPDQG�^)370`��5HPRWH�The Polled Touch Mode command selects the Polled Touch Mode, which causes the TCS toreport touchkey closures only when requested (polled) by the host.

The Polled Touch Mode prevents data overruns and lost characters when the TCS is used with ahost that has a slow I/O response. The Polled Touch Mode is also useful when it is undesirablefor the host to use interrupt processing.

The Polled Touch Mode is used in conjunction with the Read Touchkey Status command, whichthe host sends to request a touch report. That command is described later in this chapter.

• When the Polled Touch Mode is reset, the TCS spontaneously sends a touch report to thehost whenever the user touches a touchkey.

• When the Polled Touch Mode is set, the TCS queues one and only one touch report when theuser touches a touchkey. The TCS sends the report to the host only when the host sends theRead Touchkey Status command. If multiple touchkeys are touched before the host polls theTCS for a report, the TCS queues a touch report only for the first touch; the TCS ignores allother touches, which are in effect locked out.

NOTEIf the TCS receives a Read Touchkey Status command and the user has not touched a touchkey since the

previous Read Touchkey Status command was received, the TCS reports a touchkey number of 000.

If the Touchkey Audible Attribute is set for the touchkey, the TCS beeps immediately when thetouchkey is touched. However, if the TCS has already queued a touch report and is waiting tosend the report to the host, additional touches are ignored and do not cause any visual or audiblefeedback.

An auto-repeat rate can be set when the TCS is operating in the Polled Touch Mode. However,the rate of auto-repeating can be limited by the frequency of the host’s requests for reports. (Seethe discussion under "Auto-Repeat Rate Command.") If the host requests touch reports rapidlyenough, the TCS responds at the same auto-repeat rate regardless of whether the Polled TouchMode is set or reset.

The TCS takes special action regarding touch activity when the host sends a Build Touchkey,Clear Touchkey, Touchkey Type, or Copy Screen command that affects the Displayed Screen.The host must take these actions into account if Polled Touch Mode is set and the host has notcaught up with touchkey input. For details, see the descriptions of each of these commands.

� '()$8/7

Reset. (Polled Touch Mode is off.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

6-19

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>1l

Resets Polled Touch Mode (to off). (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l,"ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[>1h

Sets Polled Touch Mode (to on).

6-20

� 5HDG�7RXFKNH\�6WDWXV�&RPPDQG�^)57.6`��5HPRWH�The Read Touchkey Status command requests the TCS to send a touch report for the lasttouchkey touched but not yet reported. This command is used when the TCS is operating in thePolled Touch Mode (when the Polled Touch Mode is set to on). Specifically, the Read TouchkeyStatus command allows the host to:

• Accept the next touch report when operating in Polled Touch Mode

• Read the current state of a toggle touchkey to see if it is on or off

When the TCS receives the Read Touchkey Status command, the TCS sends a report to the host.If the Extended Report Mode is set, the touch report is sent in extended format and includes thetouchkey’s toggle state. See the Touchkey Type command for a description of the toggletouchkey type.

If Extended Report Mode is reset, the TCS responds to this command in the following format:

<ESC>[>2;<Pk>n

If Extended Report Mode is set, the TCS responds to this command in the following format:

<ESC>[>2;<Pk>;<Ps>n

See the Extended Report Mode command description for details of the use of Extended ReportMode.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

The touchkey whose status is to be read, can be any of the following:

• Touchkey number 000

This requests that the touch report associated with the next touchkey be returned duringPolled Touch Mode operation. This is how the host polls the TCS for the next touchkeyactivated.

The touch report in this situation may also return Touchkey 000, which indicates there are nomore touch reports waiting to be polled by the host.

• The touchkey number of a toggle touchkey

The host can read the status of any toggle touchkey and determine whether the touchkey ison or off. The Extended Report Mode must be set for this additional information to beincluded in the touch report.

• The touchkey number of a non-toggle touchkey

The status of any non-toggling touchkey is off. Reading the status of non-toggling touchkeysserves no useful purpose. If the toggle state of a touch cell within a toggle touchkey isrequested, the touch report sent to the host reflects the toggle state of the master cell. This

6-21

means that no matter what touch cell is pressed within a toggle touchkey, the toggle state isaltered for the master cell. Only a single toggle state exists for any touchkey.

• The touchkey number of a press and release touch key

The host can read the status of any toggle touchkey and determine whether the touchkey iscurrently pressed or released. The Extended Report Mode must be set for this additionalinformation to be included in the touch report.

When not operating in Polled Touch Mode, this command provides useful information onlywhen the Extended Report Mode is set and touchkey numbers that are toggle type are sent bythe host.

NOTEWhen the Polled Touch Mode is set (on), the TCS queues one and only one touch cell report when the useractivates a touchkey. If multiple touchkeys are touched before the host polls the TCS for a report, the TCSqueues a touch report only for the first touch; the TCS ignores all other touches, which are in effect locked

out.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>2;<Pk>n

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the number of the touchkey whose status is to bereported.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, send the next touch report when operating in Polled TouchMode.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Requesting a status report from Touchkey 000 while not operating in Polled Touch Mode alwaysresults in a response of Touchkey 000, indicating that there are no touch reports waiting to bepolled.

While Extended Report Mode is reset, requesting a status report for a non-zero touchkey resultsin no useful information because the same touchkey number the host inquired about is returnedfrom the TCS without any toggle state information.

� (;$03/(

<ESC>[>2n

Requests the TCS to send the next touch report when operating in Polled Touch Mode.

<ESC>[>2;103n

Requests the TCS to send the status of Touchkey 103. The status includes the touchkeytoggle state if the Extended Report Mode is set.

6-22

� ([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�^)(50`��5HPRWH�The Extended Report Mode can be reset or set using the Reset Mode or Set Mode command.When the Extended Report Mode is reset, touch reports contain only the touchkey number, withno information about the current state of the touchkey.

When the Extended Report Mode is set, touch reports contain the number of the touchkey andthe touchkey’s current state (toggled on/off or pressed/releases). The purpose of this mode is tosupport the use of the toggle or press and release touchkey type. See the Touchkey Typecommand description for details about the toggle touchkey and the press and release touchkey. Ifa touchkey is not a toggle or press and release type, the state reported when Extended ReportMode is set is always off. The state information is appended to the normal touch report asfollows:

<ESC>[>2;<Pk>;<Ps>n

<Pk> is a three-digit, zero-filled ASCII numeric string (000 through 120) that represents thenumber of the touchkey being reported.

<Ps> is the current state of the touchkey.

If <Ps> is 0, touchkey is currently toggled off (if touch type = 3).

If <Ps> is 1, touchkey is currently toggled on (if touch type = 3).

If <Ps> is 2, touchkey is currently pressed (if touch type = 4).

If <Ps> is 3, touchkey is currently released (if touch type = 4).

The touchkey state of a report for Touchkey 000 is always off.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

� '()$8/7

Reset. (Extended Report Mode is off; TCS returns the touchkey number only.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>61

Resets Extended Report Mode. (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l," ASCII6C hex.)

<ESC>[>6h

Sets Extended Report Mode.

6-23

� (;$03/(6

A touch report that occurs when the Extended Report Mode is reset appears as follows:

<ESC>[>2;042n

The same touch report with the Extended Report Mode set might appear as:

<ESC>[>2;042;1n

This string indicates that Touchkey 42 is toggled on.

6-24

� 7RXFK�3DQHO�/RFNRXW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�^)7/0`��5HPRWH�The Touch Panel Lockout Mode command controls the Touch Panel Lockout Mode, whichallows the host to lock out user input from the touch panel. This command does not affect theoptional keyboard.

• When the Touch Panel Lockout Mode is reset, input is allowed from the touch panel. (Thetouch panel is unlocked.)

• When the Touch Panel Lockout Mode is set, input is not allowed from the touch panel. (Thetouch panel is locked.)

If the TCS receives a Read Touchkey Status command when the Touch Panel Lockout Mode isset, the TCS reports the touchkey number 000 to indicate no inputs have occurred. (The format ofthis report is described under Read Touchkey Status Command, earlier in this chapter.)

If the user enters the Setup Screen (either by pressing the Set Up switch or the Set Up key) whenthe Touch Panel Lockout Mode is set, the touch panel is temporarily unlocked. When the userexits the Setup Screen or enters the Communication Monitor, the touch panel reverts to thelocked state.

If the user is pressing a touchkey while the Touch Lock-out Mode is in the process of being set,and the touchkey has begun auto-repeating, the touchkey will stop auto-repeating.

� '()$8/7

Reset (unlocked).

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>2l

Resets Touch Panel Lockout Mode (unlocks the touch panel). (The terminator for the resetcommand is the letter "l," ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[>2h

Sets Touch Panel Lockout Mode (locks the touch panel).

6-25

� 5(*,21�&200$1'6Region commands provide a simple way for the programmer to create visual touch targets on thedisplay. Region commands outline or erase a defined area on the screen, and modify theattributes of characters and lines within a defined area.

The Region commands are:

• Outline a Touchkey command (Remote)

• Outline a Region command (Remote)

• Custom Outline a Touchkey command (Remote)

• Custom Outline a Region command (Remote)

• Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkey command (Remote)

• Modify Character Attributes in a Region command (Remote)

• Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey command (Remote)

• Reverse Character Attributes in a Region command (Remote)

• Fill a Touchkey with Character command (Remote)

• Fill a Region with Character command (Remote)

• Erase a Touchkey command (Remote)

• Erase a Region command (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins on a new page.

� &RORU�)HDWXUHVFor the color TCS, the following additional features affect the Region commands:

• Commands that cause characters to be displayed normally use the current foreground,background, and conceal color attributes. However, there are several controls that can affecthow and when these attributes are used. Refer to Set Character Attributes Command inChapter 5 for details.

• Commands that cause characters to be erased use a space character in the current backgroundcolor and turn off the highlight, underline, blink, reverse-video, and concealed attributes foreach erased character.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC- private commands.

6-26

� 2XWOLQH�D�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)27.`��5HPRWH�The Outline a Touchkey command creates the visual border for a touchkey. The position of thecursor is not changed when this command is executed.

The area of the display affected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region if the OriginMode is set.

The attribute of the border are determined by the attribute already defined by the last SetCharacter Attributes command (unless the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set). For example, ifthe Set Character Attributes command has turned on the conceal attribute, the border is invisible.

The border of a touchkey consists of those character positions within the touchkey adjacent tothe touchkey’s edges.

Four border types are available. Each border is drawn using a different Boxtype character. Aborder using each Boxtype character is shown below:

For the Outline a Touchkey command to produce correct and predictable results, the touchkey’sline type must be determined. Line type is determined according to the following rules:

• If the touchkey contains any double-size lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-size lines.

• If the touchkey contains any double-width lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-width lines.

• If the touchkey does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the touchkey isassumed to be composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Outline a Touchkey command is executed on a touchkey that

contains mixed line types.

If the touchkey specified in this command designates a touch cell within a touchkey (but not themaster cell), an outline is drawn around that touch cell rather than the entire touchkey.

6-27

This command assumes that the Static Special Character Font will be mapped into the ExtendedCharacter Set when the screen is displayed. Otherwise, the box characters used to draw theoutline may appear different than described above. The boxtypes used by this command can becustomized by using the Down-Line Load and Map Character Font commands to change thecontents of the Extended Character Set, as described in Chapter 5.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[6;<Pk>;<Ps>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey to be outlined.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, the specified border is placed around the entire screen.

<Ps> is a selective parameter that specifies the type to be used.

If <Ps> is 0 or omitted, Boxtype 1 is used.

If <Ps> is 1, Boxtype 1 is used.

If <Ps> is 2, Boxtype 2 is used.

If <Ps> is 3, Boxtype 3 is used.

If <Ps> is 4, Boxtype 4 is used.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Outline a Touchkey command is executed on atouchkey that contains mixed line types.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[6u

Draws a border around the entire screen using Boxtype 1.

<ESC>[6;53;2u

Draws a border around Touchkey 53 using Boxtype 2.

6-28

� 2XWOLQH�D�5HJLRQ�&RPPDQG�^)25`��5HPRWH�The Outline a Region command places a border around an area of the screen defined relative tothe cursor, thereby drawing a touch target. This is convenient when a visual target does notcorrespond exactly with the physical boundaries of a touchkey. The position of the cursor is notchanged when this command is executed.

The region of the display affected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region if theOrigin Mode is set.

The attribute of the border are determined by the attribute already defined by the last SetCharacter Attributes command (unless the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set). For example, ifthe Set Character Attributes command has turned on the conceal attribute, the border is invisible.

The border of a region consists of those character positions within the region adjacent to theregion’s edges. The upper-left corner of the border is located at the current position of the cursor.

Four border types are available. Each border is drawn using a different Boxtype character. For adescription of the Boxtype characters. See the Outline a Touchkey command.

For the Outline a Region command to produce correct and predictable results, the region’s linetype must be determined. Line type is determined according to the following rules:

• If the region contains any double-size lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-size lines.

• If the region contains any double-width lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-width lines.

• If the region does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the region is assumed tobe composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Outline a Region command is executed on a region that

contains mixed line types.

This command assumes that the Static Special Character Font will be mapped into the ExtendedCharacter Set when the screen is displayed. Otherwise, the box characters used to draw theoutline may appear different than described above. The boxtype used by this command can becustomized by using the Down-Line Load and Map Character Font commands to change thecontents of the Extended Character Set, as described in Chapter 5.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

6-29

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[6;<P1>;<Pc>;<Pb>t

<P1> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 24, which designates the height of the region inlines.

If <P1> is 0, omitted, or greater than 24, a region with a height of 24 lines is defined.

<Pc> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 80, which designates the width of the region incolumns.

If <Pc> is 0, omitted, or greater than 80, a region 80 columns wide is defined.

<Pb> is a selective parameter that designates the type of border to place around the definedregion.

If <Pb> is 0 or omitted, Boxtype 1 is used.

If <Pb> is 1, Boxtype 1 is used.

If <Pb> is 2, Boxtype 2 is used.

If <Pb> is 3, Boxtype 3 is used.

If <Pb> is 4, Boxtype 4 is used.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Outline a Region command is executed over a regionthat contains mixed line types.

If the region specified runs off the edge or bottom of the screen, the edge of the region isassumed to be along the screen edges. When Origin Mode is set, the edges of the scrolling regionare handled as if they were the edges of the screen.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[6t

If Origin Mode is reset and the cursor is at the home position (row 1, column 1), a borderusing Boxtype1 border is drawn around the entire screen.

<ESC>[6;10;5;3t

A border using Boxtype 3 is drawn around a rectangular region 10 lines high by 5 columnswide. The location of the cursor marks the upper-left corner of the rectangle.

<ESC>[6;6;10t

Places a border using Boxtype 1 around a rectangular region 6 lines high by 10 columnswide. The location of the cursor marks the upper-left corner of the area.

6-30

� &XVWRP�2XWOLQH�D�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)&27.`��5HPRWH�The Custom Outline a Touchkey command places a customized border around a touchkey. Thecommand must include a starting character value in the character set to specify where to get theborder to be used for outlining.

The area of the display affected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region if the OriginMode is set.

The attribute of the border are determined by the attribute already defined by the last SetCharacter Attributes command (unless the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set). For example, ifthe Set Character Attributes command has turned on the conceal attribute, the border is invisible.

The border of a touchkey consists of those character positions within the touchkey that areadjacent to the touchkey’s edges.

The border is drawn using the eight characters from the specified starting character value asfollows:

&+$5$&7(5�9$/8( %25'(5�3257,21

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH �XSSHU�OHIW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �XSSHU�VLGH

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �XSSHU�ULJKW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ULJKW�VLGH

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ORZHU�ULJKW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ORZHU�VLGH

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ORZHU�OHIW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �OHIW�VLGH

The special characters used to create customized borders can be loaded into the Standard orExtended Character Set by using the Down-Line Load Character Font command and the MapCharacter Font command, as described in Chapter 5.

For the Custom Outline a Touchkey command to produce correct and predictable results, thetouchkey’s line type must be determined. Line type is determined according to the followingrules:

• If the touchkey contains any double-size lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-size lines.

• If the touchkey contains any double-width lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-width lines.

• If the touchkey does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the touchkey isassumed to be composed of all normal lines.

6-31

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Custom Outline a Touchkey command is executed on a

touchkey that contains mixed line types.

If the touchkey specified in this command designates a touch cell within a touchkey (but not themaster cell), an outline is drawn around that touch cell rather than the entire touchkey.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[5;<Pk>;<Pch>x

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey to be outlined.

If<Pk> is 0 or omitted, the specified border is placed around the entire screen.

<Pch> is numeric parameter that specifies the decimal value of the first character within theStandard or Extended Character Set to start using for the custom border.

If <Pch> is omitted, the default value 128 is used (the value of the first Boxtype 1character when the Static Special Character Font is mapped into the Extended CharacterSet).

If <Pch> is greater than 255, 255 is used.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if this command is executed on a touchkey that contains amixture of line types.

If the starting character <Pch> is greater than 248, some of the outline characters will havevalues greater than 255 (for example, 249 + 7 = 256). Any outline character values that wouldexceed 255 use the value 255. If the starting character <Pch> is 255 or greater, all the outlinecharacters use the value 255.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[5;;163x

Places a border around the entire screen using the eight characters from within the ExtendedCharacter Set starting with character value 163.

<ESC>[5;153;8x

Places a border around Touchkey 153 using the eight characters from within the StandardCharacter Set starting with character value 8.

6-32

� &XVWRP�2XWOLQH�D�5HJLRQ�&RPPDQG�^)&25`��5HPRWH�The Custom Outline a Region command allows a customized border to be placed around arectangular area of the screen. The command must include a starting character value thatspecifies where to get the border to be used for outlining.

The region of the display affected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region if theOrigin Mode is set.

The attribute of the border are determined by the attribute already defined by the last SetCharacter Attributes command (unless the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set). For example, ifthe Set Character Attributes command has turned on the conceal attribute, the border is invisible.

The border of a region consists of those character positions within the region that are adjacent tothe region’s edges. The upper-left corner of the border is at the current position of the cursor.

The border is drawn using the eight characters from the specified starting character value asfollows:

&+$5$&7(5�9$/8( %25'(5�3257,21

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH �XSSHU�OHIW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �XSSHU�VLGH

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �XSSHU�ULJKW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ULJKW�VLGH

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ORZHU�ULJKW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ORZHU�VLGH

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �ORZHU�OHIW�FRUQHU

6WDUWLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�9DOXH���� �OHIW�VLGH

The special characters used to create customized borders can be loaded into the Standard orExtended Character Set by using the Down-Line Load Character Font command and the MapCharacter Font command, as described in Chapter 5.

For the Custom Outline a Region command to produce correct and predictable results, theregion’s line type must be determined. Line type is determined according to the following rules:

• If the region contains any double-size lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-size lines.

• If the region contains any double-width lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-width lines.

• If the region does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the region is assumed tobe composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Modify Character Attributes in a Region or the Customer

Outline in a Region commands are executed on a region that contains mixed line types.

6-33

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[4;<P1>;<Pc>;<Pch>x

<P1> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 24 that designates the height of the regionin lines.

If <P1> is 0, omitted, or greater than 24, a region with a height of 24 lines is defined.

<Pc> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 80 that designates the width of the region incolumns.

If <Pc> is 0, omitted, or greater than 80, a region 80 columns wide is defined.

<Pch> is a numeric parameter that specifies the decimal value of the first character withinthe Standard or Extended Character Set to start using for the custom border.

If <Pch> is omitted, the default value 128 is used (the value of the first Boxtype 1character when the Static Special Character Font is mapped into the Extended CharacterSet).

If <Pch> is greater than 255, 255 is used.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Custom Outline a Region command is executed on aregion that contains mixed line types.

If the region specified runs off the edge or bottom of the screen, the edge of the region isassumed to be along the screen edges. When Origin Mode is set, the edges of the scrolling regionare handled as if they were the edges of the screen.

If the starting character <Pch> is greater than 248, some of the outline characters will havevalues greater than 255 (for example, 249 + 7 = 256). Any outline character values that wouldhave exceeded 255 use the value 255. If the starting character <Pch> is 255 or greater, all theoutline characters use the value 255.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[4;;;163x

If the cursor is at the home position with Origin Mode reset, this string places a border aroundthe entire screen using the eight characters from within the Extended Character Set starting withcharacter value 163.

<ESC>[4;10;5;0x

Places a border using the eight characters from within the Standard Character Set starting withcharacter value 0 within a 10 line high by 5 column wide region.

6-34

� 0RGLI\�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)0&$,7.`��5HPRWH�The Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkey command causes the character attributes withina touchkey to be modified on a touchkey basis, rather than character-by-character.

This command assigns to the designated touchkey the character attributes currently in effect (aslast assigned by the Set Character Attributes command). Because the Modify CharacterAttributes in a Touchkey command directly causes attributes to be modified, the NOCHANGEAttribute Mode has no effect on this command.

NOTEIf the Set Character Attributes command has selected the conceal attribute, characters within the touchkey

disappear. The characters can be made visible again by sending the Reverse Character Attributes in aTouchkey command to reverse (turn off) the conceal attribute.

For the color TCS to properly conceal characters, the conceal color attribute must be set to the same coloras the screen background.

The area of the display affected by this command is restricted to lie within the scrolling regionwhen Origin Mode is set.

Within a touchkey, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the areas previouslydefined in this chapter under Touchkey Visual Extent.

For the Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkey command to produce correct and predictableresults, the touchkey’s line type must be determined. Line type is determined according to thefollowing rules:

• If the touchkey contains any double-size lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-size lines.

• If the touchkey contains any double-width lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-width lines.

• If the touchkey does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the touchkey isassumed to be composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkey command is

executed on a touchkey that contains mixed line types.

If the touchkey specified in this command designates a touch cell within a touchkey (but not themaster cell), the attributes are modified within that touch cell rather than the entire touchkey.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

6-35

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[7;<Pk>;<Pv>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey whose character attributes are to bemodified.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, the entire screen is modified.

<Pv> is a selective parameter that designates the visual extent of the touchkey to be affectedby the command.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, the attributes of all characters in the touchkey are modified.

If <Pv> is 1, the attributes of only inner characters are modified.

If <Pv> is 2, the attributes of only border characters are modified.

If <Pv> is 3, the attributes of all characters in the touchkey are modified.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkey commandis executed on a touchkey that contains mixed line types.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[7;;3u

Modifies the entire portion of every touchkey, using the current character attributes.

<ESC>[7;5;2u

Modifies the border of Touchkey 5, using the current character attributes.

6-36

� 0RGLI\�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D�5HJLRQ�&RPPDQG�^)0&$,5`��5HPRWH�The Modify Character Attributes in a Region command causes the character attributes within adefined region to be modified on a regional basis, rather than character-by-character.

This command assigns to the designated region the attributes currently in effect (as last assignedby the Set Character Attributes command). Because the Modify Character Attributes in a Regioncommand directly causes attributes to be modified, the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode has noeffect on this command.

NOTEIf the Set Character Attributes command has selected the conceal attribute, characters within the regiondisappear. The characters can be made visible again by sending the Reverse Character Attributes in a

Region command to reverse (turn off) the conceal attribute.

For the color TCS to properly conceal characters, the conceal color attribute must be set to the same coloras the screen background.

The region to be acted upon by this command is defined relative to the cursor position, whichbecomes the upper-left corner of the region. The number of lines (height) and number of columns(width) making up the region are specified by numeric parameters.

The region of the display affected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region if theOrigin Mode is set.

Within a defined region, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the followingareas:

• Inner characters

Only those characters within a region that are not adjacent to an edge (border) of the regionare affected.

• Border characters

Only those characters within a region that are adjacent to an edge (border) of the region areaffected.

• All characters

All the characters (inner and border) in the region are affected.

For the Modify Character Attributes in a Region command to produce correct and predictableresults, the region’s line type must be determined. Line type is determined according to thefollowing rules:

• If the region contains any double-size lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-size lines.

• If the region contains any double-width lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-width lines.

6-37

• If the region does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the region is assumed tobe composed of all normal lines.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[7;<P1>;<Pc>;<Pv>t

<P1> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 24 that designates the height of the region inlines.

If <Pl> is 0, omitted, or greater than 24, a region with a height of 24 lines is defined.

<Pc> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 80, that designates the width of the region incolumns.

If <Pc> is 0, omitted, or greater than 80, a region 80 columns wide is defined.

<Pv> is a selective parameter, designating which portion of the region is affected by thecommand.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, the attributes of all characters in the region are modified.

If <Pv> is 1, the attributes of only inner characters are modified.

If <Pv> is 2, the attributes of only border characters are modified.

If <Pv> is 3, the attributes of all characters in the region are modified.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Modify Character Attributes in a Region command isexecuted on a region that contains mixed line types.

If the region specified runs off the edge or bottom of the screen, the edge of the region isassumed to be along the screen edges. When Origin Mode is set, the edges of the scrolling regionare handled as if they were the edges of the screen.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[7t

Modifies the entire screen (if Origin Mode is reset and the cursor is in the home position).

<ESC>[7;12;51;2t

Modifies the border attributes of a region 12 lines high by 51 columns wide relative to thecursor (which marks the upper left corner of the border).

6-38

� 5HYHUVH�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)5&$,7.`��5HPRWH�The Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey command allows the host to quickly change thecharacter attributes within a touchkey.

The attributes to be changed with this command are specified within the command. One or moreattributes can be changed at a time. All the attributes specified in this command are reversedfrom their current setting for each of the characters within the touchkey. The charactersappearing within the touchkey are not changed; only their displayed attributes are updated. Thecharacter attributes in use as last set by the Set Character Attributes Command are never changedby this command.

This command relieves the host of having to keep track of the current attributes within atouchkey. For example, if the host detects a touchkey being pressed and wants to highlight thecharacters within the touchkey, this command can be used. Every time the host detects thetouchkey being pressed, it can send this command to reverse the touchkey’s attributes. In thiscase, the host does not have to remember whether the touchkey had a particular attribute on oroff; it just knows that it wants to reverse the attribute from its previous state.

Because the Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey command directly causes attributes tobe modified, the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode has no effect on this command.

The area of the display affected by this command is restricted to lie within the scrolling regionwhen Origin Mode is set.

Within a touchkey, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the areas previouslydefined in this chapter under Touchkey Visual Extent.

For the Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey command to produce correct and predictableresults, the touchkey’s line type must be determined. Line type is determined according to thefollowing rules:

• If the touchkey contains any double-size lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-size lines.

• If the touchkey contains any double-width lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-width lines.

• If the touchkey does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the touchkey isassumed to be composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey command is

executed on a touchkey that contains mixed line types.

If the touchkey specified in this command designates a touch cell within a touchkey (but not themaster cell), then the attributes are reversed within that touch cell rather than the entire touchkey.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

6-39

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[9;<Pk>;<Pv>;<Pa>;...;<Pa>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies the touchkey whose character attributes are to bereversed.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, the character attributes of the entire screen are reversed.

Pv> is a selective parameter that specifies the visual extent of the touchkey to be reversed.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, the attributes of all characters within the touchkey are reversed.

If <Pv> is 1, the attributes of only inner characters within the touchkey are reversed.

If <Pv> is 2, the attributes of only border characters within the touchkey are reversed.

If <Pv> is 3, the attributes of all characters within the touchkey are reversed.

<Pa> is a selective parameter that specifies the attribute to reverse.

If <Pa> is 0 or omitted, the reverse video attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 1, the highlight attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 4, the underline attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 5, the blink attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 7, the reverse video attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 8, the conceal attribute is reversed.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may occur if this command is invoked on a touchkey that contains a mixtureof line types.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[9;;;5u

Reverses the blink attribute for all characters in the entire screen.

<ESC>[9;5;2;4;1u

Reverses the highlight and underline attributes in the border of Touchkey 5.

<ESC>[9;90;1;8u

Reverses the conceal attribute in the inner part of Touchkey 90. If the characters in the innerpart of Touchkey 90 were not visible (concealed) before this command was sent, thecharacters will become visible (unconcealed). If the characters were visible (unconcealed)before this command, they will become invisible (concealed).

6-40

� 5HYHUVH�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D�5HJLRQ�&RPPDQG�^)5&$O5`��5HPRWH�The Reverse Character Attributes in a Region Command allows the host to quickly reversecharacter attributes within a region.

The attributes to be changed with this command are specified within the command. One or moreattributes can be changed at a time. All the attributes specified in this command are reversedfrom their current setting for each character within the region. The characters appearing withinthe region are not changed; only their displayed attributes are updated. The character attributes inuse as last set by the Set Character Attributes Command are never changed by this command.

This command relieves the host of having to keep track of the current attributes within a region.For example, if the host wants to display a message within a region and, depending onconditions, may want the message to be highlighted or not highlighted, this command can beused. Every time the host wants to switch the attributes of the message, it only needs to send thiscommand. The host never has to remember whether the message was last highlighted or not; itjust knows that it wants to reverse the highlight attribute from its previous state.

Because the Reverse Character Attributes in a Region command directly causes attributes to bemodified, the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode has no effect on this command.

The region to be acted upon by this command is defined relative to the cursor position, whichbecomes the upper-left corner of the region. The number of lines (height) and number of columns(width) making up the region are specified by numeric parameters.

The region of the display affected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region if theOrigin Mode is set.

Within a defined region, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the followingareas:

• Inner characters

Only those characters within a region not adjacent to an edge (border) of the region areaffected.

• Border characters

Only those characters within a region adjacent to an edge (border) of the region are affected.

• All characters

All the characters (inner and border) in the region are affected.

For the Reverse Character Attributes in a Region command to produce correct and predictableresults, the region’s line type must be determined as follows:

• If the region contains any double-size lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-size lines.

• If the region contains any double-width lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-width lines.

6-41

• If the region does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the region is assumed tobe composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Reverse Character Attributes in a Region command is executed

on a region that contains mixed line types.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[9;<P1>;<Pc>;<Pv>;<Pa>;...;<Pa>t

<P1> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 24, which designates the height of the region inlines.

If <P1> is 0, omitted, or greater than 24, a region with a height of 24 lines is defined.

<Pc> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 80, which designates the width of the region incolumns.

If <Pc> is 0, omitted, or greater than 80, a region 80 columns wide is defined.

<Pv> is a selective parameter that specifies the visual extent of the region to be reversed.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, the attributes of all characters within the region are reversed.

If <Pv> is I, the attributes of only inner characters within the region are reversed.

If <Pv> is 2, the attributes of only border characters within the region are reversed.

If <Pv> is 3, the attributes of all characters within the region are reversed.

<Pa> is a selective parameter that specifies the attribute to be reversed.

If <Pa> is 0 or omitted, the reverse video attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 1, the highlight attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 4, the underline attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 5, the blink attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 7, the reverse video attribute is reversed.

If <Pa> is 8, the conceal attribute is reversed.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the region specified runs off the edge or bottom of the screen, the edge of the region isassumed to be along the screen edges. When Origin Mode is set, the edges of the scrolling regionare handled as if they were the edges of the screen.

Undesirable results may be produced if the Reverse Character Attributes in a Region command isexecuted on a region that contains mixed line types.

6-42

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[9;;;;5t

Reverses the blink attribute for the entire screen.

<ESC> [9;12;51;2;4;1t

Reverses the highlight and underline attributes in the border of a 12 line by 51 column regionwith upper left corner at the cursor.

<ESC>[9;1;50;1;8t

Reverses the conceal attribute in the inner part of a 1 line by 50 column region. If thecharacters in the inner part of the region were not visible (concealed) before this commandwas sent, the characters will become visible (unconcealed). If the characters were visible(unconcealed) before this command, they will become invisible (concealed).

6-43

� )LOO�D�7RXFKNH\�:LWK�D�&KDUDFWHU�&RPPDQG�^))7.&`��5HPRWH�The Fill a Touchkey With a Character command allows the host to easily fill a touchkey with acharacter. The character specified in this command will be repeatedly displayed in each characterposition throughout the visual extent of the touchkey that the host specifies. This commandallows a touchkey to be filled with any one of the 256 characters from the Standard and ExtendedCharacter Sets.

The area of the display affected by this command is restricted to lie within the scrolling regionwhen Origin Mode is set.

Within a touchkey, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the areas previouslydefined in this chapter under Touchkey Visual Extent.

For the Fill a Touchkey With a Character command to produce correct and predictable results,the touchkey’s line type must be determined. Line type is determined according to the followingrules:

• If the touchkey contains any double-size lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-size lines.

• If the touchkey contains any double-width lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-width lines.

• If the touchkey does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the touchkey isassumed to be composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Fill a Touchkey With a Character command is executed on a

touchkey that contains mixed line types.

If the touchkey specified in this command designates a touch cell within a touchkey (but not themaster cell), then the characters are filled within that touch cell rather than the entire touchkey.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[3;<Pk>;<Pv>;<Pch>x

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies which touchkey is to be filled.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, the entire screen is filled using the visual extent specified.

<Pv> is a selective parameter that specifies the visual extent of the touchkey to be filled.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, all of the touchkey is filled.

If <Pv> is 1, the only inner portion of the touchkey is filled.

If <Pv> is 2, the only border of the touchkey is filled.

If <Pv> is 3, all the touchkey is filled.

6-44

<Pch> is a numeric parameter that specifies the decimal value of the character to be used forfilling the area specified.

If <Pch> is omitted, the default value 251 from within the Extended Character Set isused (the gray block character when the Static Special Character Font is mapped into theExtended Character Set).

If <Pch > is greater than 255, 255 is used.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Fill a Touchkey With a Character command isexecuted on a touchkey that contains mixed line types.

� (;$03/(

<ESC>[3x

Fills the entire screen with the gray block character (value 251 when the Static SpecialCharacter Font is mapped into the Extended Character Set).

<ESC>[3;53;2;42x

Puts the asterisk (*) character (value 42 when the Static ASCII Character Font is mappedinto the Standard Character Set) in every character position of the border of Touchkey 53.

NOTEThese examples assume that the Static ASCII Character Font and the Static Special Character Font are

mapped into the Standard and Extended Character Sets, respectively. If this is not the case, the characterthat fills the region may differ from the above examples (it may be a custom character).

6-45

� )LOO�D�5HJLRQ�:LWK�D�&KDUDFWHU�&RPPDQG�^))5&`��5HPRWH�The Fill a Region With a Character command allows the host to easily fill a rectangular area witha specified character. The upper left corner of the region is defined by the current cursorposition. The character specified in this command is repeatedly displayed in each characterposition throughout the visual extent of the region that the host specifies. This command allows afill with any of the 256 characters from the Standard and Extended Character Sets.

The area of the display affected by this command is restricted to lie within the scrolling regionwhen Origin Mode is set.

Within a defined region, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the followingareas:

• Inner characters

Only those characters within a region not adjacent to an edge (border) of the region areaffected.

• Border characters

Only those characters within a region adjacent to an edge (border) of the region are affected.

• All characters

All the characters (inner and border) in the region are affected.

For the Fill a Region With a Character command to produce correct and predictable results, theregion’s line type must be determined as follows:

• If the region contains any double-size lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-size lines.

• If the region contains any double-width lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-width lines.

• If the region does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the region is assumed tobe composed of all normal lines.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[2;<P1>;<Pc>;<Pv>;<Pch>x

<P1> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 24, which designates the height of the region inlines.

If <Pl> is 0, omitted, or greater than 24, a region with a height of 24 lines is defined.

<Pc> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 80, which designates the width of the region incolumns.

6-46

If <Pc> is 0, omitted, or greater than 80, a region 80 columns wide is defined.

<Pv> is a selective parameter that specifies the visual extent of the region to be filled.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, all of the region is filled.

If <Pv> is 1, only the inner portion of the region is filled.

If <Pv> is 2, only the border of the region is filled.

If <Pv> is 3, all of the region is filled.

<Pch> is a numeric parameter that specifies the decimal value of the character to be used forfilling the area specified.

If <Pch> is omitted, the default value 251 from within the Extended Character Set isused (the gray block character when the Static Special Character Font is mapped into theExtended Character Set).

If <Pch> is greater than 255, 255 is used.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the region specified runs off the edge or bottom of the screen, the edge of the region isassumed to be along the screen edges. When Origin Mode is set, the edges of the scrolling regionare handled as if they were the edges of the screen.

Undesirable results may be produced if the Fill a Region With a Character command is executedon a region that contains mixed line types.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[2x

Fills the entire screen with the gray block character (value 251 when the Static SpecialCharacter Font is mapped into the Extended Character Set).

<ESC> [2;2;45;3;43x

Fills every character position of a 2 line by 45 column region (whose upper left corner is atthe current cursor position) with a plus (+) character (value 43 when the Static ASCIICharacter Font is mapped into the Standard Character Set).

NOTEThese examples assume that the Static ASCII Character Font and Static Special Character Font are

mapped into the Standard and Extended Character Sets, respectively. If this is not the case, the characterthat fills the region may differ from the above examples (it may be a custom character).

6-47

� (UDVH�D�7RXFKNH\�&RPPDQG�^)(7.`��5HPRWH�The Erase a Touchkey command is sent by the host to erase the target associated with a specifiedtouchkey on the display.

Each character that is erased is replaced by a blank (a Space character). The attribute of eachcharacter position in the erased touchkey reverts to off, unless the NOCHANGE Attribute Modeis set.

The area of the display affected by this command is restricted to lie within the scrolling regionwhen Origin Mode is set.

Within a touchkey, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the areas previouslydefined in this chapter under Touchkey Visual Extent.

For the Erase a Touchkey command to produce correct and predictable results, the touchkey’sline type must be determined. Line type is determined according to the following rules:

• If the touchkey contains any double-size lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-size lines.

• If the touchkey contains any double-width lines, the entire touchkey is assumed to becomposed of double-width lines.

• If the touchkey does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the touchkey isassumed to be composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Erase a Touchkey command is executed on a touchkey that

contains mixed line types.

If the touchkey specified in this command designates a touch cell within a touchkey (but not themaster cell), then the characters are erased within that touch cell rather than the entire touchkey.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[8;<Pk>;<Pv>u

<Pk> is a numeric parameter that specifies which touchkey is to be erased.

If <Pk> is 0 or omitted, the entire screen is erased.

<Pv> is a selective parameter that specifies the visual extent of the touchkey to be erased.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, all characters in the touchkey are erased.

If <Pv> is 1, the only inner characters are erased.

If <Pv> is 2, the only border characters are erased.

If <Pv> is 3, all characters in the touchkey are erased.

6-48

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Erase a Touchkey command is executed on atouchkey that contains mixed line types.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[8u

Erases the entire screen (if Origin Mode is reset and the cursor is in the home position).

<ESC>[8;53;2u

Erases the border of Touchkey 53.

6-49

� (UDVH�D�5HJLRQ�&RPPDQG�^)(5`��5HPRWH�The Erase a Region command is sent by the host to erase a designated area of the screen.

Each character that is erased is replaced by a blank (a Space character). The attribute of eachcharacter position in the erased region reverts to off, unless the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode isset.

The region to be erased is defined relative to the cursor position, which becomes the upper-leftcorner of the region. The number of lines (height) and number of columns (width) making up theregion are specified by numeric parameters.

The region of the display affected by this command is restricted to the scrolling region if theOrigin Mode is set.

Within a defined region, the host can restrict the effect of this command to one of the followingareas:

• Inner characters

Only those characters within a region not adjacent to an edge (border) of the region areerased.

• Border characters

Only those characters within a region adjacent to an edge (border) of the region are erased.

• All characters

All the characters (inner and border) in the region are erased.

For the Erase a Region command to produce correct and predictable results, the line type of theregion must be determined. Line type is determined according to the following rules:

• If the region contains any double-size lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-size lines.

• If the region contains any double-width lines, the entire region is assumed to be composed ofdouble-width lines.

• If the region does not contain any double-width or double-size lines, the region is assumed tobe composed of all normal lines.

NOTEUndesirable results may be produced if the Erase a Region command is executed on a region that contains

mixed line types.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

6-50

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[8;<P1>;<Pc>;<Pv>t

<Pl> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 24, which designates the height of the region inlines.

If <P1> is 0, omitted, or greater than 24, a region with a height of 24 lines is defined.

<Pc> is a numeric parameter from 0 through 80, which designates the width of the region incolumns.

If <Pc> is 0, omitted, or greater than 80, a region 80 columns wide is defined.

<Pv> is a selective parameter, which indicates the visual extent of the region to be erased.

If <Pv> is 0 or omitted, all characters in the region are erased.

If <Pv> is 1, the only inner characters are erased.

If <Pv> is 2, the only border characters are erased.

If <Pv> is 3, all the characters in the region are erased.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Undesirable results may be produced if the Erase a Region command is executed over a regionthat contains mixed line types.

If the region specified runs off the edge or bottom of the screen, the edge of the region isassumed to be along the screen edges. When Origin Mode is set, the edges of the scrolling regionare handled as if they were the edges of the screen.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[8t

Erases the entire screen (if Origin Mode is reset and the cursor is in the home position).

<ESC>[8;2;45;3t

All of a 2-line by 45-column region is erased (relative to the location of the cursor, whichrepresents the upper-left corner of the region).

7-1

&+$37(5�����352*5$00,1*�7+(�237,21$/�.(<%2$5'

� ,1752'8&7,21This chapter describes how to program the optional keyboard. Topics include:

• A description of the keyboard

• A list of the codes the keyboard transmits to the host

• A description of the commands that affect the keyboard’s operation

� .(<%2$5'�'(6&5,37,21The optional keyboard has keys similar to those on a typewriter, with the addition of somespecial keys. The keyboard contains standard keys, a Setup key, cursor control keys, specialfunction keys, and an auxiliary keypad.

� 6WDQGDUG�.H\VThe standard keys generate ASCII codes, and have the names of ASCII characters printed on thekeycaps.

Following are some general descriptions of some of the non-numeric keys. Note that the functionof most of these keys is ultimately determined by the application software running on the hostcomputer. The ASCII codes sent to the host computer by the non-alphanumeric standard keys areshown in Table 7-1.

The Back Space key normally causes the cursor to move one space to the left.

The Break key generates a short break when pressed alone, or a long break when pressed in withthe Shift key. The Break key normally resets the communication interfaces with a deviceattached to the TCS. However, the function of the Break key is determined by the types ofperipherals connected to the TCS and the application software running on the host computer.(For more information, see Send Short Break Command and Send Long Break Command, later inthis chapter.)

The Delete key normally moves the cursor one space to the left, deleting the character thatoccupied the space.

The Return key sends either the ASCII code <CR> (0D Hex) or the ASCII code sequence <CR><LF> (0D 0A Hex) to the host, depending on the state of the New Line Mode. See New LineMode Command, in Chapter 5.

The Return key normally moves the cursor to the first column of the next line. However, theaction caused by sending <CR> or <CR> <LF> to the host computer is determined by theapplication software running on the host computer.

The Shift key alone does not generate a code. It is used with other standard keys to senduppercase characters, by holding down Shift while pressing another key. The uppercasecharacters include capital letters and uppercase symbols.

7-2

The Space Bar normally moves the cursor one space to the right, leaving an invisible spacecharacter in its place.

The Scroll Lock key is a toggle. The first press freezes the display by causing the TCS to stopprocessing codes. The second press allows the TCS to resume processing codes. If the hostcontinues to send codes while Scroll Lock is in effect, the TCS input buffer may fill, promptingthe TCS to stall the host.

The Ctrl key alone does not send a code. It is used with other standard keys to send control codesby holding down the Ctrl key while pressing another key. For example, the Ctrl key can be usedto send a control code that causes the TCS to beep. The keystroke Ctrl/G (when echoed to theTCS) normally cause the beeper to sound. Table 7-2 shows the codes that the TCS transmitswhen various keys are pressed with the Ctrl key. The action caused by sending these controlcodes to the host computer is determined by the application software running on the hostcomputer.

The Caps Lock key locks when pressed, and unlocks when pressed again. When the Caps Lockkey is locked, all alphabetic keys generate capital letters. When the Caps Lock key is unlocked,all alphabetic keys generate lowercase letters (unless an alphabetic key is pressed with the Shiftkey). Numeric or symbolic keys are unaffected by the Caps Lock key. The LED indicator on theCaps Lock key is lit when the key is locked, and off when the key is unlocked.

The Tab key normally moves the cursor one tab space to the right.

The Esc (escape) key generates the ASCII <ESC> code (1B Hex).

7DEOH������1RQ�$OSKDQXPHULF�6WDQGDUG�.H\�&RGHV

.(< &2'(�6��6(17�72�+267�+(;$'(&,0$/�

01(021,&�6�

'HOHWH

7DE

5HWXUQ

6SDFH�%DU

(VF

%DFN�6SDFH

�)

��

�'�RU��'��$

��

�%

��

�'(/!

�+7!

�&5!�RU��&5!��/)!

�63$&(!

�(6&!

�%6!

�7KH�1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�GHWHUPLQHV�ZKLFK�FRGHV�DUH�VHQW��6HH�&KDSWHU���

7-3

� 7KH�6HW�8S�.H\The Set Up key does not transmit anything to the host computer. It is used to call up the SetupScreen, and to exit the Setup, Test, and Alignment Screens. See Using the Setup Screen, for moreinformation.

� &XUVRU�&RQWURO�.H\VThe cursor control keys transmit ANSI cursor control sequences to the host as shown in Table 7-3. These are special sequences of ASCII codes defined by the American National StandardsInstitute (ANSI).

7-4

7DEOH������&RGHV�6HQW�E\�.H\V�ZKHQ�3UHVVHG�ZLWK�WKH�&WUO�.H\

.(<��35(66('�:,7+&75/�.(<�

&2'(�6(17�72�+267��+(;$'(&,0$/� 01(021,&

��RU�6SDFH�%DU

$

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

,

-

./

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;�RU�'HOHWH

<

=

��RU�>

��RU�?

��RU�@

��RU�C

��RU��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�$

�%

�&

�'�RU��'��$

�(

�)

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�$

�%

�&

�'

�(

�)

�)

�18//!

�62+!

�67;!

�(7;!

�(27!

�(14!

�$&.!

�%(/!

�%6!

�+7!

�/)!

�97!

�))!

�&5!�RU��&5!��/)!

�62!

�6,!

�'/(!

�'&�!��;21�

�'&�!

�'&�!��;2))�

�'&�!

�1$.!

�6<1!

�(7%!

�&$1!

�(0!

�68%!

�(6&!

�)6!

�*6!

�56!

�86!

�'(/!

�7KH�1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�GHWHUPLQHV�ZKLFK�FRGHV�DUH�VHQW��6HH�&KDSWHU���

7-5

7DEOH������&XUVRU�&RQWURO�.H\�&RGHV

.(< &21752/�6(48(1&(6(17�72�+267

$&7,21�7$.(1�,)�(&+2('�72�7+(�7&6

Æ

Ç

Å

Ä

�(6&!�>�$

�(6&!�>�%

�(6&!�>�&

�(6&!�>�'

0RYHV�WKH�FXUVRU�RQH�OLQH�XS

0RYHV�WKH�FXUVRU�RQH�OLQH�GRZQ

0RYHV�WKH�FXUVRU�RQH�VSDFH�WR�WKH�ULJKW

0RYHV�WKH�FXUVRU�RQH�VSDFH�WR�WKH�OHIW

The cursor control keys normally move the cursor on the screen.

� 6SHFLDO�)XQFWLRQ�.H\VThe special function keys transmit control sequences to the host as shown in Table 7-4. Thespecial function keys can also be pressed with the Shift or Ctrl keys to generate additionalcontrol sequences. These control sequences are also shown in Table 7-4. How the host computerresponds to these control sequences depends on the application software. The unlabeled specialfunction key does not send any codes to the host.

7-6

7DEOH������6SHFLDO�)XQFWLRQ�.H\�&RGHV

.(<�6� &2'(�6(48(1&(�6(17�72�+267

)�)�)�)�)�)�)�)�)�)��

6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)�6KLIW�)��

&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)�&WUO�)��

�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a

�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a

�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a�(6&!�>����a

� $X[LOLDU\�.H\SDGThe auxiliary keypad is the group of keys on the right side of the keyboard. The auxiliary keypadcan be programmed to operate in one of two modes using the Keypad Mode command. In theNumeric Mode, the auxiliary keypad transmits numeric codes to the host. In the ApplicationMode, the auxiliary keypad transmits application code sequences to the host. Both sets of codesare shown in Table 7-5. The default mode for the auxiliary keypad is the Numeric Mode.

The Keypad Mode command is described later in this chapter.

7-7

7DEOH������$X[LOLDU\�.H\SDG�&RGHV

.(< 180(5,&�&2'(6�6(17�72�+267 $33/,&$7,21�&2'(6�6(17�72�+267

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

¶

�

(QWHU

3)�

3)�

3)�

3)�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

µ

�

�&5!�RU��&5!��/)!

�(6&!�2�3

�(6&!�2�4

�(6&!�2�5

�(6&!�2�6

�(6&!�2�S

�(6&!�2�T

�(6&!�2�U

�(6&!�2�V

�(6&!�2�W

�(6&!�2�X

�(6&!�2�Y

�(6&!�2�Z

�(6&!�2�[

�(6&!�2�\

�(6&!�2�P

�(6&!�2�O

�(6&!�2�Q

�(6&!�2�0

�(6&!�2�3

�(6&!�2�4

�(6&!�2�5

�(6&!�2�6

�7KH�1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�GHWHUPLQHV�ZKLFK�FRGHV�DUH�VHQW��6HH�&KDSWHU���

7-8

� .(<%2$5'�&200$1'6The Keyboard commands affect the operation of the optional keyboard. The Keyboardcommands are:

• Keyboard Lockout Mode command (Remote)

• Keypad Mode command (Remote)

• Local/Remote Mode command (Local)

• Send Long Break command (Local)

• Local/Remote Mode command (Local)

• Send Short Break command (Local)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins at the top of a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in square

brackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in square brackets [] are ANSI-specifiedcommands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible. TCS-private commands. Mnemonics in

parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-private commands.

7-9

� .H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�>.$0@��5HPRWH�The Keyboard Lockout Mode command sets and resets the Keyboard Lockout Mode. This allowsthe host to block input from the keyboard.

When the Keyboard Lockout Mode is set, keyboard entries are ignored by the TCS (the keyboardis locked). Setting the Keyboard Lockout Mode also precludes access to the Setup Screenthrough the Set Up key on the keyboard. When the Keyboard Lockout Mode is reset, input isallowed from the keyboard (the keyboard is unlocked).

When the keyboard is locked, the user can call up the Setup Screen only if the user has access tothe SET UP button. Once the Setup Screen is activated, the keyboard is temporarily unlocked sothat the user can use it to change parameters in the Setup Screen. Once the Setup Screen is exitedor the Communication Monitor is entered, the keyboard is again locked to all user input.

� '()$8/7

Reset. (The keyboard is unlocked.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> [2 l

Resets the Keyboard Lockout Mode, which unlocks the keyboard. (The terminator for thereset command is the letter “l”, ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC> [2 h

Sets the Keyboard Lockout Mode, which locks the keyboard.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the host sets the Keyboard Lockout Mode while the user is keying in a sequence, the sequenceis interrupted. To avoid this, it is recommended that the host follow the Keyboard Lockout Modecommand by a Clear User Inputs command to ensure that no partial user input strings are leftwaiting to be reported to the host.

7-10

� .H\SDG�0RGH�&RPPDQG�>'(&.3$0@�>'(&.310@��5HPRWH�The Keypad Mode command sets the auxiliary keypad to either the Numeric or ApplicationMode so the host can select whether the auxiliary keypad on the optional keyboard sendsnumeric codes or application codes to the host.

When the keypad is set to the Numeric Mode, the keypad sends numeric codes to the host.

When the keypad is set to the Application Mode, the keypad sends special control sequences tothe host. This allows the keypad to be used for specialized applications where each key isspecially interpreted by the host software.

The numeric codes and application codes sent by the keypad are described under AuxiliaryKeypad, earlier in this chapter.

� '()$8/7

Numeric Mode. (The keypad sends numeric codes.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC> =

Sets the auxiliary keypad to the Application Mode. (The keypad sends application codes.)

<ESC>>

Sets the auxiliary keypad to the Numeric mode. (The keypad sends numeric codes.)

7-11

� /RFDO�5HPRWH�0RGH�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Local/Remote Mode command controls whether the TCS accepts remote commands fromthe host computer or from the keyboard. The command sets the TCS either to the Remote Mode(in which the TCS accepts remote commands from the host) or to the Local Mode (in which theTCS accepts remote commands from the keyboard).

For complete details about how to use the Local/Remote Mode command, refer to its descriptionin Chapter 4.

7-12

� 6HQG�/RQJ�%UHDN�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Send Long Break command causes the TCS to hold the RS-232-E Data Terminal Ready(DTR) and Request to Send (RTS) lines off (low) for approximately 3.5 seconds.

This command is typically used to initiate disconnection from the host equipment, particularlywith a modem communicating to a remote computer over a telephone line.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user issues the Send Long Break command by typing Shift/Break on the optional keyboard(holding down the Shift key while pressing the Break key).

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Any input received from the host during transmission of the long break signal is ignored.

7-13

� 6HQG�6KRUW�%UHDN�&RPPDQG��/RFDO�The Send Short Break command causes the RS-232-E Transmitted Data (TD) line to be held inthe “0” or SPACE state for approximately 300 milliseconds. This can be used as a special signalto the host that can be recognized at any baud rate.

A typical use of the Short Break command is to signal to the host to cycle through a choice ofbaud rates until the baud rate matching that of the TCS is established.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user issues the Send Short Break command by pressing the Break key on the optionalkeyboard.

� +267�86$*(

None. (This is a local command only.)

� 3266,%/(�(55256

Any input received from the host during transmission of the short break signal is ignored.

8-1

&+$37(5�����5(027(�6(/)�7(67,1*

� ,1752'8&7,21This chapter describes two types of commands:

• Status Reporting commands

• Remote Self-Test commands

The Status Reporting commands report the status of the Touch Control Screen (TCS). TheRemote Self-Test commands activate and report the results of self-tests built into the TCS.Together, these commands enable the host to do confidence tests and ensure that TCScomponents are operating properly. The user can access these and other self-tests locally usingthe Test Screen.

NOTEAll status reports supported by the TCS are summarized in Chapter 3.

The term ’Expansion Memory’ is used in several commands. This refers to the 96K of nonvolatile memoryavailable to the user for Screen and Dynamic Font storage.

8-2

� 67$786�5(3257,1*�&200$1'6Status Reporting commands allow the host to determine the operational status of the TCS. TheStatus Reporting commands are:

• Power-Up Interrupt Mode command (Remote)

• Request Power Status command (Remote)

• Error Interrupt Mode command (Remote)

• Request Error Status command (Remote)

• Request TCS Identification command (Remote)

• Request TCS Status command (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-private commands.

8-3

� 3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�^)38,0`��5HPRWH�The Power-Up Interrupt Mode command is used to set or reset the Power-Up Interrupt Mode.

When the Power-Up Interrupt Mode is set, the TCS generates an interrupt to the host afterregaining power. This interrupt can be used by the host to detect whether the integrity of the TCShas been disturbed by a loss of power during operation. The host can then act appropriately toensure that proper communication resumes with the user. This might entail resending commandsequences to the TCS or resending the previous display contents.

The default power-up interrupt sent by the TCS to the host is the command string:

<ESC>[>1n

When the Power-Up Interrupt Mode is reset, the TCS does not generate an interrupt to the hostafter the TCS regains power. The state of the Power-Up Interrupt Mode is preserved innonvolatile memory during power loss. This allows the TCS to remember whether a power-upinterrupt is to be generated at the next power-up.

The Power-Up Interrupt Mode can also be set or reset by the host using the Set Mode commandand Reset Mode command, respectively. (See Chapter 4.)

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

When the TCS is operating using the multidrop protocol, it will never send a power-up interrupt when itregains power. When regaining power, the TCS assumes it is Unaddressed and queues any power-upinterrupt in its output buffer until it is re-addressed by the host. See Chapter 2 for information about

multidrop protocol.

� '()$8/7

Reset. (TCS does not send power-up interrupt.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>4l

Resets the Power-Up Interrupt Mode. (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l",ASCII 6C hex.)

<ESC>[>4h

Sets the Power-Up Interrupt Mode.

8-4

� 5HTXHVW�3RZHU�6WDWXV�&RPPDQG�^)536`��5HPRWH�The Request Power Status command allows the host to determine if the TCS has lost power orwas reset since the last Request Power Status command.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>0n

If the TCS has not lost power or been reset since the last Request Power Status command, theTCS responds to the Request Power Status command by sending the following string to thehost:

<ESC>[>0n

If the TCS has lost power or been reset since the last Request Power Status command, theTCS responds with:

<ESC>[>1n

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

8-5

� (UURU�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�&RPPDQG�^)(,0`��5HPRWH�The Error Interrupt Mode command is used to set or reset the Error Interrupt Mode.

When the Error Interrupt Mode is set, the TCS generates an interrupt to the host immediatelyupon detecting an error. The host can use this interrupt to detect whether the operational state ofthe TCS has been affected by an error. The host can then act appropriately to ensure that properoperation resumes. This might entail resending command sequences to the TCS.

For instance, an error interrupt is generated whenever screen memory (and hence ExpansionMemory) becomes full and indicates to the host that no more screens can be stored. The hostcould then delete or simplify an existing screen to create more room for the new screen.

When the Error Interrupt Mode is reset, the TCS does not generate an error interrupt when anerror is encountered. Instead, the host must poll the TCS using the Request Error Statuscommand to determine whether an error has occurred.

After the TCS sends an error interrupt, it automatically resets the Error Interrupt Mode. Thisgives the host time to finish processing the first interrupt before allowing the TCS to sendanother. The host must set the Error Interrupt Mode again when it is ready to be asynchronouslynotified of another error.

While Error Interrupt Mode is reset, the TCS holds any error until the host polls for error statusby sending the Request Error Status command. If subsequent errors occur before the host haspolled for the first one, the TCS does not report them to the host, although it continues to displaythem in the Operational Status Window. If the TCS is already holding an error when the host setsthe Error Interrupt Mode, an error interrupt is sent immediately.

The conditions that can cause an error, the messages the TCS displays in the Operational StatusWindow, and the error report the TCS sends to the host are described in Chapter 9.

� '()$8/7

Reset. (The TCS does not send error interrupts.)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>7l

Resets Error Interrupt Mode. (The terminator for the reset command is the letter "l", ASCII6C hex.)

<ESC>[>7h

Sets Error Interrupt Mode.

8-6

� 5HTXHVW�(UURU�6WDWXV�&RPPDQG�^)5(6`��5HPRWH�The Request Error Status command allows the host to poll the TCS to determine whether a newerror has occurred. This command is of use only when the Error Interrupt Mode is reset. Whenthe Error Interrupt Mode is set, the TCS does not hold any error status reports and will havealready sent out an asynchronous error interrupt, reporting the error to the host. Therefore, therewill be no new error for this command to report.

When the Error Interrupt Mode is reset, the TCS holds any new error until the host polls for itusing this command. Subsequent errors that occur between the time that the new error wasdetected and the host polls for the error status report are ignored by this command, although theycontinue to be reported within the Operational Status Window in the Setup Screen.

Each time the host polls for an error status report, the TCS responds with a report (which mayindicate that no new error has occurred). Polling for the error status report automatically clearsthe error condition being held by the TCS and instructs it to resume looking for the next newerror. The error condition is also cleared upon power-up or reset (however, a new error may bedetected during the automatic self-tests, in which case it will be held as described above).

The conditions that can cause an error, the report the TCS displays in the Operational StatusWindow, and the error report sent to the host are described in Chapter 9. (check)

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>11n

The status report returned to the Host in response to the above command has the followingformat:

<ESC>[>11;<Pe>n

<Pe> is a selective parameter indicating the error type. If <Pe> is 0, no errors.

If <Pe> is 1, RAM test error

If <Pe> is 2, Nonvolatile memory checksum error

If <Pe> is 3, ROM checksum error

If <Pe> is 4, Touch panel error

If <Pe> is 5, Communications framing error

If <Pe> is 6, Communications overrun error

If <Pe> is 7, Communications parity error

If <Pe> is 8, Communications buffer overflow error

If <Pe> is 9, Expansion memory full error

If <Pe> is 10, Expansion memory uninitialized error

8-7

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If this command is sent while the Error Interrupt Mode is set, the TCS always responds with anindication that no new error has occurred, since it already reported the error on an interrupt basis.

� (;$03/(6

The host sends the Request Error Status command to determine whether an error has occurred:

<ESC>[>11n

If no errors have occurred since the TCS was powered-up, reset, or the previous Request ErrorStatus command was received, the TCS replies:

<ESC>[>11;0n

If an Touch Panel error has occurred, the TCS replies:

<ESC>[>11;4n

If a communications parity error and a communications framing error have occurred, the TCSreplies with the first new error (the parity error) since it was last powered up, reset or polled:

<ESC>[>11;7n

8-8

� 5HTXHVW�7&6�,GHQWLILFDWLRQ�&RPPDQG�>'$@��5HPRWH�The Request TCS Identification command allows the host to determine the following informationabout the TCS:

• The type of TCS with which it is communicating

• The firmware version installed in the TCS

• The programmable options installed in the TCS

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

This command has two equivalent forms:

<ESC>[c

<ESC>[0c

Either string requests TCS identification. The TCS responds with the following string:

<ESC>[<Pt>;<Pv>;<Pm>;<Pd>;<Pw>;<Po>c

<Pt> is the TCS type.

If <Pt> is 2, 1030 Series

If <Pt> is 3, 1050 Series

<Pv> is the firmware version, given as two digits mn, meaning the TCS has firmwareversion m.n installed.

<Pm> designates the number of bytes in decimal of Expansion Memory installed.

If <Pm> is n, that number of bytes are installed

<Pd> is the Expansion Memory device type.

If <Pd> is 0, NVRAM

<Pw> is the write protection status of Expansion Memory.

If <Pw> is 0, write protection disabled (can write)

<Po> is a reserved parameter.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

8-9

� (;$03/(

An example of a TCS identification sequence sent to the host in response to this command is:

<ESC>[2;10;98304;0;0;0c

The TCS type is Model 1030 (2), with firmware version 1.0(10) containing 96K bytes (98304) ofExpansion Memory.

8-10

� 5HTXHVW�7&6�6WDWXV�&RPPDQG�>'65@��5HPRWH�The Request TCS Status command allows the host to determine the operational status of theTCS.

The TCS responds to the Request TCS Status command by indicating whether it has had amalfunction since it was last powered-up or reset. A malfunction is any error the TCS detects,either during self-test or normal operation. If an error has occurred, the TCS attempts to continueoperating. To identify the type of error that occurred, the host may send the Request Error Statuscommand.

The status returned by this command does not indicate what type of error has occurred, nor is thestatus returned affected by the Request Error Status command. Once any error has occurred, thestatus returned by this command continues to indicate a malfunction until cleared by cycling thepower or sending a reset.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[5n

If no malfunction has occurred in the TCS since the TCS was last powered-up or reset, theTCS responds to this command by sending the following string to the host:

<ESC>[0n

If a malfunction has occurred in the TCS since the TCS was last powered-up or reset, theTCS responds by sending the following string:

<ESC>[3n

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Format command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Format command description in Chapter 4 for details.

� (;$03/(

<ESC>[5n

This control string from the host requests the operational status of the TCS. If no malfunctionhas occurred since the TCS was last powered-up or reset, the TCS responds by sending thestring:

<ESC>[0n

8-11

� 5(027(�6(/)�7(67�&200$1'6The Remote Self-Test commands activate and report on self-tests built into the TCS. These testsverify that selected parts of the TCS are operating correctly. The Remote Self-Test commandsare:

• Continuous Integrity Test command (Local/Remote)

• Request ROM Test Report command (Remote)

• Request Nonvolatile Memory Test Report command (Remote)

• Request RAM Test Report command (Remote)

• Request Touch Panel Test Report command (Remote)

These commands are described in detail in the following pages. For ease of reference, eachcommand description begins on a new page.

NOTEWhere applicable, command names are followed by the appropriate mnemonic. Mnemonics in squarebrackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in braces {} are ANSI-compatible, TCS-private

commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DECprivate commands.

8-12

� &RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\�7HVW�&RPPDQG�^)&O7`��/RFDO�5HPRWH�The Continuous Integrity Test command places the TCS into the Continuous Integrity Test,which is a continuous testing loop that verifies proper operation of the TCS electronics. TheContinuous Integrity Test command activates the following tests sequentially in a continuouslyrepeating cycle:

• ROM Checksum test

• Nonvolatile Memory Checksum test

• RAM test

• Touch Panel closure test

NOTEThe ROM Checksum Test, the Nonvolatile Memory Checksum Test, and the RAM Test are the same as

those described in the Installation Guide under the heading, Power-Up Sequence.

Once the Continuous Integrity Test is activated, it can be terminated locally by pressing the SETUP key on the optional keyboard, or terminated remotely by performing a Reset command.

When the test begins, any errors detected since the TCS was last powered-up or reset are clearedand test execution begins.

� 5(68/76

The test displays the following information on the screen:

• Elapsed time since test started

• Overall pass/fail indicator

• Number of test passes completed

• Number of ROM checksum errors

• Number of nonvolatile memory checksum errors

• Number of RAM failures

• Number of Touch Panel Test failures

• Last faulty ROM checksum, reference designator of faulty ROM

• Last faulty nonvolatile memory checksum, reference designator of faulty nonvolatile memorydevice

• Last faulty RAM address, data sent and received, reference designator of faulty RAM

• RAM data pattern failure history

• Touch Panel Closure Test touch cell failure

8-13

All checksums, addresses, data sent, data received, and failure history values are displayed inhexadecimal. All other numbers are displayed in decimal.

The RAM data pattern failure history contains a l in each bit position where a data error has beendetected throughout the history of the Continuous Integrity Test.

Expansion Memory is always tested as part of the nonvolatile memory checksum test.

To obtain results remotely, the host must send the TCS the control string for one of the RequestTest Report commands described later in this chapter.

When the test is entered locally (through the Setup Screen), input from the host is still received,but is not processed (similar to operation in the Setup Screen). If the host continues to send datato the TCS, eventually the input buffer becomes full and the TCS stalls the host. For this reason,when the test is entered locally, it is not possible for the host to get test results remotely while thetest is in progress.

When the test is entered remotely, input from the host is still received and processed normally.The only commands from the host that are useful during the Continuous Integrity Test are theRequest Test Report and the Reset commands. Any other input from the host could corrupt thetest results displayed on the screen.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

The user issues the Continuous Integrity Test command from the Setup Screen by entering theTest Screen and then touching the CONTINUOUS INTEGRITY touchkey or pressing Shift/8 onthe optional keyboard.

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[2;9;<Ps>y

<Ps> is a selective parameter specifying the type of touch panel test to be performed.

If <Ps> is omitted or 0, the Touch Panel Closure Test is selected.

� 3266,%/(�(55256

If the touch panel is touched while the Touch Panel Closure Test is running, a touch panel failureis logged. Although host input is still processed after the Continuous Integrity Test command issent remotely, it is recommended that only the Request Test Report commands or Resetcommand be used. Any other commands could corrupt the Continuous Integrity Test display.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[2;9y

Activates the Continuous Integrity Test. The touch panel test run is the Touch Panel IntegrityTest.

8-14

� 5HTXHVW�520�7HVW�5HSRUW�&RPPDQG�^)5575`��5HPRWH�The Request ROM Test Report command allows the host to obtain detailed results of ROMtesting during the Continuous Integrity Test or automatic self-testing.

The host receives a response from this command when the Continuous Integrity Test is inprogress only if the Continuous Integrity Test was activated by the host rather than locally by theuser.

The TCS responds to the Request ROM Test Report command by sending to the host the ROMTest results obtained since the Continuous Integrity Test started or since the TCS was lastpowered-up or reset.

� '()$8/7

The test results are always reinitialized to zero at the start of the Continuous Integrity Test, whenpower is applied, or when the TCS is reset.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>6n

The TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>6;<Ploops>;<Pfail>;<Psum>n

<Ploops> indicates the number of ROM Tests completed since the Continuous IntegrityTest started or since the TCS was last powered-up or reset.

<Pfail> indicates the number of ROM Tests that detected a failure since the ContinuousIntegrity Test started or since the TCS was last powered-up or reset.

<Psum> is the decimal equivalent of the last failed checksum. The value of <Psum> is 0if no checksum errors have been detected.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Formal command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Formal command description in Chapter 4 for details.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[>6n

This control string from the host requests a ROM Test report. If only a power-up test hasbeen performed and no ROM checksum errors were detected, the TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>6;1;0;0n

If the Continuous Integrity Test has completed 12 loops and detected ROM checksum errorsduring 5 of those test loops and the most recent cell in error was 165, the TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>6;12;5;165n

8-15

� 5HTXHVW�1RQYRODWLOH�0HPRU\�7HVW�5HSRUW�&RPPDQG�^)5(75`��5HPRWH�The Request Nonvolatile Memory Test Report command allows the host to obtain detailedresults of nonvolatile testing during the Continuous Integrity Test or automatic self-testing.

The host receives a response from this command while the Continuous Integrity Test is inprogress only if the Continuous Integrity Test was activated by the host rather than locally by theuser.

The TCS responds to the Nonvolatile Memory Test Report command by sending to the host theROM Test results obtained since the Continuous Integrity Test started or since the TCS was lastpowered-up or reset.

� '()$8/7

The test results are always reinitialized to zero at the start of the Continuous Integrity Test, whenpower is applied, or when the TCS is reset.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>7n

The TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>7;<Ploops>;<Pfail>;<Psum>n

<Ploops> indicates the number of ROM Tests completed since the Continuous IntegrityTest started or since the TCS was last powered-up or reset.

<Pfail> indicates the number of nonvolatile memory checksum tests that detected afailure since the Continuous Integrity Test started or since the TCS was last powered-upor reset.

<Psum> is the decimal equivalent of the last failed checksum. The value of <Psum> is 0if no checksum errors have been detected.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Formal command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Formal command description in Chapter 4 for details.

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[>7n

This control string from the host requests a Nonvolatile Memory Test report. If only a power-up test has been performed and no nonvolatile memory checksum errors were detected, theTCS responds with:

<ESC>[>7;1;0;0n

8-16

If the Continuous Integrity Test has completed 112 loops and detected nonvolatile memorychecksum errors during 23 of those test loops and the most recent cell in error was 46, theTCS responds with:

<ESC>[>7;112;23;46n

8-17

� 5HTXHVW�5$0�7HVW�5HSRUW�&RPPDQG�^)55$75`��5HPRWH�The Request RAM Test Report command allows the host to obtain detailed results of RAMtesting during the Continuous Integrity Test or automatic self-testing. The host receives aresponse from this command while the Continuous Integrity Test is in progress only if theContinuous Integrity Test was activated by the host rather than locally by the user.

The TCS responds to the Request RAM Test Report command by sending to the host the RAMTest results obtained since the Continuous Integrity Test started or since the TCS was lastpowered-up or reset.

� '()$8/7

The test results are always reinitialized to zero at the start of the Continuous Integrity Test, whenpower is applied, or when the TCS is reset.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>8n

The TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>8;<Ploops>;<Pfail>;<Paddr>;<Perror>;<Phistory>n

<Ploops> indicates the number of RAM Tests completed since the Continuous IntegrityTest started or since the TCS was last powered-up or reset.

<Pfail> indicates the number of RAM Tests that detected a failure since the ContinuousIntegrity Test started or since the TCS was last powered-up or reset.

<Paddr> is the decimal equivalent of the last failed address. The value of <Paddr> is 0 ifno errors have been detected.

<Perror> is the decimal equivalent of the data value sent to the last failed addressexclusive-ORed with the data value received at the last failed address.

<Phistory> is the decimal equivalent of the data bit error history. The data bit errorhistory is a 16-bit word that a) contains a logic 0 in each bit position that has nevershown an error during all RAM testing and b) contains a logic 1 in any position that hascontained an error during RAM testing.

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Formal command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Formal command description in Chapter 4 for details.

8-18

� (;$03/(6

<ESC>[>8n

This control string from the host requests a RAM Test report. If only a power-up test hasbeen performed and no RAM errors were detected, the TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>8;1;0;0;0;0n

<ESC>[>8n

This continuous string from the host requests a RAM test report. Assume the ContinuousIntegrity Test has completed 3 loops and detected RAM errors during two of those loops.Also assume that the last address where an error was detected is FA003 hex (1024003decimal), and that the pattern sent was 75 hex and the pattern received was 4 hex (75XOR 04= 71 hex = 113 decimal). In addition, assume that at an earlier address the most significantdata bit contained an error. This gives the data bit history a value of F1 hex (71 OR 80 = F1hex = 241 decimal). In this case the TCS responds with:

<ESC>[>8;3;2;1024003;113;241n

8-19

� 5HTXHVW�7RXFK�3DQHO�7HVW�5HSRUW�&RPPDQG�^)5775`��5HPRWH�The Request Touch Panel Test Report command allows the host to obtain detailed results oftouch panel testing during the Continuous Integrity Test or automatic self-testing. The hostreceives a response from this command while the Continuous Integrity Test is in progress only ifthe Continuous Integrity Test was activated by the host rather than locally by the user.

The TCS responds to the Request Touch Panel Test Report command by sending to the host theTouch Panel Test results obtained since the Continuous Integrity Test started or since the TCSwas last powered-up or reset.

� '()$8/7

The test results are always reinitialized to zero at the start of the Continuous Integrity Test, whenpower is applied, or when the TCS is reset.

� 23(5$725�86$*(

None. (This is a remote command only.)

� +267�86$*(

<ESC>[>9n

The TCS responds with:

<ESC> [>9 ; <Ploops> ; <Pfail> ; <Perror> n

<Ploops> indicates the number of Touch Panel Tests completed since the ContinuousIntegrity Test started or since the TCS was last powered-up or reset.

<Pfail> indicates the number of Touch Panel Tests that detected a failure since theContinuous Integrity Test started or since the TCS was last powered-up or reset.

<Perror> is the decimal equivalent of the most recent touch cell closure (if the TouchPanel Closure Test was performed).

NOTEThe report may differ from the above format if the Reporting Formal command has been issued. Refer to

the Reporting Formal command description in Chapter 4 for details.

A-1

$33(1',;�$ 6$03/(�352*5$0

� 352*5$0�'(6&5,37,21With no modifications, the sample program in this appendix can run in BASIC BASICA*,QuickBASIC*, and GWBASIC* on the IBM PC*, PC/XT, or PC/AT or compatibles.

The program sets up a communication channel between the IBM PC and the TCS, and createsthree touch targets centered vertically on the TCS display. Touching any target reverses the videoin the target. Touching another target causes the first to revert to normal video, and reverses theone touched. Use Ctrl/Break to exit the program.

� 3+<6,&$/�&211(&7,21A null modem cable is required to connect the TCS to the host IBM PC. If a cable is notimmediately available, construction details follow. The sample program assumes the TCS isconnected to the PC serial port COM1.

� 6HWWLQJ�XS�WKH�,%0�3&Refer to the IBM PC hardware manual to locate the serial port. If the manual is not available, thefollowing information can help to locate the correct connector. A serial cable is provided withthe TCS and can be used to connect to the serial port on the PC.

� 6HWWLQJ�XS�WKH�7&6Refer to the ErgoTouch TCS Installation Guide and enter the Setup Screen. Select the followingcommunication parameters:

• Address: none

• Baud Rate: 9600

• Data Bits: 8

• Parity Enable: off

• Stop Bits: 1

• XON/XOFF: off

While in the Setup Screen, also verify that the following parameters are correctly set:

• Display Activity: on

• Local/Remote: remote

* BASICA. QuickBASIC. and GWBASIC are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.IBM PC is a trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.

A-2

� 7KH�6DPSOH�3URJUDP

100 ‘ ********************************************

105 ‘

110 ‘ Set up constants

115

120 es$ = CHR$(27) ‘ Control string introducer

125 cr$ = es$ + “[C” ‘ Move cursor right command

130 cd$ = es$ + “[B” ‘ Move cursor down command

135 ‘

140 DIM tkey$(3) ‘ Define array of touchkey

145 ‘ ‘ positions

150 tkey$(1) = “032” ‘ Position of 1st touchkey

155 tkey$(2) = “035” ‘ Position of 2nd touchkey

160 tkey$(3) = “038” ‘ Position of 3rd touchkey

165 ‘

170 ‘ ********************************************

175 ‘

180 ‘ Initialize variables

185 ‘

190 oldt% = 0 ‘ Last touchkey value

195 touch$ = “” ‘ Input from TCS

200 newt% = 0 ‘ New touchkey value

205 ‘

210 ‘ ********************************************

215 ‘

220 ‘ Open serial communication channels to TCS

225 ‘

230 CLOSE ‘ Close communication ports

235 OPEN “COM1:9600, N, 8, 1, CSO, DSO” AS #1 ‘ Open communications port

240 ‘

245 ‘

250 ‘ *********************************************

255 ‘

260 ‘ Set up TCS modes

265 ‘

270 PRINT #1, es$;”[2s”; ‘ Select displayed screen

275 PRINT #1, es$;”[3s”; ‘ Initialize screen

280 PRINT #1, es$;”[;;13w; ‘ Set terminator char to <CR>

285 PRINT #1, es$;”[>1l”; ‘ Polled touch mode off

290 PRINT #1, es$;”[>2l”; ‘ Enable touch input

A-3

295 PRINT #1, es$;”[12h”; ‘ Local Echo mode off

300 PRINT #1, es$;”[1v”; ‘ Turn off cursor

305 PRINT #1, es$;”[3z”; ‘ Display activity on

310 ‘

315 ‘ Set up TCS character sizes and touch panel

320 ‘

325 PRINT #1, es$;”[1;1H”; ‘ Position cursor

330 PRINT #1, es$;”#2”; ‘ Double-sized line

335 ‘

340 PRINT #1, es$;”[>2n”; : INPUT #1, touch$ ‘ Wait for buffer to clear

345 ‘

350 PRINT #1, es$;”[5;1H”; ‘ Position cursor

355 FOR i% = 1 TO 19 ‘ Create double wide region

360 PRINT #1, es$;”6”; ‘ Double-width lines

365 PRINT #1, es$;”[B”; ‘ Move down one line

370 NEXT i%

375 ‘

380 PRINT #1, es$;”[>2n”; : INPUT #1, touch$ ‘ Wait for buffer to clear

385 ‘

390 ‘ *********************************************

395 ‘

400 ‘ Initialize Touchkeys

405 ‘

410 PRINT #1, es$;”[4u”; ‘ Set all touchkeys to dead

415 ‘

420 FOR i% = 1 TO 3

425 PRINT #1, es$;”[5;”;tkey$(i%);”;3;2u”; ‘ Build touchkey

430 PRINT #1, es$;”[4;”;tkey$(i%);”;1u”; ‘ Set touchkey type

435 PRINT #1, es$;”[6;”;tkey$(i%);”;4u”; ‘ Draw target

440 ‘

445 PRINT #1, es$;”[>2n”; : INPUT #1, touch$ ‘ Wait for buffer to clear

450 NEXT i%

455 ‘

460 PRINT #1, es$;”[>“;tkey$(1);”H”; ‘ Position cursor

465 PRINT #1, cd$;cd$;cr$;”ONE”; ‘ Label first target

470 PRINT #1, es$;”[>“;tkey$(2);”H”; ‘ Position cursor

475 PRINT #1, cd$; cd$; cr$; “TWO”; ‘ Label second target

480 PRINT #1, es$;”[>“;tkey$(3);”H”; ‘ Position cursor

485 PRINT #1, cd$;cd$;cr$;”THREE”; ‘ Label third target

490 ‘

495 PRINT #1, es$;”[>2n”; : INPUT #1, touch$ ‘ Wait for buffer to clear

500 ‘

A-4

505 ‘************************************************

510 ‘

515 ‘ Draw Rest of Display

520 ‘

525 PRINT #1, es$;”[1;11H”; ‘ Position cursor

530 PRINT #1, “Touch Control Screen”; ‘ Top of double-sized line

535 PRINT #1, es$;”#2; ‘ Copy to bottom half.

540 ‘

545 PRINT #1, es$;”[5;3H”; ‘ Position cursor

550 PRINT #1, es$;”[6; 10; 36; 2t”; ‘ Draw outline

555 ‘

560 PRINT #1, es$;”[20;7H”; ‘ Position cursor

565 PRINT #1, “A light touch is all it takes.”; ‘ Print text

570 ‘

575 ‘ ************************************************

580 ‘

585 ‘ Get user input

590 ‘

595 INPUT #1, touch$ ‘ Get touch input from TCS

600 ‘

605 start% = INSTR(1, touch$, es$+”[>2;”) + 5 ‘ Find touchkey number

610 touch$ = MID$(touch$, start%, 3) ‘ Extract touchkey touched

615 ‘

620 ‘ Update the display

625 FOR i% = 1 to 3

630 IF touch$ = tkey$(i%) THEN newt% = i%

635 NEXT i%

640 ‘

645 PRINT #1, es$;”[9;”tkey$(newt%);”;1;7u”; ‘ Reverse new touchkey

650 IF oldt% = 0 THEN GOTO 665 ‘ Determine if first use

655 PRINT #1, es$;”[9;”;tkey$(oldt%);”;1;7u”; ‘ Reset old touchkey

660 ‘

665 oldt% = newt% ‘ Old touch is now new touch

670 GOTO 595 ‘ Start over

675 END

B-1

$33(1',;�% &200$1'�6800$5<�7$%/(

� ,1752'8&7,21This appendix contains a table that summarizes all TCS commands and provides commonlyneeded information about each command. Commands listed here are fully documented in theindicated chapters of this manual.

The Command Summary Table groups the commands according to related functions. Whereapplicable, the command summary includes mnemonics, host usage, and TCS response.Commands that are Local only have no Host Usage indicated. If the command elicits a TCSresponse, the response is given below the command.

The commands are grouped according to the following functions and are presented in the orderin which they are covered in this manual:

• TCS Mode commands

• Setup Screen commands

• Communication commands

• Screen Memory commands

• Character Set and Character Font commands

• Character Displaying commands

• Character Interpretation commands

• Cursor commands

• Screen Appearance commands

• Touch Panel commands

• Region commands

• Keyboard commands

• Status Reporting commands

• Remote Self-Test commands

NOTEMnemonics in square brackets [] are ANSI-specified commands. Mnemonics in brace {} are ANSI-

compatible, TCS-private commands. Mnemonics in parentheses () are ANSI-compatible, DEC-privatecommands. Optional parameters are represented in angle brackets (e.g., <Ps>).

B-2

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

7&6�0RGH�&RPPDQGV

5HVHW�0RGH�>50@

)RU�$16,�VSHFLILHG�PRGHV �(6&!�>��3V!����������3V!�O

)RU�'(&�SULYDWH�PRGHV �(6&!�>�"��3V!����������3V!�O

)RU�7&6�SULYDWH�PRGHV �(6&!�>�!��3V!����������3V!�O

6HW�0RGH�>60@

)RU�$16,�VSHFLILHG�PRGHV �(6&!�>��3V!����������3V!�K

)RU�'(&�SULYDWH�PRGHV �(6&!�>�"��3V!����������3V!�K

)RU�7&6�SULYDWH�PRGHV �(6&!�>�!��3V!����������3V!�K

6HWXS�6FUHHQ�&RPPDQGV

6HWXS�/RFNRXW�0RGH�^)68/0` �(6&!�>�!���O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>�!���K��VHW�

6DYH�6HWXS�^)668` �(6&!�>��]

5HFDOO�6HWXS�^)568` �(6&!�>���]

5HVHW�>5,6@ �(6&!��3V!�F

�3V!�����������RPLWWHG� �VRIW��������� �KDUG

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�&RPPDQGV

$GGUHVV �/RFDO�RQO\�

%DXG�5DWH �/RFDO�RQO\�

'DWD�%LWV �/RFDO�RQO\�

3DULW\�(QDEOH �/RFDO�RQO\�

3DULW\�6HQVH �/RFDO�RQO\�

6WRS�%LWV �/RFDO�RQO\�

;21�;2))�0RGH �/RFDO�RQO\�

/RFDO�5HPRWH�0RGH �/RFDO�RQO\�

7UDQVPLW�0RGH �/RFDO�RQO\�

+DUGZDUH�+DQGVKDNH �/RFDO�RQO\�

B-3

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�&RPPDQGV

5HSRUWLQJ�)RUPDW�^)5)` �(6&!�>�3�!����3�!����3�!�Z

�3�!��)LUVW�LQWURGXFHU

)LUVW�LQWURGXFHU�'HIDXOW� ��(6&!�����GHFLPDO�

�3�!��6HFRQG�LQWURGXFHU

6HFRQG�LQWURGXFHU�'HIDXOW� �>����GHFLPDO�

�3�!��7HUPLQDWRU

7HUPLQDWRU�'HIDXOW� �QRQH

&OHDU�8VHU�,QSXWV�^)&8,` �(6&!�>���]

6FUHHQ�0HPRU\�&RPPDQGV

OQLWLDOL]H�6FUHHQ�^),6` �(6&!�>��V

6HOHFW�6FUHHQ�^)66` �(6&!�>�����3VFU!�V

�3VFU!�

���RPLWWHG� �6HOHFW�'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ�IRU�HGLWLQJ

��WR����� �6HOHFW�D�6WRUHG�6FUHHQ�IRU�HGLWLQJ

&RS\�6FUHHQ�^)&6` �(6&!�>����3VUF!���3GHVW!��������3GHVW!�V

�3VUF!�

�� �&RS\�IURP�'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ

��WR����� �&RS\�IURP�D�6WRUHG�6FUHHQ

�3GHVW!�

���RPLWWHG� �&RS\�WR�'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ

��WR����� �&RS\�WR�D�6WRUHG�6FUHHQ

'HOHWH�6FUHHQ�^)'6`� �(6&!�>����3VFU!��������3VFU!�V

�3VFU!�

���RPLWWHG� �QR�VFUHHQV�GHOHWHG

��WR����� �6WRUHG�6FUHHQ�WR�GHOHWH

'HOHWH�$OO�6FUHHQV�^)'$6` �(6&!�>���V

B-4

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

6FUHHQ�0HPRU\�&RPPDQGV

5HDG�6FUHHQ�0HPRU\�5HPDLQLQJ^)5605`

�(6&!�>!���Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!������3VX!����3EX!����3VU!����3EU!�Q

�3VX!��QXPEHU�RI�VFUHHQV�LQ�XVH

�3EX!��E\WHV�RI�VFUHHQ�PHPRU\�LQ�XVH

�3VU!��QXPEHU�RI�VFUHHQV�UHPDLQLQJ�WR�EH�XVHG

�3EU!��E\WHV�RI�VFUHHQ�PHPRU\�UHPDLQLQJ

5HDG�6FUHHQ�([LVWHQFH�^)56(` �(6&!�>!������3VFU!�Q

�3VFU!�

���RPLWWHG� �GRHV�'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ�H[LVW"

��WR����� �GRHV�WKLV�6WRUHG�6FUHHQ�H[LVW"

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!�������Q��LI�VFUHHQ�GRHV�QRW�H[LVW�

�(6&!�>!������Q��LI�VFUHHQ�H[LVWV�

&KDUDFWHU�6HW�DQG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�&RPPDQGV

6HOHFW�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�>6&6@ �62!��([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�

�6,!��6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�

0DS�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�^)0&)` �(6&!����PDS�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LQWR

6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW��GHIDXOW�

�(6&!����PDS�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�O�LQWR

6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�(6&!����PDS�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW���LQWR

6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�(6&!����PDS�6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LQWR

6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�(6&!����PDS�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LQWR

([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�(6&!���PDS�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW���LQWR

([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�(6&!����PDS�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW���LQWR

([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW

�(6&!����PDS�6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LQWR

([WHQGHG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW��GHIDXOW�

B-5

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&KDUDFWHU�6HW�DQG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�&RPPDQGV

&RS\�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�^)&&)` �(6&!�>�3VUF!���3GHVW!�`

�3VUF!�

���RPLWWHG� �6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW

�� �'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�� �'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�� �6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW

�3GHVW!�

���RPLWWHG� �LQYDOLG�GHVWLQDWLRQ�IRQW

�� �'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�� �'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�� �LQYDOLG�GHVWLQDWLRQ�IRQW

'RZQ�/LQH�/RDG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW �(6&!�3��3IQ!����3FQ!����3H!�^��6[ESO!�

^)'/&)` �6[ES�!��������6[ESQ!��(6&!�?

�3IQ!�

���RPLWWHG� �FKDQJH�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�O

�� �FKDQJH�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�� �FKDQJH�'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW��

�3FQ!�

���RPLWWHG� �VWDUW�ORDGLQJ�DW���UG�FKDUDFWHU

�� �VWDUW�ORDGLQJ�DW��VW�FKDUDFWHU��VWDUW��RI�G\QDPLF�FKDUDFWHU�IRQW

�� �VWDUW�ORDGLQJ�DW��QG�FKDUDFWHU�Q� �VWDUW�ORDGLQJ�DW�QWK�FKDUDFWHU

�3H!�

���RPLWWHG� �HUDVH�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV�LQ�G\QDPLF�FKDUDFWHU�IRQW

�� �HUDVH�RQO\�ZKHUH�QHZ�FKDUDFWHUV�DUH�WR�EH�ORDGHG

�6[ESO!��VL[HO�ELW�SDWWHUQ�IRU�ILUVW�FKDUDFWHU

�6[ES�!��VL[HO�ELW�SDWWHUQ�IRU�VHFRQG�FKDUDFWHU

�6[ESQ!��VL[HO�ELW�SDWWHUQ�IRU�ODVW�FKDUDFWHU

B-6

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&KDUDFWHU�'LVSOD\LQJ�&RPPDQGV

'LVSOD\�'RXEOH�:LGWK�/LQH�'(&':/�

�(6&!���

'LVSOD\�'RXEOH�6L]H�/LQH��'(&'+/� �(6&!����

3ODFH�'RXEOH�6L]H�/LQH�^)'6/` �(6&!����

'LVSOD\�1RUPDO�/LQH��'(&6:/� �(6&!����

'UDZ�%DU�)RU�%DU�&KDUW�^)'%%` �(6&!>�����3V!���3U!���3G!���3W!�[

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �����LI�YHUWLFDO�EDU�

����LI�KRUL]RQWDO�EDU�

Q� �EDU�OHQJWK�LQ�FKDUDFWHUV��ZKHQ������ILOOHG

�3U!�

RPLWWHG� ��

Q� �SRUWLRQ�RI�EDU�WR�ILOO��LQ�WHQWKV�RI�SHUFHQW

�3G!�

���RPLWWHG� �GUDZ�YHUWLFDO�EDU

�� �GUDZ�KRUL]RQWDO�EDU

�3W!�

���RPLWWHG� �O

Q� �WKLFNQHVV�RI�EDU��LQ�FKDUDFWHUV

(UDVH�&KDUDFWHU�>(&+@ �(6&!�>�3Q!�;

�3Q!�

���RPLWWHG� �HUDVH�FKDUDFWHU�DW�FXUVRU

Q� �HUDVH�Q�FKDUDFWHUV�DW�DQG�IROORZLQJ�FXUVRU

(UDVH�LQ�/LQH�>(/@ �(6&!�>�3V!�.

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �HUDVH�IURP�FXUVRU�WKURXJK�HQG

�� �HUDVH�IURP�VWDUW�WKURXJK�FXUVRU

�� �HUDVH�WKH�HQWLUH�OLQH

B-7

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&KDUDFWHU�'LVSOD\LQJ�&RPPDQGV

(UDVH�LQ�'LVSOD\�>('@ �(6&!�>�3V!�-

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �HUDVH�IURP�FXUVRU�WKURXJK�HQG

�� �HUDVH�IURP�VWDUW�WKURXJK�FXUVRU

�� �HUDVH�WKH�HQWLUH�VFUHHQ

&KDUDFWHU�,QWHUSUHWDWLRQ�&RPPDQGV

$XWR�:UDS�$URXQG�0RGH�'(&$:0�

�(6&!�>"���O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>"���K��VHW�

6HQG�5HFHLYH�0RGH�>650@

�/RFDO�(FKR�RQ� �(6&!�>����O��UHVHW�

�/RFDO�(FKR�RII� �(6&!�>����K��VHW�

1HZ�/LQH�0RGH�>/10@ �(6&!�>����O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>����K��VHW�

12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH

^)1&$0`

�(6&!�>!���O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>!���K��VHW�

1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGH�^)15&` �(6&!�>����3V!�]

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �RII

�� �'DQLVK

�� �'XWFK

�� �)UHQFK

�� �&DQDGLDQ

�� �)LQQLVK

�� �*HUPDQ

�� �,WDOLDQ

�� 6SDQLVK

�� �6ZHGLVK

��� �6ZLVV

��� �8.

B-8

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&KDUDFWHU�,QWHUSUHWDWLRQ�&RPPDQGV

6HW�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�>6*5@ �(6&!�>�3V!��������3V!�P

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �DOO�RII

�� �KLJKOLJKW

��� �WXUQ�RII�KLJKOLJKW

�� �XQGHUOLQH

��� �WXUQ�RII�XQGHUOLQH

�� �EOLQN

��� �WXUQ�RII�EOLQN

�� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR

��� �WXUQ�RII�UHYHUVH�YLGHR

�� �FRQFHDO

��� �WXUQ�RII�FRQFHDO

&RORU�7&6�

�������� �VHOHFW�IRUHJURXQG�FRORU

�������� �VHOHFW�EDFNJURXQG�FRORU

�������� �VHOHFW�FRQFHDO�FRORU

6FUROOLQJ�5HJLRQ��'(&67%0� �(6&!�>�3W!���3E!�U

�3W!�

���RPLWWHG� �WRS�OLQH�LV��

Q� �WRS�OLQH�LV�Q

�3E!�

���RPLWWHG� �ERWWRP�OLQH�LV���

Q� �ERWWRP�OLQH�LV�Q

2ULJLQ�0RGH��'(&20� �(6&!�>"���O��UHVHW�

�(6&!>"�K��VHW�

B-9

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&XUVRU�&RPPDQGV

0RYH�&XUVRU�WR�$EVROXWH�3RVLWLRQ>&83@

�(6&!�>�3O!����3F!�+

>+93@ �(6&!>�3O!��3F!I

�3O!�

���RPLWWHG� �OLQH��

Q� �OLQH�Q

�3F!�

���RPLWWHG� �FROXPQ��

Q� �FROXPQ�Q

0RYH�&XUVRU�WR�7RXFKNH\^)0&77.`

�(6&!>!�3N!+

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �PRYH�WR�WRXFKNH\��

Q� �QXPEHU�RI�WRXFKNH\

0RYH�&XUVRU�)RUZDUG�>&8)@ �(6&!�>�3Q!�&

�3Q!�

���RPLWWHG� �RQH�FKDUDFWHU

Q� �Q�FKDUDFWHUV

0RYH�&XUVRU�%DFNZDUG�>&8%@ �(6&!�>�3Q!�'

�3Q!�

���RPLWWHG� �RQH�FKDUDFWHU

Q� �Q�FKDUDFWHUV

0RYH�&XUVRU�8S�>&88@ �(6&!�>�3Q!�$

�3Q!�

���RPLWWHG� �RQH�OLQH������Q� �Q�OLQHV

0RYH�&XUVRU�'RZQ�>&8'@ �(6&!�>�3Q!�%

�3Q!�

���RPLWWHG� �RQH�OLQH

Q� �Q�OLQHV

1H[W�/LQH�>1(/@ �(6&!�(�RU��1(/!

,QGH[�>,1'@ �(6&!�'�RU��,1'!

B-10

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&XUVRU�&RPPDQGV

5HYHUVH�,QGH[�>5,@ �(6&!�0�RU��5,!

5HDG�&XUVRU�3RVLWLRQ�>&35@ ��(6&!�>��Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>�3O!���3F!�5

�3O!�

������� �UHODWLYH�OLQH�QXPEHU�RI�FXUVRU��,I�2ULJLQ

0RGH�LV�VHW��OLQH�O�LV�DW�WKH�WRS�RI�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQ��LI

2ULJLQ�0RGH�LV�UHVHW��OLQH���LV�DW�WRS�RI�VFUHHQ�

�3F!�

O�������QRUPDO�OLQHV�

��������GRXEOH�ZLGWK�RU�GRXEOH�VL]H�OLQHV�

1XPHULF�SDUDPHWHU�UHSUHVHQWLQJ�FKDUDFWHU�FROXPQ

RI�FXUVRU�

5HDG�&KDUDFWHU�8QGHU�&XUVRU^)5&8&`

�(6&!>!�Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!������3FK!�Q

�3FK!�

'HFLPDO�YDOXH�RI�FKDUDFWHU�XQGHU�FXUVRU�

5HDG�$WWULEXWHV�8QGHU�&XUVRU^)5$8&`

�(6&!�>!��Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!����3KL!���3XO!���3EOLQN!���3UY!���3FRQFO!�Q

�3KL!�

�� �KLJKOLJKW�DFWLYH

��� �KLJKOLJKW�LQDFWLYH

�3XO!�

�� �XQGHUOLQH�DFWLYH

��� �XQGHUOLQH�LQDFWLYH

�3EOLQN!�

�� �EOLQN�DFWLYH

��� �EOLQN�LQDFWLYH

�3UY!�

�� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR�DFWLYH

��� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR�LQDFWLYH

�3FRQFO!�

B-11

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

&XUVRU�&RPPDQGV

7&6�5HVSRQVH��FRQWLQXHG�

�� �FRQFHDO�DFWLYH

��� �FRQFHDO�LQDFWLYH

&RORU�7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!>!����3KL!��3XO!��3EOLQN!��3UY!��3FRQFO!��3IJ!��3EJ!��3FF!�Q

�3IJ!���������� �FXUUHQW�IRUHJURXQG�FRORU

�3EJ!���������� �FXUUHQW�EDFNJURXQG�FRORU

�3FRQFO!���������� �FXUUHQW�FRQFHDO�FRORU

&XUVRU�7\SH�^)&7` �(6&!�>�3V!��������3V!�Y

�3V!�

9LVLELOLW\

���RPLWWHG� �YLVLEOH

�� �LQYLVLEOH

6KDSH

�� �XQGHUOLQH

�� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR�EORFN

$FWLYLW\

�� �QRQ�EOLQNLQJ

�� �VORZ�EOLQNLQJ

�� �IDVW�EOLQNLQJ

6FUHHQ�$SSHDUDQFH�&RPPDQGV

6FUHHQ�%DFNJURXQG�0RGH�'(&6&10�

�(6&!�>"���O��QRUPDO�

�(6&!�>"���K��UHYHUVH�

'LVSOD\�$FWLYLW\�^)'$` �(6&!�>�����3V!�]

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �RQ

�� �RII

�� �WLPHRXW

B-12

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

7RXFK�3DQHO�&RPPDQGV

%XLOG�7RXFKNH\�^)%7.` �(6&!>���3N!��3K!��3Z!X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �FOHDU�DOO�WRXFKNH\V

Q� �QXPEHU�RI�PDVWHU�FHOO�LQ�WRXFKNH\

�3K!�

���RPLWWHG� ��

Q� �KHLJKW�LQ�WRXFK�FHOOV

�3Z!�

���RPLWWHG� ��

Q� �ZLGWK�LQ�WRXFK�FHOOV

&OHDU�7RXFKNH\�^)&7.` �(6&!�>����3N!�X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �FOHDU�DOO�WRXFKNH\V

Q� �QXPEHU�RI�PDVWHU�FHOO�LQ�WRXFKNH\

7RXFKNH\�7\SH�^)7.7` �(6&!�>����3N!���3W!�X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �VHW�DOO�WRXFKNH\V

Q� �WRXFKNH\�ZKRVH�W\SH�LV�EHLQJ�DVVLJQHG

�3W!�

���RPLWWHG� �GHDG�NH\

�� �SUHVV�NH\

�� �DXWR�UHSHDW�NH\

�� �WRJJOH�NH\

B-13

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

7RXFK�3DQHO�&RPPDQGV

7RXFKNH\�9LVXDO�([WHQW�^)7.9(` �(6&!>���3N!��3Y!X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �VHW�DOO�WRXFKNH\V

Q� �WRXFKNH\�ZKRVH�H[WHQW�LV�EHLQJ�DVVLJQHG

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �QR�YLVXDO�UHVSRQVH�ZKHQ�SUHVVHG

�� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�YLGHR�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

7RXFKNH\�$XGLEOH�$WWULEXWH�^)7.$$` �(6&!�>�����3V!����3N!�X

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �VLOHQW

�� �EHHS

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �VHW�DOO�WRXFKNH\V

Q� �WRXFKNH\�ZKRVH�DWWULEXWH�LV�EHLQJ�DVVLJQHG

$XWR�5HSHDW�5DWH�^)$55` �(6&!�>����3Q!�X

�3Q!�

���RPLWWHG� �RII

��WR����� �WHQWKV�RI�VHFRQGV

3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�^)370` �(6&!>!��O��UHVHW�

�(6&!>!��K��VHW�

5HDG�7RXFKNH\�6WDWXV�^)57.6` �(6&!>!���3N!Q

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �SROO�IRU�QH[W�WRXFK�UHSRUW

Q� �WRXFKNH\�ZKRVH�VWDWXV�LV�WR�EH�UHSRUWHG

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!������3N!�Q

�LI�([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�UHVHW�

�(6&!>!���3N!��3V!Q

�LI�([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�VHW�

�3N!�

B-14

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

7RXFK�3DQHO�&RPPDQGV

7&6�5HVSRQVH��FRQWLQXHG�

���� �QR�WRXFKHV�WR�UHSRUW

QQQ� �WRXFKNH\�QXPEHU

�3V!�

�� �NH\�LV�WRJJOHG�RII

�� �NH\�LV�WRJJOHG�RQ

([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�^)(50` �(6&!�>!���O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>!���K��VHW�

7RXFK�3DQHO�/RFNRXW�0RGH�^)7/0` �(6&!�>!��O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>!��K��VHW�

5HJLRQ�&RPPDQGV

2XWOLQH�D�7RXFKNH\�^)27.` �(6&!�>�����3N!����3V!�X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �RXWOLQH�HQWLUH�VFUHHQ

Q� �WRXFKNH\�QXPEHU�WR�RXWOLQH

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �%R[W\SH�O�ERUGHU��RU�RXWOLQH�

�� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

�� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

�� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

�� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

2XWOLQH�D�5HJLRQ�^)25` �(6&!>���3O!��3F!��3E!W

�3�!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �OLQHV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�GRZQ

�3F!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �FROXPQV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�WR�ULJKW

�3E!�

���RPLWWHG� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU��RU�RXWOLQH�

�� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

B-15

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HJLRQ�&RPPDQGV

2XWOLQH�D�5HJLRQ�^)25`��FRQWLQXHG� �� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

�� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

�� �%R[W\SH���ERUGHU

&XVWRP�2XWOLQH�D�7RXFKNH\^)&27.`

�(6&!�>����3N!���3FK!�[

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �RXWOLQH�HQWLUH�VFUHHQ

Q� �WRXFKNH\�QXPEHU�WR�RXWOLQH

�3FK!�

RPLWWHG� ������QRUPDOO\�%R[W\SH���

Q� �YDOXH�RI��VW�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHU

&XVWRP�2XWOLQH�D�5HJLRQ�^)&25` �(6&!�>����3O!���3F!���3FK!�[

�3�!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �OLQHV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�GRZQ

�3F!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �FROXPQV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�WR�ULJKW

�3FK!�

RPLWWHG� ������QRUPDOO\�%R[W\SH���

Q� �YDOXH�RI��VW�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHU

0RGLI\�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D7RXFKNH\�^)0&$,7.`

�(6&!�>�����3N!����3Y!�X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �PRGLI\�HQWLUH�VFUHHQ

Q� �WRXFKNH\�QXPEHU�WR�PRGLI\

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �PRGLI\�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �PRGLI\�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �PRGLI\�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �PRGLI\�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

B-16

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HJLRQ�&RPPDQGV

0RGLI\�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D5HJLRQ�^)0&$,5`

�(6&!�>������3O!����3F!����3Y!�W

�3O!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �OLQHV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�GRZQ

�3F!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �FROXPQV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�WR�ULJKW

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �PRGLI\�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �PRGLI\�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �PRGLI\�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �PRGLI\�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

5HYHUVH�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ�D7RXFKNH\�^)5&$,7.`

�(6&!�>����3N!����3Y!����3D!����������3D!�X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �UHYHUVH�HQWLUH�VFUHHQ

Q� �WRXFKNH\�QXPEHU�WR�UHYHUVH

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�3D!�

���RPLWWHG� �UHYHUVH�UHYHUVH�YLGHR�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�KLJKOLJKW�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�XQGHUOLQH�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�EOLQN�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�UHYHUVH�YLGHR�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�FRQFHDO�DWWULEXWH

B-17

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HJLRQ�&RPPDQGV

5HYHUVH�&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�LQ5HJLRQ�^)5&$,5`

�(6&!�>�����3O!����3F!����3Y!����3D!��������3D!�W

�3O!�

��RPLWWHG ��

Q� �OLQHV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�GRZQ

�3F!��

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �FROXPQV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�WR�ULJKW

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �UHYHUVH�DWWULEXWH�RI�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�3D!�

���RPLWWHG� �UHYHUVH�UHYHUVH�YLGHR�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�KLJKOLJKW�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�XQGHUOLQH�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�EOLQN�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�UHYHUVH�YLGHR�DWWULEXWH

�� �UHYHUVH�FRQFHDO�DWWULEXWH

)LOO�D�7RXFKNH\�:LWK�D�&KDUDFWHU^))7.&`

�(6&!�>�����3N!����3Y!����3FK!�[

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �DOO�WRXFKNH\V

Q� �WRXFKNH\�QXPEHU�WR�ILOO

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �ILOO�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �ILOO�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �ILOO�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �ILOO�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�3FK!�

RPLWWHG� ������QRUPDOO\�JUD\�EORFN�

Q� �YDOXH�RI�ILOO�FKDUDFWHU

B-18

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HJLRQ�&RPPDQGV

)LOO�D�5HJLRQ�:LWK�D�&KDUDFWHU^))5&`

�(6&!�>�����3O!����3F!����3Y!����3FK!�[

�3O!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �OLQHV�LQ�UHJLRQ�IURP�FXUVRU�GRZQ

�3F!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �FROXPQV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�WR�ULJKW

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �ILOO�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �ILOO�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �ILOO�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �ILOO�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

�3FK!�

RPLWWHG� ������QRUPDOO\�JUD\�EORFN�

Q� �YDOXH�RI�ILOO�FKDUDFWHU

(UDVH�D�7RXFKNH\�^)(7.` �(6&!>���3N!��3Y!X

�3N!�

���RPLWWHG� �HUDVH�HQWLUH�VFUHHQ

Q� �WRXFKNH\�QXPEHU�WR�HUDVH

�3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �HUDVH�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV�LQ�NH\

�� �HUDVH�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �HUDVH�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �HUDVH�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV

(UDVH�D�5HJLRQ�^)(5` �(6&!�>����3O!���3F!���3Y!�W

�3,!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �OLQHV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�GRZQ

�3F!�

���RPLWWHG� ���

Q� �FROXPQV�LQ�UHJLRQ��IURP�FXUVRU�WR�ULJKW

B-19

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HJLRQ�&RPPDQGV

(UDVH�D�5HJLRQ�^)(5`��FRQWLQXHG� �3Y!�

���RPLWWHG� �HUDVH�DOO�FKDUDFWHUV�LQ�UHJLRQ

�� �HUDVH�LQQHU�FKDUDFWHUV

�� �HUDVH�ERUGHU�FKDUDFWHUV

.H\ERDUG�&RPPDQGV

.H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW�0RGH�>.$0@ �(6&!�>��O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>��K��VHW�

.H\SDG�0RGH��'(&.3$0� �(6&!� ��$SSOLFDWLRQ�0RGH�

�'(&.310� �(6&!!��1XPHULF�0RGH�

/RFDO�5HPRWH�0RGH �/RFDO�RQO\�

6HQG�/RQJ�%UHDN �/RFDO�RQO\�

6HQG�6KRUW�%UHDN �/RFDO�RQO\�

6WDWXV�5HSRUWLQJ�&RPPDQGV

3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�^)38O0` �(6&!�>!���O��UHVHW�

�(6&!>!�K��VHW�

5HTXHVW�3RZHU�6WDWXV�^)536` �(6&!�>!���Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!��Q��QR�UHVHW�RU�ORVV�RI�SRZHU�

�(6&!�>!��Q��UHVHW�RU�ORVV�RI�SRZHU�

(UURU�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�^)(O0` �(6&!�>!���O��UHVHW�

�(6&!�>!���K��VHW�

5HTXHVW�(UURU�6WDWXV�^)5(6` �(6&!>!���Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!�����3H!�Q

�3H!�

�� �QR�HUURUV�RU�PHPRU\�LV�YRODWLOH

O�� �5$0�7HVW�HUURU

�� �1RQYRODWLOH�0HPRU\�&KHFNVXP�HUURU

�� �520�&KHFNVXP�HUURU

�� �7RXFK�3DQHO�HUURU

�� �&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�)UDPLQJ�HUURU

�� �&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2YHUUXQ�HUURU

�� �&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�3DULW\�HUURU

�� �&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�%XIIHU�2YHUIORZ�HUURU

B-20

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HJLRQ�&RPPDQGV

7&6�5HVSRQVH��FRQWLQXHG�

�� �([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\�)XOO�HUURU

��� �([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\�8QLQLWLDOL]HG�HUURU

5HTXHVW�7&6�,GHQWLILFDWLRQ�>'$@ �(6&!�>F

�(6&!>�F

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>�3W!���3Y!���3P!���3G!���3Z!�

�3R!F

�3W!�

�� ������7&6

�� ������7&6

�3Y!�

PQ� �ILUPZDUH�YHUVLRQ�P�Q

�3P!�

Q� �E\WHV�RI�([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\����.�

�3G!�

� �195$0�([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\��RU�5$0�RU�QRQH�

�3Z!�

�� �([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\�ZULWDEOH

�3R!�

�UHVHUYHG�SDUDPHWHU

5HTXHVW�7&6�6WDWXV�>'65@ �(6&!�>��Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>��Q��QR�PDOIXQFWLRQ�

�(6&!�>��Q��PDOIXQFWLRQ�

5HPRWH�6HOI�7HVW�&RPPDQGV

&RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\�7HVW�^)&O7` �(6&!�>���������3V!�\

�3V!�

���RPLWWHG� �7RXFK�3DQHO�&ORVXUH�7HVW

B-21

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HPRWH�6HOI�7HVW�&RPPDQGV

5HTXHVW�520�7HVW�5HSRUW�^)5575` �(6&!>!�Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!�����3ORRSV!����3IDLO!����3VXP!�Q

�3ORRSV!�

1XPEHU�RI�520�FKHFNVXP�WHVWV�FRPSOHWHG�VLQFH�WKH�&RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\7HVW�VWDUWHG��RU�VLQFH�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3IDLO!�

1XPEHU�RI�520�FKHFNVXP�WHVWV�GHWHFWLQJ�D�IDLOXUH�VLQFH�WKH�&RQWLQXRXV,QWHJULW\�7HVW�ZDV�VWDUWHG��RU�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3VXP!�

'HFLPDO�HTXLYDOHQW�RI�ODVW�IDLOHG�FKHFNVXP�

,I����QR�HUURUV�GHWHFWHG�

5HTXHVW�1RQYRODWLOH�0HPRU\�7HVW5HSRUW�^)5(75`

�(6&!�>!���Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH �(6&!�>!������3ORRSV!����3IDLO!����3VXP!�Q

�3ORRSV!�

1XPEHU�RI�QRQYRODWLOH�PHPRU\�FKHFNVXP�WHVWV�FRPSOHWHG�VLQFH�WKH&RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\�7HVW�VWDUWHG��RU�VLQFH�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3IDLO!�

1XPEHU�RI�QRQYRODWLOH�PHPRU\�FKHFNVXP�WHVWV�GHWHFWLQJ�D�IDLOXUH�VLQFH�WKH&RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\�7HVW�ZDV�VWDUWHG��RU�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3VXP!�

'HFLPDO�HTXLYDOHQW�RI�ODVW�IDLOHG�FKHFNVXP�

,I�����QR�HUURUV�GHWHFWHG�

5HTXHVW�5$0�7HVW�5HSRUW^)55$75`

�(6&!�>!��Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>�!������3ORRSV!����3IDLO!����3DGGU!����3HUURU!�

�3KLVWRU\!�Q

�3ORRSV!�

1XPEHU�RI�5$0�WHVWV�FRPSOHWHG�VLQFH�WKH�&RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\�7HVWVWDUWHG��RU�VLQFH�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3IDLO!�

1XPEHU�RI�5$0�WHVWV�GHWHFWLQJ�D�IDLOXUH�VLQFH�WKH�&RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\7HVW�ZDV�VWDUWHG��RU�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3DGGU!�

B-22

7DEOH�%����6XPPDU\�RI�7&6�&RPPDQGV�*URXSHG�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�5HODWHG�)XQFWLRQV�FRQWLQXHG

&200$1'�01(021,& +267�86$*(�7&6�5(63216(

5HPRWH�6HOI�7HVW�&RPPDQGV

7&6�5HVSRQVH��FRQWLQXHG�

'HFLPDO�HTXLYDOHQW�RI�WKH�ODVW�IDLOHG�DGGUHVV��,I����QR�HUURUV�ZHUH�GHWHFWHG�

�3HUURU!�

'HFLPDO�HTXLYDOHQW�RI�WKH�GDWD�YDOXH�VHQW�WR�WKH�ODVW�IDLOHG�DGGUHVVH[FOXVLYH�25HG�ZLWK�WKH�GDWD�YDOXH�UHFHLYHG�DW�WKH�ODVW�IDLOHG�DGGUHVV�

�3KLVWRU\!�

'HFLPDO�HTXLYDOHQW�RI�WKH�GDWD�ELW�HUURU�KLVWRU\��D����ELW�ZRUG�WKDW�FRQWDLQVD�ORJLF���LQ�HDFK�ELW�SRVLWLRQ�WKDW�KDV�QHYHU�VKRZQ�DQ�HUURU�GXULQJ�DOO�5$0WHVWLQJ��FRQWDLQV�D�ORJLF���LQ�DQ\�ELW�SRVLWLRQ�WKDW�KDV�FRQWDLQHG�DQ�HUURUGXULQJ�5$0�WHVWLQJ�

5HTXHVW�7RXFK�3DQHO�7HVW�5HSRUW^)5775`

�(6&!�>!���Q

7&6�5HVSRQVH� �(6&!�>!������3ORRSV!����3IDLO!����3HUURU!�Q

�3ORRSV!�

1XPEHU�RI�WRXFK�SDQHO�WHVWV�FRPSOHWHG�VLQFH�WKH�&RQWLQXRXV�,QWHJULW\�7HVWVWDUWHG��RU�VLQFH�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3IDLO!�

1XPEHU�RI�WRXFK�SDQHO�WHVWV�GHWHFWLQJ�D�IDLOXUH�VLQFH�WKH�&RQWLQXRXV,QWHJULW\�7HVW�ZDV�VWDUWHG��RU�ODVW�SRZHU�XS�RU�UHVHW�

�3HUURU!�

'HFLPDO�HTXLYDOHQW�RI�WKH�PRVW�UHFHQW�WRXFK�FHOO�FORVXUH�

$33(1',;�& &86720�&+$5$&7(5�)2176

� ,1752'8&7,21The static character fonts supplied with the TCS (which provide the default contents for theStandard and Extended Character Sets) can be customized by the designer. This appendixdescribes the static character fonts and explains how they can be modified.

NOTEMany locations within the static character fonts are used for specific purposes by the TCS Setup Screen

and its subscreens. Replacing the static character fonts with custom characters is not recommendedwhenever dynamic character fonts can be used instead. Refer to Table C-3.

� 7KH�'LVWLQFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�&KDUDFWHU�6HWV�DQG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWVThe TCS has two 128-position character sets, called the Standard and Extended Character Sets.These two character sets convert incoming codes into displayable characters. For each codereceived from the host, there is a corresponding character within one of the two character sets.

The character sets contain data mapped into them from one of four character fonts. The fourcharacter fonts are the Static ASCII Character Font, the Static Special Character Font, andDynamic Character Fonts l and 2. At power up or reset, the TCS automatically maps the StaticASCII Character Font into the Standard Character Set and the Static Special Character Font intothe Extended Character Set. Several commands enable the programmer to map any font intoeither of the character sets, to copy any font into either of the dynamic character fonts, and todown-line load characters into either of the dynamic character fonts.

The static character fonts are stored in TCS firmware and can be changed at the factory only.

NOTEOnly the Static ASCII Character Font and the Static Special Character Font can be changed bycustomizing the PROM. Dynamic Character Fonts 1 and 2 can be changed only through TCS

programming.

7DEOH�&����6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW

Note:

In this table, the value of acharacter in hex can bedetermined by its row andcolumn position. Thecolumn number representsthe 16’s digit and the rownumber represents the 1’s.For example, character G isspecified as column 4, row7. Therefore, the value ofcharacter G is 47 hex.

The shaded characters inthis table show the ASCIImnemonics for therespective control codes;these mnemonics are neverdisplayed, except in theCommunications Monitor.

* Also the default contentsof the Standard CharacterSet and Dynamic CharacterFont 1. See Character Setsand Fonts in Section 5 fordetails.

7DEOH�&����6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW

Note:

In this table, the value of acharacter in hex can bedetermined by its row andcolumn position. The columnnumber represents the 1’s. Forexample, character ‘a’ isspecified as column A, row B.Therefore, the value ofcharacter ‘a’ is AB hex.

The shaded characters incolumns 8 and 9 containBoxtype characters that canonly be displayed by sendingthe Outline A Regioncommand. The shadedcharacter at location FF hex isnever displayed, except in theCommunications Monitor.

* Also the default contents ofthe Extended Character Setand Dynamic Character Font2. See Character Sets andFonts in Section 5 for details.

� &UHDWLQJ�&XVWRP�&KDUDFWHUV�8VLQJ�6RIWZDUH�RU�)LUPZDUHIt may not be necessary to read further in this appendix if only a few special characters areneeded. The programmer may find it easier to down-line load them into the dynamic characterfonts rather than modify the firmware. The information in this appendix is intended to assistthose who require several special characters, such as an entire alphabet, icons, mathematicalsymbols, or corporate logos.

There are several advantages to down-line loading a few special characters rather thancommitting them to the firmware:

• Operation within the Setup and Test Screens is unaffected by custom characters placed intothe dynamic fonts.

• The results can be seen as quickly as a program can send them to the TCS. If the appearanceis not what was desired, it is far easier to change a few lines of the program than to upgradethe ROM and check again.

• Dynamic Character Fonts l and 2 will be preserved after power down because they are storedin nonvolatile memory.

There are, however, advantages to customizing the static fonts, particularly where severalcharacters are to be modified:

• There is no software overhead of down-loading characters once the font is in firmware. Todisplay the new characters, the programmer needs only a chart similar to the one shown laterin this appendix. Custom characters in the character font firmware automatically replace thenormal characters in the static character fonts.

• When creating a many custom characters, down-loading may be more time-consuming andinefficient. It is best to consult with the programmer before deciding which approach to take.

� &+$5$&7(5�'(6&5,37,21The character font in ROM supplied with the TCS contains two character fonts:

• The Static ASCII Character Font, containing 128 characters defined by the AmericanStandard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII).

• The Static Special Character Font, containing 128 characters including internationalcharacters used by National Replacement Codes (NRC), characters for drawing boxes,graphics characters, and other common symbols.

• Static ASCII Character Font is located in the lower half (addresses 00 through 7F hex) of thecharacter font PROM supplied with the TCS, as shown in Table C-l. The Static SpecialCharacter Font is located in the upper half (addresses 80 through FF hex) of the characterfont PROM, as shown in Table C-2.

� 'HVFULSWLRQ�2I�6WDWLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWVTogether, the two character fonts of the TCS contain 256 characters. Complete descriptions ofthe fonts, the standard usage of their characters, and the consequences of changing a characterare shown in Tables C-3 and C-4.

Many locations within the static character fonts are used for specific purposes by the TCS SetupScreen and its subscreens. Replacing the static character fonts with custom characters is notrecommended whenever dynamic character fonts can be used instead. Refer to Tables C-3 andC-4.

7DEOH�&����&RQVHTXHQFHV�RI�&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�3520

&+$5$&7(5�,1�+(;�

127( 67$1'$5'�86$*( &216(48(1&(6�,)�&+$1*('����

�����) O $16,�FRQWURO�FRGHV��1RW�GLVSOD\HGH[FHSW�RQ�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU)RQW�7HVW�DQG�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ0RQLWRU�

6HYHQ�ELW�FRQWURO�FRGHV�ZLOO�EHGLVSOD\HG�XVLQJ�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUVZLWKLQ�WKH�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW7HVW�DQG�WKH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�

�� � 6SDFH�FKDUDFWHU� 6SDFH�FRGHV�DQG�HUDVXUH�RSHUDWLRQVZLOO�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

������( � 6WDQGDUG�VHW�RI�$6&,,�FKDUDFWHUV� $OSKDQXPHULF�DQG�SXQFWXDWLRQ�FRGHVZLOO�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

�) � 5HVHUYHG�E\�$16,��1RW�GLVSOD\HGH[FHSW�RQ�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU)RQW�7HVW�DQG�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ0RQLWRU�

7KH�FRQWURO�FRGH�ZLOO�EH�GLVSOD\HG�XVLQJWKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�ZLWKLQ�WKH�6WDWLF$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�7HVW�DQG�WKH&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�

127(6�

�� &RGHV�RYHUO\LQJ�WKHVH�FKDUDFWHU�SRVLWLRQV�DUH�UHVHUYHG�E\�$16,�DV�QRQ�GLVSOD\DEOH�FRQWUROV�

��� 7KHVH�SRVLWLRQV�VKRXOG�QRW�EH�FKDQJHG�H[FHSW�ZLWK�FDXWLRQ�

��� &KDQJHV�WR�WKH�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�RQO\�KDYH�WKLV�HIIHFW�ZKHQ�RSHUDWLQJ�ZLWKLQ�WKH�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�LWV�VXEVFUHHQV�RU�ZKHQ�WKH�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LV�PDSSHG�LQWR�WKH�6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�

7DEOH�&����&RQVHTXHQFHV�RI�&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�3520

&+$5$&7(5��,1+(;�

127( 67$1'$5'�86$*( &216(48(1&(6�,)�&+$1*('����

����� � %R[W\SH��� 7RXFKNH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGXVH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[W\SH�O�

����) � %R[W\SH��� 7RXFKNH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGXVH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[W\SH���

����� � %R[W\SH��� 7RXFKNH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGXVH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[W\SH���

����) � %R[W\SH��� 7RXFKNH\�DQG�UHJLRQ�RXWOLQH�FRPPDQGXVH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�IRU�%R[W\SH���

$2 � $OORZV�VSDFH�FKDUDFWHU�VSDFHV�WR�EHHDVLO\�GLVSOD\HG�HYHQ�ZKHQ�VKLIWHG�RXW�WR�WKH�H[WHQGHG�FKDUDFWHU�VHW�

6SDFH�FRGHV��ZKHQ�WKH�([WHQGHG&KDUDFWHU�6HW�LV�VHOHFWHG��GLVSOD\�WKHFXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

$O � 2(��RYHUUXQ�HUURU�� &RPPXQLFDWLRQ�RYHUUXQ�HUURUV�GLVSOD\WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

$� � %2��EXIIHU�RYHUIORZ�HUURU�� &RPPXQLFDWLRQ�EXIIHU�RYHUIORZ�HUURUVGLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

$��&� ���� ,QWHUQDWLRQDO�FKDUDFWHUV�XVHG�IRU15&�VXSSRUW�

7KH�1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGHFRPPDQG�GLVSOD\V�WKH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHUV�

&$�&�' � $UURZ�FKDUDFWHUV� 6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DUURZV�ZLOO�EH�UHSODFHGE\�WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�

&(�'� � $OLJQPHQW�SDWWHUQ�FKDUDFWHUV�XVHGE\�WKH�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�

$OLJQPHQW�SDWWHUQ�ZLOO�GLVSOD\�WKHFXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV

'��'� � 9HUWLFDO�EDU�FKDUW�FKDUDFWHUV� 7KH�'UDZ�%DU�IRU�%DU�&KDUW�FRPPDQGGLVSOD\V�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�IRU�YHUWLFDOEDU�FKDUWV�

'��(2 � +RUL]RQWDO�EDU�FKDUW�FKDUDFWHUV� 7KH�'UDZ�%DU�IRU�%DU�&KDUW�FRPPDQGGLVSOD\V�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�IRUKRUL]RQWDO�EDU�FKDUWV�

(O��)% 0LVFHOODQHRXV�JUDSKLFV�FKDUDFWHUV� *UDSKLF�FRGHV�GLVSOD\�WKH�FXVWRPFKDUDFWHUV�

)& � 5HVHUYHG� 0D\�EH�XVHG�LQ�IXWXUH�IRU�HUURUUHSRUWLQJ�

)' � )(��IUDPLQJ�HUURU�� &RPPXQLFDWLRQV�IUDPLQJ�HUURUV�GLVSOD\WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

)( � 3(��SDULW\�HUURU�� &RPPXQLFDWLRQV�SDULW\�HUURUV�GLVSOD\WKH�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�

7DEOH�&����&RQVHTXHQFHV�RI�&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�3520�FRQWLQXHG

)) � 5HVHUYHG�E\�$16,��1RW�GLVSOD\HGH[FHSW�LQ�6WDWLF�6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU)RQW�7HVW�DQG�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ0RQLWRU�

7KH�FRGH�ZLOO�EH�GLVSOD\HG�XVLQJ�WKHFXVWRP�FKDUDFWHU�ZLWKLQ�WKH�6WDWLF6SHFLDO�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�7HVW�DQG�WKH&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�

127(6�

�� &RGHV�RYHUO\LQJ�WKHVH�FKDUDFWHU�SRVLWLRQV�DUH�UHVHUYHG�E\�$16,�DV�QRQGLVSOD\DEOH�FRQWUROV�

�� 7KHVH�SRVLWLRQV�VKRXOG�QRW�EH�FKDQJHG�H[FHSW�ZLWK�FDXWLRQ�

�� 6HH�7DEOH�&���IRU�GHWDLOV�

�� 7R�GHWHUPLQH�ZKLFK�LQWHUQDWLRQDO�FKDUDFWHUV�DUH�XVHG�IRU�HDFK�15&��VHH�WKH�GHVFULSWLRQ�RQ�1DWLRQDO5HSODFHPHQW�&RGHV��15&��LQ�&KDSWHU���RI�WKLV�PDQXDO�

�� &KDQJHV�WR�WKH�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�RQO\�KDYH�WKLV�HIIHFW�ZKHQ�RSHUDWLQJ�ZLWKLQ�WKH�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�LWV�VXEVFUHHQV�RU�ZKHQ�WKH�6WDWLF�$6&,,�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�LV�PDSSHG�LQWR�WKH�6WDQGDUG�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�

� %R[W\SHVBoxtypes are special characters used to draw boxes or borders on the display. The first 32positions of the Static Special Character Font contain four complete boxtype patterns. Theseboxtypes are used by the Region Commands (see Chapter 6).

Custom borders can be created by changing the data contained in the boxtype locations of theStatic Special Character Font (positions 80 through 9F hex) as shown in Table C-5. The boxtype-border locations are specifically defined by the software in the TCS. When programming newboxtype borders, keep the box part locations the same in order to draw the box correctly on thedisplay.

7DEOH�&����%R[W\SH�&KDUDFWHUV

&+$5$&7(5��,1�+(;� %2;�3$57

%2;7<3( � � � �

�� �� �� �� XSSHU�OHIW�FRUQHU

�� �� �� �� XSSHU�VLGH

�� �$ �� �$ XSSHU�ULJKW�FRUQHU

�� �% �� �% ULJKW�VLGH

�� �& �� �& ORZHU�ULJKW�FRUQHU

�� �' �� �' ORZHU�VLGH

�� �( �� �( ORZHU�OHIW�FRUQHU

�� �) �� �) OHIW�VLGH

� +2:�&+$5$&7(56�$5(�6725('Characters displayed on the TCS consist of character cells. A character cell is a portion of thedisplay 8 pixels wide by 10 pixels high. These pixels are turned on or off by the data contained inthe character set. Since every pixel in each character cell can be displayed, graphic characters canbe easily created.

Sixteen consecutive bytes are reserved for each character. The first byte corresponds to the toprow of dots in a character cell. The tenth byte corresponds to the bottom row. The last six bytesare not used on the display.

Each byte within a given character contains that character’s equivalent ASCII code inhexadecimal followed by its byte number within the character cell. The byte number for eachcharacter cell starts at zero (the top row of dots). For example, the third byte (the third row ofdots) for the capital letter H (ASCII 48 hex) is 482.

Figure C-l shows how the capital letter H is encoded.

Addressin Rom

CodeByte

TCS Display

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used Note XX = DON’T CARE

48048148248348448548648748848948A48B48C48D48E48F

00828282FE8282820000XXXXXXXXXXXX

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

)LJXUH�&����(QFRGLQJ�WKH�/HWWHU�+

Each l bit in the character cell corresponds to a displayed dot. Each 0 bit in the character cell isnot displayed. The least significant bit of each character cell byte is in the rightmost position. (InFigure C-l, each dot represents a “0” in the character cell.)

Character display addressing is shown in Figure C-2, using the capital letter H as an example.(Again, each dot in the figure represents a “0” in the character cell.) The ASCII code 48 (hex)corresponds to the letter H. This number is decoded by the TCS, which retrieves the dot patternfrom the character font set memory. The dot pattern is then shown on the TCS display as a set ofdots that form the letter H.

Character’sASCII Code

StartAddress

DotPattern

Decode DisplayCharacter

FontEpromH (48 HEX) 480

Not Used

48048148248348448548648748848948A

00828282FE8282820000XX

)LJXUH�&����'LVSOD\�&KDUDFWHU�$GGUHVVLQJ

� &KDUDFWHU�6L]HVThe standard ASCII display characters are designed according to the following rules:

• Uppercase characters, numerals, and symbols like the percent and dollar signs, and bracketsand braces are designed within a region 7 pixels high by 7 pixels wide. The bottom of thecharacter is placed 2 pixels above the bottom of the character cell. The leftmost side of thecharacter region is justified to the left column of pixels in the character cell.

• Lowercase letters are designed within a region 5 pixels high by 7 pixels wide. The bottom ofthe character is placed 2 pixels above the bottom of the character cell. The leftmost side ofthe character region is justified to the left column of pixels in the character cell.

• Lowercase letters with descenders have the body of the character 4 pixels high by 7 pixelswide with a 3-pixel high descender. Letters with descenders extend to the bottom of thecharacter cell. The leftmost side of the character region is justified to the left column ofpixels in the character cell.

• Lowercase letters with ascenders are designed within a region 7 pixels high by 7 pixels wide.The bottom of characters with ascenders is placed 2 pixels above the bottom of the charactercell. The leftmost side of the character region is justified to the left column of pixels in thecharacter cell.

� 3,;(/�'$7$The following diagrams are for reference to the contents of the Static ASCII and Static SpecialCharacter Fonts. This information can be used to design custom character fonts. The aspect ratioof the character representations was altered slightly to give a close approximation of the display.Each character is identified in octal, hexadecimal, and decimal, as shown in the key.

A blank form is included for your convenience to design customer characters.

2FWDO

+H[DGHFLPDO

'HFLPDO

�� �����

ASCII Code

Custom Character Pattern Chart

ASCII Code

ASCII Code

ASCII Code

D-1

$33(1',;�' ,1�&$6(�2)�',)),&8/7<

� ,1752'8&7,21This appendix describes common TCS programming and operating problems. Most topics arecovered in the command reference information, but are restated here because many commonprogramming difficulties result from incorrect combinations of modes and commands rather thanfrom simple misuse of a single command.

This appendix also includes a table of all messages that can be displayed in the OperationalStatus Window.

� 6<03720�62/87,21�&+$57The following Symptom/Solution Chart contains a list of difficulties that could be experiencedby TCS users. Most trouble reports are caused by errors in using TCS commands, not byhardware failures. However, if none of the solutions listed here corrects the symptom, contact theDynapro Customer Service Group at 1-800-667-0374.

Your TCS will probably never exhibit any of the symptoms shown here. However, to help anyusers having difficulties, every effort has been made to include all known failure modes.

NOTEA soft reset reinitializes all volatile parameters and modes to their default settings and sets all nonvolatileparameters to their previously saved Setup values. To perform a soft reset, press the RESET touchkey on

the Setup Screen or press Shift/Set Up on the optional keyboard.

CAUTIONA hard reset forces the TCS back to its factory default settings and should only be used as a last

resort when troubleshooting a problem. A hard reset deletes all stored screens and reinitializes thedynamic character fonts with their default.

A hard reset can be commanded locally by setting the Local/Remote Mode to Local within the SetupScreen, exiting the Setup Screen, and typing <ESC> l c on the keyboard.

Refer to the Reset command in Chapter 4 for complete information about both soft and hardresets.

D-2

7DEOH�'����6\PSWRP�6ROXWLRQ�&KDUW

6<03720 3266,%/(�&$86( 62/87,21�6�

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�3UREOHPV

&RPPXQLFDWLRQV�HUURUV�LQ2SHUDWLRQDO�6WDWXV�:LQGRZ�

7&6�DQG�KRVW�FRPPXQLFDWLRQVSDUDPHWHUV�GR�QRW�PDWFK�

&KDQJH�FRPPXQLFDWLRQV�SDUDPHWHUV�IRU7&6�RU�KRVW�

;21�;2))�0RGH�LV�RII�VR�7&6�FDQQRWVWDOO�WKH�KRVW��UHVXOWLQJ�LQFRPPXQLFDWLRQV�EXIIHU�RYHUIORZ�DQG�ORVWFRGHV�

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKDQJH;21�;2))�0RGH�WR�RQ�

25

8VH�KDQGVKDNLQJ�OLQHV�IRU�IORZ�FRQWUROLQVWHDG�

7&6�XVLQJ�PXOWLGURS�SURWRFRO��EXW�SLQV��DQG���RI�VHULDO�FRPPXQLFDWLRQV�FRQQHFWRUDUH�VWLOO�LQ�XVH�

'XULQJ�PXOWLGURS�RSHUDWLRQ��OLQHV�VSHFLILFWR�56�����(�RSHUDWLRQ�VKRXOG�QRW�EHXVHG�

%RWK�KRVW�DQG�7&6�DUH�'7(��'DWD7HUPLQDO�(TXLSPHQW��

,QVWDOO�D�QXOO�PRGHP�FDEOH�EHWZHHQ�WKHKRVW�DQG�WKH�7&6�

0XOWLGURS�DGGUHVV�RI�7&6�VHW�WR��WKURXJK�����EXW�KRVW�LV�QRW�XVLQJPXOWLGURS�SURWRFRO�

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKDQJH�$GGUHVVWR�QRQH�

+RVW�DQG�7&6�QRWFRPPXQLFDWLQJ��1RFRPPXQLFDWLRQV�HUURUV�LQ2SHUDWLRQDO�6WDWXV�:LQGRZ�

7&6�XVLQJ�PXOWLGURS�SURWRFRO�EXW�QRWFRUUHFWO\�DGGUHVVHG�E\�WKH�KRVW�

8VH�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�WR�YHULI\�WKDWWKH�KRVW�LV�FRUUHFWO\�DGGUHVVLQJ�WKH�7&6XVLQJ�PXOWLGURS�SURWRFRO�

25

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKHFN�PXOWLGURSDGGUHVV�

%DXG�UDWH�XVHG�E\�WKH�7&6�GLIIHUVGUDVWLFDOO\�IURP�WKDW�LQ�XVH�E\�WKH�KRVW�

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKDQJH�7&6EDXG�UDWH�

7&6�KDQGVKDNLQJ�OLQH�LPSURSHUO\FRQQHFWHG�VR�7&6�LV�VWDOOHG�RU�KRVWKDQGVKDNLQJ�OLQH�LPSURSHUO\�FRQQHFWHGVR�KRVW�LV�VWDOOHG�

,QFRUUHFW�VHWWLQJ�RQ�'65�DQG�&76�LQ6HWXS�

6HULDO�OLQN�LQRSHUDWLYH� &KHFN�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�WR�VHH�LIDQ\�FRGHV�DUH�EHLQJ�UHFHLYHG�

25

&KHFN�FRPPXQLFDWLRQV�FDEOH�

D-3

6\PSWRP�6ROXWLRQ�&KDUW�FRQWLQXHG

6<03720 3266,%/(�&$86( 62/87,21�6�

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�3UREOHPV

7&6�LQFRUUHFWO\�LQWHUSUHWVKRVW�FRPPDQGV�GXULQJ�XVHULQSXW�

+RVW�LV�HFKRLQJ�XVHU�LQSXW�EDFN�WR�WKH7&6�WKHUHE\�LQWHUUXSWLQJ��DQG�FRUUXSWLQJ�FRQWURO�VHTXHQFHV�EHLQJ�VHQW�WR�WKH�7&6�

'LVDEOH�HFKRLQJ�E\�WKH�KRVW�DQG�XVH�ORFDOHFKR�LQVWHDG�

25

6WDOO�DQG�XQVWDOO�WKH�7&6�DURXQG�HDFKJURXS�RI�FRQWURO�VHTXHQFHV�VHQW�WR�WKH7&6�GXULQJ�XVHU�LQSXW�

7&6�RXWSXW�FDXVHV�HUURU�RQKRVW�

5HSRUWLQJ�IRUPDW�LQFRQVLVWHQW�ZLWKH[SHFWDWLRQV�RI�KRVW�

&KDQJH�UHSRUWLQJ�IRUPDW�WR�EHFRPSDWLEOH�ZLWK�KRVW�

7&6�FDQQRW�DV\QFKURQRXVO\�VHQG�SRZHU�XS�LQWHUUXSW�XSRQ�UHJDLQLQJ�SRZHU�GXULQJPXOWLGURS�RSHUDWLRQ�

7&6�DVVXPHV�LW�LV�QR�ORQJHU�DGGUHVVHGDIWHU�UHJDLQLQJ�SRZHU��7&6�PXVW�EHUHDGGUHVVHG�EHIRUH�WKH�TXHXHG�SRZHU�XSLQWHUUXSW�ZLOO�EH�VHQW�

3RZHU�XS�LQWHUUXSW�QRWJHQHUDWHG�E\�7&6�

3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�LV�UHVHW� 6HW�3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�

5HSRUWLQJ�IRUPDW�GLIIHUV�IURP�WKDWH[SHFWHG�E\�WKH�KRVW�

&KDQJH�UHSRUWLQJ�IRUPDW�WR�PDWFKUHTXLUHPHQWV�

.H\ERDUG�GLVFRQQHFWHG� 3OXJ�NH\ERDUG�LQ�

.H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW�0RGH�VHW� 5HVHW�.H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW�0RGH�

.H\ERDUG�GRHVQW�ZRUN� +RVW�SURJUDP�H[SHFWV�LQSXW�WR�HQG�ZLWK�DOLQH�IHHG��,)!�ZKHQ�XVHU�W\SHV�5HWXUQ�

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�VHW�1HZ�/LQH�WRRQ�

+RVW�DQG�7&6�QRW�FRPPXQLFDWLQJ� 6HH�DERYH�V\PSWRPV�

7RXFK�3UREOHPV

7RXFK�SDQHO�HUURUV�LQ2SHUDWLRQDO�6WDWXV�:LQGRZ�

8VHU�WRXFKHG�WRXFK�SDQHO�GXULQJ�WRXFKSDQHO�WHVW�

$YRLG�WRXFKLQJ�WKH�WRXFK�SDQHO�GXULQJWRXFK�SDQHO�WHVWV�

3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�LV�VHW��EXW�WKH�KRVW�LVQRW�VHQGLQJ�WKH�5HDG�7RXFKNH\�6WDWXV&RPPDQG�

7KH�KRVW�VKRXOG�XVH�WKH�5HDG�7RXFKNH\6WDWXV�FRPPDQG�ZKHQ�3ROOHG�7RXFK0RGH�LV�VHW�

25

5HVHW�3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�VR�7&6�FDQVHQG�DV\QFKURQRXV�WRXFK�UHSRUWV�

D-4

6\PSWRP�6ROXWLRQ�&KDUW�FRQWLQXHG

6<03720 3266,%/(�&$86( 62/87,21�6�

7RXFK�3UREOHPV

7RXFKNH\V�QHYHU�VHQGWRXFK�UHSRUW�

$OO�WRXFKNH\V�SURJUDPPHG�DV�GHDG� 8VH�7RXFKNH\�7\SH�FRPPDQG�WR�FKDQJHWRXFKNH\�W\SHV�

25

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�SHUIRUP�D�VRIWUHVHW��VHH�127(�DIWHU�WDEOH��

7RXFK�SDQHO�IDLOHG�GXULQJ�WRXFK�SDQHOWHVW�DQG�ZDV�DXWRPDWLFDOO\�ORFNHG�RXW�WRDYRLG�IORRGLQJ�KRVW�ZLWK�WRXFK�UHSRUWV�

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKHFN2SHUDWLRQDO�6WDWXV�:LQGRZ�IRU�WRXFKSDQHO�IDLOXUH�PHVVDJH�

+RVW�DQG�7&6�QRW�FRPPXQLFDWLQJ� 6HH�V\PSWRPV�DERYH�

5HDG�7RXFKNH\�6WDWXVFRPPDQG�DOZD\V�UHWXUQVWRXFKNH\�QXPEHU�]HUR�

3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�LV�UHVHW��VR�WRXFKUHSRUWV�DOUHDG\�VHQW�DV\QFKURQRXVO\�

6HW�3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�RU�DFFHSW�WRXFKUHSRUWV�DV\QFKURQRXVO\�LQVWHDG�RI�XVLQJ5HDG�7RXFKNH\�6WDWXV�FRPPDQG�

7RXFKNH\V�UHSRUW��EXW�ZLWKLQFRUUHFW�IRUPDW�

5HSRUWLQJ�IRUPDW�KDV�EHHQ�FKDQJHG�IURPGHIDXOW�IRUPDW�

&KDQJH�UHSRUWLQJ�IRUPDW�EDFN�WR�GHIDXOWRU�SHUIRUP�D�KDUG�UHVHW�

([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�LV�UHVHW�VR�WRJJOHWRXFKNH\�VWDWH�LV�QRW�UHSRUWHG�

([WHQGHG�5HSRUW�0RGH�PXVW�EH�VHW�IRUWRXFK�UHSRUW�WR�LQFOXGH�WRXFKNH\�WRJJOHVWDWH�

7RXFKNH\V�UHSRUW�ZLWKFRUUHFW�IRUPDW��EXW�ZURQJQXPEHU�

&HOO�WRXFKHG�LV�SDUW�RI�D�ODUJHU�WRXFKNH\ZKLFK�ZDV�EXLOW�VR�WRXFK�UHSRUW�XVHVQXPEHU�RI�PDVWHU�FHOO�

&OHDU�WKH�WRXFKNH\�RU�FOHDU�DOO�WRXFKNH\V�

&HOO�WRXFKHG�ZDV�PHDQW�WR�EH�SDUW�RI�DODUJHU�WRXFKNH\��EXW�WRXFKNH\�ZDV�QHYHUEXLOW�VR�WRXFK�UHSRUW�GRHV�QRW�XVH�PDVWHUFHOO�QXPEHU�

5HEXLOG�WKH�WRXFKNH\�

$XWR�UHSHDW�W\SH�WRXFKNH\GRHV�QRW�DXWR�UHSHDW�

$XWR�UHSHDW�UDWH�VHW�WR�]HUR� 6HW�DXWR�UHSHDW�UDWH�WR�GHVLUHG�YDOXHXVLQJ�$XWR�5HSHDW�5DWH�FRPPDQG�

D-5

6\PSWRP�6ROXWLRQ�&KDUW�FRQWLQXHG

6<03720 3266,%/(�&$86( 62/87,21�6�

'LVSOD\�3UREOHPV

6FUHHQ�GRHVQW�OLJKW� 'LVSOD\�DFWLYLW\�VDYHG�DV�RII� (QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKDQJH�GLVSOD\DFWLYLW\�WR�RQ�RU�WLPHRXW�

&RQFHDO�DWWULEXWH�VHW�RYHU�WKH�HQWLUHGLVSOD\�

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�SHUIRUP�D�VRIWUHVHW��VHH�127(�DIWHU�WDEOH��

.H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW�0RGH�VHW� 5HVHW�.H\ERDUG�/RFNRXW�0RGH�IURP�WKHKRVW�

25

8VH�6(783�EXWWRQ�

25

&\FOH�SRZHU�WR�WKH�7&6�

&DQW�HQWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ� 6HWXS�/RFNRXW�0RGH�VHW� 5HVHW�6HWXS�/RFNRXW�0RGH�IURP�WKH�KRVW�

25

&\FOH�SRZHU�WR�WKH�7&6�

6HWXS�SDUDPHWHUV�GRQW�JHWVDYHG�

&WUO�6�RU��6$9(��QRW�GRQH� (QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ��FKDQJH�SDUDPHWHUVWR�GHVLUHG�YDOXH��DQG�6$9(�QHZ�YDOXHV�

1R�FXUVRU� ,QYLVLEOH�FXUVRU�VHOHFWHG� (QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKDQJH�FXUVRUW\SH�

&XUVRU�ZRQW�PRYH�ZKHUHQHHGHG�

&XUVRU�FDQQRW�OHDYH�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQ�ZLWKUHODWLYH�FXUVRU�PRYHPHQW�FRPPDQGV�

8VH�DEVROXWH�FXUVRU�PRYHPHQWFRPPDQG�

25

(QODUJH�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQ�WR�LQFOXGH�FXUVRUGHVWLQDWLRQ�

2ULJLQ�0RGH�VHW�DQG�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQVPDOOHU�WKDQ�HQWLUH�VFUHHQ��&XUVRU�FDQQRWOHDYH�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQ�ZKHQ�RULJLQ�PRGHLV�VHW��HYHQ�ZLWK�DEVROXWH�FXUVRUFRPPDQGV�

5HVHW�2ULJLQ�0RGH�

25

(QODUJH�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQ�

&XUVRU�VWRSV�RQ�ODVWFROXPQ�

$XWR�:UDS�0RGH�LV�UHVHW� (QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�VHW�$XWR�:UDS�WRRQ�

D-6

6\PSWRP�6ROXWLRQ�&KDUW�FRQWLQXHG

6<03720 3266,%/(�&$86( 62/87,21�6�

'LVSOD\�3UREOHPV

$WWULEXWHV�FKDQJH�HYHQZKHQ�12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH0RGH�VHW�

1RUPDO�RSHUDWLRQ��'LUHFWO\�FRPPDQGHGDWWULEXWH�FKDQJHV�DUH�XQDIIHFWHG�E\12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH�

6HH�12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGHGHVFULSWLRQ�LQ�&KDSWHU���

&RQFHDO�DWWULEXWH�VHW� 7XUQ�RII�FRQFHDO�DWWULEXWH�XVLQJ�6HW&KDUDFWHU�$WWULEXWHV�&RPPDQG�

25

(QWHU�WKH�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�SHUIRUP�DVRIW�UHVHW�

1HZ�FKDUDFWHUV�QRWGLVSOD\HG�

$�VWRUHG�VFUHHQ�LV�VHOHFWHG�IRU�HGLWLQJ�6LQFH�VWRUHG�VFUHHQV�DUH�LQYLVLEOH��QHZFKDUDFWHUV�DUH�EHLQJ�SODFHG�GLUHFWO\�LQWRD�VWRUHG�VFUHHQ�

&RS\�WKH�VWRUHG�VFUHHQ�WR�WKH�'LVSOD\HG6FUHHQ�

25

6HOHFW�WKH�'LVSOD\HG�6FUHHQ�

'\QDPLF�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�ZDV�HUDVHG�DQGQHYHU�ILOOHG�ZLWK�QHZ�FXVWRP�FKDUDFWHUV�

6HH�'RZQ�/LQH�/RDG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWFRPPDQG�LQ�&KDSWHU���

,QFRUUHFW�FKDUDFWHU�IRQW�PDSSHG�LQWRFKDUDFWHU�VHW�V��

6HH�0DS�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�FRPPDQG�LQ&KDSWHU���

,QFRUUHFW�FKDUDFWHUVGLVSOD\HG�

,QFRUUHFW�FKDUDFWHU�VHW�VHOHFWHG� 6HQG�6HOHFW�&KDUDFWHU�6HW�&RPPDQG�WRVHOHFW�GHVLUHG�FKDUDFWHU�VHW�

1DWLRQDO�5HSODFHPHQW�&RGHV�LV�LQ�XVH� (QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�VHW�15&�WRQRQH�

7&6�XVLQJ�PRUH�GDWD�ELWV�WKDQ�KRVW�+RVWV�SDULW\�ELW�LQWHUSUHWHG�DV��WK�GDWD�ELWE\�7&6�

&KHFN�WKDW�FRPPXQLFDWLRQV�IUDPLQJIRUPDW�XVHG�E\�7&6�PDWFKHV�WKDW�XVHGE\�KRVW�

&KDUDFWHUV�RU�DWWULEXWHV�DUHUHVWULFWHG�WR�VPDOOHU�DUHDWKDQ�LQWHQGHG�

2ULJLQ�0RGH�VHW�FRPPDQGV�DUH�OLPLWHGZLWKLQ�WKH�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQ�

5HVHW�2ULJLQ�0RGH�

25

(QODUJH�WKH�VFUROOLQJ�UHJLRQ�

'RZQ�/LQH�/RDGHG&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�KDVLQFRUUHFW�DSSHDUDQFH�

&RPPDQG�LQFRUUHFWO\�IRUPDWWHG� 6HH�'RZQ�/LQH�/RDG�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWFRPPDQG�LQ�&KDSWHU���

&KDUDFWHU�IRQW�LQFRUUHFWO\�PDSSHG�LQWRFKDUDFWHU�VHW�V��

6HH�0DS�&KDUDFWHU�)RQW�FRPPDQG�LQ&KDSWHU���

&RORU�'LVSOD\�3UREOHPV

6FUHHQ�GRHVQ¶W�OLJKW )RUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQG�ERWK�VHW�WREODFN�

0DNH�IRUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQGGLIIHUHQW�FRORUV��$GMXVW�FRQWUDVW�

&KDUDFWHUV�QRW�GLVSOD\HG )RUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQG�VHW�WR�VDPHFRORU�

0DNH�IRUHJURXQG�DQG�EDFNJURXQGGLIIHUHQW�FRORUV��$GMXVW�FRQWUDVW�

D-7

6\PSWRP�6ROXWLRQ�&KDUW�FRQWLQXHG

6<03720 3266,%/(�&$86( 62/87,21�6�

'LVSOD\�3UREOHPV

&RQFHDOHG�FKDUDFWHUVGLVSOD\�LQ�GLIIHUHQW�FRORUWKDQ�VFUHHQ�EDFNJURXQG�

&RQFHDO�FRORU�GLIIHUHQW�WKDQ�FXUUHQWEDFNJURXQG�FRORU�ZKHQ�FKDUDFWHUV�ZLWKFRQFHDO�DWWULEXWH�DUH�GLVSOD\HG�

0DNH�FRQFHDO�FRORU�DQG�EDFNJURXQGFRORU�WKH�VDPH�

6WRUHG�6FUHHQ�3UREOHPV

&DQW�VHOHFW��GHOHWH�LQLWLDOL]H��RU�FRS\�WR�VWRUHGVFUHHQV�

([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\�)XOO� (QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKHFN�IRU([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\�IXOO�HUURU�LQ2SHUDWLRQDO�6WDWXV�:LQGRZ��7KHQ�VLPSOLI\�RU�GHOHWH�RQH�RU�PRUH�VWRUHGVFUHHQV�

%HIRUH�&DOOLQJ�)RU�6HUYLFH

7&6�KDV�GHWHFWHG�VRPH�VRUW�RI�HUURUZKLFK�SUHFOXGHV�SURSHU�RSHUDWLRQ�

(QWHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�DQG�FKHFN2SHUDWLRQDO�6WDWXV�:LQGRZ�IRU�HUURUPHVVDJHV�

&DQW�VROYH�SUREOHP��RUQRQH�RI�WKH�DERYHV\PSWRPV�DSSO\�

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�EHWZHHQ�WKH�7&6�DQGWKH�KRVW�LV�XVLQJ�LQFRUUHFW�IRUPDW�RUFRQWDLQV�HUURUV�

(QWHU�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�0RQLWRU�DQG�YHULI\WKDW�FRUUHFW�FRPPDQG�VHTXHQFHV�DQGIRUPDW�DUH�EHLQJ�H[FKDQJHG�EHWZHHQ�WKH7&6�DQG�KRVW�

$�SDUDPHWHU�RU�IXQFWLRQ�ZLWKLQ�WKH�7&6KDV�EHHQ�VHW�WR�D�YDOXH�ZKLFK�FDXVHV�WKHSUREOHP�

,VVXH�D�VRIW�UHVHW�WR�IRUFH�7&6�EDFN�WRSRZHU�XS�VWDWH�

25

,VVXH�D�KDUG�UHVHW�WR�IRUFH�7&6�EDFN�WRIDFWRU\�GHIDXOW�VHWWLQJV�

D-8

� &20021�352*5$00,1*�352%/(06The most common programming problems are associated with the following topics:

• Polled Touch Mode / Read Touchkey Status command

• Reporting Format / End Of Line Character

• Origin Mode / Scrolling Region

• NOCHANGE Attribute Mode / Modify Attribute commands

• Conceal Attribute / Modify Attribute commands

• Editing a stored screen with the Select Screen command

• Mapping Character Fonts

• Power-up Interrupt Mode (Multidrop protocol)

• Dead touchkey types

• Inconsistent communication setup between TCS and host

The next few pages explain how to identify and correct problems with each of these.

D-9

� ,QWHUDFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�3ROOHG�7RXFK�0RGH�DQG�WKH�5HDG�7RXFKNH\�6WDWXV&RPPDQGThe host application program can get touch reports from the TCS as follows:

• the TCS can send them spontaneously

• the host can poll the TCS for them

Any given application program should use only one of these methods; Polled Touch Modespecifies which method will be used. When Polled Touch Mode is set, the TCS holds the firsttouch report and discards all subsequent touch reports until polled by the host. The host polls theTCS by sending the Read Touchkey Status command to retrieve the touch report. When PolledTouch Mode is reset, touch reports are sent to the host as they occur, and they are not held. Ifpolled, the TCS would report "0" indicating that no polled touch report is pending.

Problems arise in two circumstances:

1. Polled Touch Mode is set but the application program fails to use the Read Touchkey Statuscommand to poll the TCS for a touch report.

2. Polled Touch Mode is reset and the application program sends a Read Touchkey Statuscommand.

In both instances, the touch panel may appear to be dead. In the first case, the host never receivestouch reports because they are never polled for and are never spontaneously sent. In the secondcase, touch reports are being sent spontaneously, but are probably ignored by the applicationprogram. Sending a Read Touchkey Status command implies that the programmer wants touchreports only through polling. In this case, the response to the Read Touchkey Status commandalways indicates a touchkey value of zero.

D-10

� ,QWHUDFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�5HSRUWLQJ�)RUPDW�DQG�WKH�(QG�2I�/LQH�&KDUDFWHUThe Reporting Format command enables the following three characters to be changed in TCSreports:

The First Introducer Character (default is <ESC>).

The Second Introducer Character (default is left bracket: [).

The Appended Terminator Character (default is no terminator).

To provide for specific host computer protocols, the Reporting Format command can be used toredefine the format of reports.

The reporting format interacts with the language used to program applications on the host. Forexample in most computer systems, the INPUT statement in BASIC expects inputs to beterminated with <CR>, 0D Hex. If the appended terminator character has not previously beendefined as <CR>, the program will not process TCS inputs except when the user presses theRETURN key on the optional keyboard.

Some systems, such as the Fluke 1722A Instrument Controller, permit changing the characterused to indicate End Of Line (EOL) on the RS-232-E interface. For input to be done on a linebasis for each touch report, the TCS reporting format must specify an appended terminatorcharacter that matches the EOL character on the host system.

Another problem can occur when the host system interprets one or both of the introducers as anEOL character. For example, some VAX/VMS programs use <ESC> (l 8 hex) as a lineterminator. Since <ESC> is also the default first introducer of the TCS, line input is terminatedbefore any information is received. The information may be read in at the next line input, but theinformation will not be synchronous with the event (such as a TCS touch report). The solution isto redefine the introducer character. In the case of VAX/VMS, change the TCS terminator to anyASCII character greater than IF Hex.

To be fail-safe, some applications must ensure that touch panel reports can never be duplicatedby keystrokes. By setting the introducers to characters that the keyboard cannot send (such asextended characters), the host program can be certain that touch reports are not accidentallysimulated at the keyboard.

D-11

� ,QWHUDFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�2ULJLQ�0RGH�DQG�6FUROOLQJ�5HJLRQThe interaction between the setting of the Origin Mode and a Scrolling Region can produceunexpected results. Note the following points:

• Setting Origin Mode repositions the cursor to row l, column 1 of the current scrolling region.Resetting Origin Mode repositions the cursor to row 1, column of the entire screen.

• When Origin Mode is set, the scrolling region acts like an independent smaller display.When Origin Mode is reset, the scrolling region merely specifies which portion of the entirescreen is to scroll.

• Relative cursor movements (such as indexing and line feeds) do not move the cursor out of ascrolling region, regardless of the setting of the Origin Mode. Absolute cursor positioning(such as Move Cursor to Absolute Position and Move Cursor to Touchkey) can move thecursor out of scrolling region, but only when Origin Mode is reset.

The following examples demonstrate some implications:

1. In the simplest case, assume that no scrolling region has been established. In effect, the entiredisplay area is one large scrolling region. Regardless of the setting of Origin Mode, thecursor can be moved anywhere in the display.

2. For a slightly more complex case, assume a scrolling region smaller than the entire screen isset while Origin Mode is reset. The origin remains the upper left corner of the entire screen.The cursor can be moved anywhere on the entire screen by absolute cursor positioningcommands.

Once the cursor enters the scrolling region, relative cursor movement commands that attemptto leave the scrolling region stop at the edge of the region. After an absolute cursormovement command has moved the cursor out of the scrolling region, then relative cursorcommands can move the cursor while it remains outside the region. However, once it crossesback inside the scrolling region, relative movement commands are once again limited to theregion.

3. Finally, suppose Origin Mode is set while there is no scrolling region. The cursor moves tothe upper left corner (home) of the entire screen. Now create a scrolling region in the middleof the screen; the cursor repositions to the upper left corner of the scrolling region. It can bemoved at will around the scrolling region, but can never leave, even by an absolute cursormovement command. While Origin Mode remains set, the scrolling region acts as if it were aminiature display all its own. All displayed data is restricted to within the region, and linenumbers are relative to the scrolling region.

Commands that specify line 1 now affect the first line of the scrolling region, and the edgesof the region act just like the edges of the screen because display data and cursor movementsare limited to the area within the region. Thus, host programs can treat the scrolling region asif it were the entire screen without overwriting screen data outside the region.

This last case illustrates the most useful (yet potentially the most troublesome) interactionbetween these two TCS functions, the ability to create a scrolling region and the ability to choosethe top of the scrolling region as the origin for absolute cursor movements. To avoid difficulty,remember:

D-12

• A scrolling region acts like a smaller independent screen when Origin Mode is set.

• Setting Origin Mode moves the cursor to the home position of the current scrolling region.Lines are numbered relative to the top of the scrolling region.

• Resetting Origin Mode moves the cursor to the home position of the entire screen. Lines arenumbered relative to the top of the entire screen.

D-13

� ,QWHUDFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�12&+$1*(�$WWULEXWH�0RGH�DQG�$WWULEXWH�&RPPDQGVConfusion can arise from assuming that the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode prohibits changes toattributes under all circumstances. This is not the case. The purpose of NOCHANGE AttributeMode is to prevent commands that indirectly call for attribute changes from having an effect, atthe same time permitting directly commanded attribute changes to occur. NOCHANGE AttributeMode permits attributes to be treated in a "field-like" manner rather than being associated withcharacters as they are displayed.

For example, the Modify Attributes in a Region command directly calls for changes to attributes.When the TCS receives this command, the specified attributes change, regardless of the settingof the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode. However, when the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode is set,actions which indirectly change displayed attributes are prohibited from changing the attributesalready displayed. An example of such an action occurs if the host sends for display anycharacters which normally use the attributes previously determined by the Set CharacterAttributes command. In this case, attributes associated with the newly placed characters wouldremain unchanged.

To use the NOCHANGE Attribute Mode most effectively, refer to Chapter 5 of this manual,which includes several other examples. It is important to note that directly commanded attributechanges are not affected by this command.

D-14

� ,QWHUDFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�WKH�&RQFHDO�$WWULEXWH�DQG�&RPPDQGV�WKDW�0RGLI\$WWULEXWHVUsing the conceal attribute, entire sections of the display can be made to temporarily disappear.Later, the hidden portion of the display can be made to reappear with its original characters andassociated attributes.

A typical application would use the conceal attribute as follows:

• The host displays information in a region or touchkey.

• Based on some event, the host program causes the now unnecessary information to disappeartemporarily by turning on the conceal attribute for all characters within the region ortouchkey.

• When the original information is required again, the host turns off the conceal attribute forthe characters within the region or touchkey and the original information reappears, completewith its associated attributes.

When using the conceal attribute, note the following:

• To turn the conceal attribute on or off within a region or touchkey, use the Reverse CharacterAttributes in a Region or Reverse Character Attributes in a Touchkey commands rather thanthe Modify Character Attributes in a Region or Modify Character Attributes in a Touchkeycommands. The former commands only change the state of the conceal attribute withoutaffecting the state of any of the other attributes in the region or touchkey. The lattercommands change the state of the conceal attribute and set all other attributes as determinedby the last Select Character Attributes Command. This usually has the effect turning off anyother attributes in the region or touchkey so that when the characters are unconcealed, theyno longer appear with all their previous attributes.

• Whenever the conceal attribute is set, the character at that location and all other attributesare temporarily suppressed. Areas that were previously highlighted or blinking no longerappear highlighted or blink once they have been concealed.

• If the conceal attribute is accidentally applied to the entire display, it will appear totallyblank. In addition, if the Set Character Attributes Command was used to set the concealattribute, sending characters or otherwise changing the contents of the display will have novisual affect.

D-15

� (GLWLQJ�D�6WRUHG�6FUHHQ�ZLWK�WKH�6HOHFW�6FUHHQ�&RPPDQGThe Select Screen Command provides a convenient way for the host to select any screen forediting. Usually, the host selects the Displayed Screen in which case editing changes are visibleas they are made.

Sometimes the host may select a stored screen to be edited. This is a very powerful capabilitysince a stored screen can be edited invisibly to the user. Even though the host is editing the storedscreen, the user only sees the Displayed Screen which is not changing.

When selecting a stored screen for editing using the Select Screen Command, keep the followingpoints in mind:

• While a stored screen is selected by the Select Screen Command, all screen-dependentediting commands sent to the TCS affect only the invisible stored screen. The contents of theDisplayed Screen do not change. Therefore, it may appear that the editing commands are nottaking affect. In fact they are, but the results become visible only when the stored screen iscopied into the Displayed Screen.

• If memory is nearly full and the host is already editing another stored screen which is toolarge to be stored , then an Expansion Memory Full error occurs. Unless the host is pollingthe TCS using the Request Error Status command or the Error Interrupt Mode is set, the hostwill not be aware of the error. Screen-dependent editing commands which follow will not besent to the stored screen since the Select Screen Command did not take affect. Instead, theediting commands affect the previous stored screen which remains selected. To select anyother screen, the stored screen which has become too large must be simplified, or anotherstored screen must be deleted to make more room .

NOTEExpansion Memory refers to the 96K of nonvolatile memory available for Screen and

Dynamic Font Storage.

D-16

� 0DSSLQJ�&KDUDFWHU�)RQWVAny of the four character fonts can be mapped into either the Standard or Extended CharacterSets. This provides a method to rearrange the contents of the character sets or to display customcharacters. The mapping between the character fonts and character sets can vary from screen toscreen (screen-dependent). Whenever a stored screen is copied into the Displayed Screen, themapping between the character fonts and the character sets can change automatically to matchthat specified by the stored screen.

When using the Down-Line Load Character Font Command to load custom characters intodynamic character fonts, note the following:

• If either of the dynamic character fonts is currently mapped into the Standard or ExtendedCharacter Set within the Displayed Screen, the display immediately reflects the new contentsof the dynamic character font. If the custom characters were incorrectly specified by theDown-Line Load Character Font Command, the appearance of the display may becomeunreadable since the pixel patterns representing each character change.

• Whenever a stored screen is copied into the Displayed Screen, the character font mappingmay be automatically changed. Normally this is not a problem as the dynamic character fontscontain default information initialized from the static character fonts or properly down-lineloaded custom characters from the host. However, if the custom characters were incorrectlyspecified by the Down-Line Load Character Font Command, the appearance of the displaymay become unreadable since the pixel patterns representing each character change.

To restore characters on the display to their default representations, the host could perform anyone of the following steps. They are listed in order of minimal loss of data or programming:

• Use the Map Character Font command to map the Static ASCII Character Font and the StaticSpecial Character Font into the Standard and Extended Character Sets, respectively.

• Use the Initialize Screen command to reinitialize the Displayed Screen.

• Issue a Soft Reset command.

D-17

� ,QWHUDFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�3RZHU�8S�,QWHUUXSW�0RGH�DQG�0XOWLGURS�3URWRFROThe Power-Up Interrupt Modes provides a means for the host to be notified automaticallywhenever the TCS regains power after an unexpected power loss. When Power-Up InterruptMode is set, the TCS automatically generates an interrupt to the host indicating that power hasjust been restored. This allows the host to take suitable actions to restore proper communicationwith the user.

When the Multidrop Address is set to anything other than “none” indicating that the TCS andhost are to communicate using the Multidrop Protocol, then the Power-Up Interrupt M may notoperate as expected. When the TCS regains power when it was previously operating using theMultidrop Protocol, there is no way for the TCS to tell whether it is still addressed by the host.Even if the TCS knows it was previously addressed, it has no way of knowing how long it hasbeen without power and whether the host has unaddressed it in favor of another responding TCS.

Therefore, when the TCS regains power, it cannot safely connect its transmitter to the serial linkbecause it may corrupt communication between the host and another addressed TCS. Instead, theTCS queues up the power-up interrupt in its output buffer and waits until it is readdressed beforetransmitting the interrupt to the host.

For the host to use the Power-Up Interrupt Mode during multidrop operation, it must periodicallyreaddress the TCS to allow it to send its Power-Up Interrupt in case the TCS just regained power.A preferred alternative would be to reset Power-Up Interrupt Mode and poll the TCS using theRequest Power Status command.

D-18

� ,QWHUDFWLRQ�%HWZHHQ�'HDG�7RXFKNH\V�DQG�7RXFK�2SHUDWLRQThe host can selectively disable touch reporting from touchkeys that do not correspond to touchtargets by programming a touchkey type to be "dead." This simplifies touch report decoding forthe host because the TCS does not generate any touch reports from dead touchkeys.

However, if the Touchkey Type command is incorrectly sent with the dead parameter, especiallyif it is applied to the entire touch panel, touch reporting may appear to be defective or TouchLockout Mode may seem to be set because no touch reports occur. If it is suspected that the TCSis not generating touch reports due to dead touchkeys (rather than the other common touch-related problems described in this appendix), the host could do any of the following steps. Theyare listed in order of minimal loss of data or programming:

• Use the Touchkey Type command to set all touchkey types to auto-repeat (the default type).

• Use the Initialize Screen command to reinitialize the Displayed Screen.

• Issue a Soft Reset command.

D-19

� ,QFRQVLVWHQW�&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�6HWXS�%HWZHHQ�+RVW�DQG�7&6To make interfacing as trouble-free as possible, the TCS features easily configuredcommunication parameters. This configurability takes some care to manage. Usually a report inthe Operational Status Window of the Setup Screen provides a tip if there are any problems, butsometimes the communication link is not properly established, and yet no message appears.

Assume the host is configured to communicate using 7 data bits and ignoring parity. Even thoughparity is ignored, the bit is still present, so the host sends and expects to receive 8 bits (7 data bits+ l parity bit). Setting the TCS to use 8 data bits and no parity does not cause a Framing Errormessage, because the framing formats actually do match−they are both set for 8 bits. Neither enduses parity, so a Parity Error is not reported either. This kind of mistake can be avoided byhaving all applications set the host parameters and TCS parameters to exactly match.

Other possible communication problems that generate no messages include:

• Setting multidrop addresses but never using multidrop protocol or hardware

• Not setting multidrop addresses, then trying to use multidrop protocol or hardware

• Using a minimum 3-wire RS-232-E cable and attempting to implement control linehandshaking

• Connecting to the host using a null modem cable when a straight-through cable is required orvice-versa

• Setting XON/XOFF mode to OFF, then attempting to use software handshaking. (Thiseventually could result in a Buffer Overflow error.)

• Setting the TCS for LOCAL operation, then attempting to communicate with it from aremote host

• Setting a multidrop address but not saving it. If the host program now sends a Soft Resetcommand, the address reverts the “none” (default).

D-20

� &20021�23(5$725�352%/(06

� 6DYLQJ�'LVSOD\�$FWLYLW\�DV�2))Saving the Display Activity parameter as OFF (in the Setup Screen) can be mistaken for TCSfailure when the unit is next powered up or reset and there is no display activity. Anytime thedisplay is unexplainably dark, and remains so after a brief warm-up period, check the Set UpScreen first. If the TCS is operating properly, the Setup Screen will always display, regardless ofthe setting of Display Activity. However, if any operator lockouts are in effect, the Setup Screenmay not be accessible through the keyboard or the SET UP switch and may require a commandfrom the host, or power to be cycled.

For example, it is possible for the operator to enter the Setup Screen at power up and saveDisplay Activity OFF. Then a program sets the Setup Lockout Mode (<ESC> [> 5 h). There willbe no display activity, and attempts to enter the Setup Screen are ignored. If this is suspected tobe the case, first reset the Setup Lockout Mode (<ESC> [ > 5 l), or cycle power. Then try againto enter the Setup Screen. If there is still no display activity, there may be a hardware failurewithin the TCS.

Similarly, if Display Activity is saved as OFF, then the host sends a Keyboard Lockout command(<ESC>[ 2 h), the keyboard Set Up key will not function. However, in this case, the Setup Screenis still accessible by way of the rear-panel SET UP switch.

� ,QFRUUHFWO\�6HOHFWLQJ�2WKHU�6HWXS�6FUHHQ�3DUDPHWHUVIn addition to Display Activity, any other Setup Screen parameters could be selected incorrectlyby an operator. The Setup Lockout command ensures that Setup parameters are not inadvertentlychanged, which could result in errors. When Setup Lockout mode is not used, the operator hasaccess to all the communication parameters (baud rate, stop bits, and so on), and therefore coulddisrupt TCS-host communications. Follow these precautions to ensure this does not occur.

1. Make operators aware of the importance of leaving the Setup Parameters as they are.

2. Use the Setup Lockout Mode command early in all programs.

� 7RXFKLQJ�WKH�'LVSOD\�GXULQJ�7UDQVLWLRQTouching the display while the TCS is in transition between stored screens or to a new set oftouchkey programming can result in unexpected behavior, specifically:

• If a stored screen is copied to the Displayed Screen while an automatic visual response is inprogress because a press or auto-repeat touchkey is being pressed, the visual response isprematurely terminated. In the case of auto-repeat touchkeys, auto-repeating is alsoterminated.

• When a stored screen is copied to the Displayed Screen and the touch panel is pressedthroughout the transition to the new screen, the user’s finger must be lifted and the touchpanel pressed again for any touch reports to be sent or for responses to occur on the newscreen.

The TCS behaves in a manner consistent with the usual expectations of both the programmer andthe user. It is best to avoid using auto-repeat touchkeys to initiate screen copy operations.

D-21

� 23(5$7,21$/�67$786�5(3257�7$%/(This table explains the reports that can be displayed in the Operational Status Window of theSetup Screen. Also shown are the messages that can be communicated to the host via the RequestError Status command or the Error Interrupt Mode command.

NOTEThe term ’Expansion Memory’ is used in several of the following messages and refers to the 96K of

nonvolatile memory available for Screen and Dynamic Font storage.

OPERATIONAL STATUS REPORT HOST MESSAGE

� 6HOI�WHVWV�2.���DPRXQW!�W\SH!�([SDQVLRQ�0HPRU\ �(6&!�>!������Q

The TCS has performed all power-up self tests without detecting any errors. The <amount>and <type> are always set to 96K and nonvolatile RAM.

� ([SDQVLRQ�PHPRU\�LV�YRODWLOH �(6&!>!�����2Q

This message indicates that data was not preserved within Expansion Memory. This normallyoccurs the first time the TCS is powered up or the memory is re-initialized from the setupscreen.

5$0�WHVW�HUURU�DW�DGGUHVV����DGGUHVV!���GHYLFH! �(6&!�>!������Q

An error was detected when the TCS was executing its RAM test. In the Operational StatusReport, <address> indicates the address where the failure occurred, and <device> is thereference designator of the failing device.

1RQYRODWLOH�PHPRU\�FKHFNVXP�HUURU����VXP!���GHYLFH! �(6&!�>!������Q

When the TCS executed the Nonvolatile Memory Checksum Test or Recall Command,nonvolatile memory contained an incorrect checksum and the contents have been corrupted. Ifthis error occurs in the nonvolatile setup memory device, the TCS automatically reverts to thefactory default values.

520�FKHFNVXP�HUURU����VXP!���GHYLFH� �(6&!�>!������Q

The TCS has detected an invalid checksum within one of the program ROM devices during aROM Checksum Test. In the Operational Status Report, <sum> indicates the invalid sum, and<device> is the reference designator of the failing device.

7RXFK�GLVDEOHG��WRXFK�FORVXUH�DW�FHOO����QXP! �(6&!�>!������Q7RXFK�GLVDEOHG��WZR�FORVXUHV�LQ�VDPH�URZ

The TCS detected one or more touch cells as closed during the Touch Panel test. When thistype of error occurs, the touch panel is automatically disabled (until subsequent reset orpower-up) to avoid flooding the Host with invalid touch reports.

D-22

&RPPXQLFDWLRQV�IUDPLQJ�HUURU �(6&!>!������Q

The TCS received a code from the host but did not detect a stop bit. The code is lost, and anFE character is printed in its place. The host interface may not be configured to the properframing format (see Communication Commands).

&RPPXQLFDWLRQV�RYHUUXQ�HUURU �(6&!>!������Q

A code received from the host was overwritten by a subsequent code before it could beconsumed. The code is lost, and an 0E character is printed in its place.

&RPPXQLFDWLRQV�SDULW\�HUURU �(6&!>!������Q

The TCS has received a code from the host with incorrect parity. The code is lost, and a ~E

character is printed in its place. The host interface may not be configured to the properframing format (see Communication Commands).

&RPPXQLFDWLRQV�EXIIHU�RYHUIORZ �(6&!>!������Q

One or more codes received from the host overflowed the input buffer and were lost. It mayalso indicate that scrolling was locked and local input overflowed the local input buffer. Thiswould only be the case if Local/Remote Mode was set to Local or if Local Echo was enabled.

When this Report occurs, the codes are lost, and a single B0 character is printed in their place.

The host may not be responding to flow control generated by the TCS. See the discussion onHost Interface Flow Control in Chapter 2.

([SDQVLRQ�PHPRU\�IXOO�HUURU �(6&!>!������Q

A command cannot be completed properly because optional Expansion Memory is full. Theerror can occur whenever a command requires more Expansion Memory than is currentlyavailable. This happens whenever Expansion Memory is full or an attempt is made toreference a stored screen when there is no Expansion Memory installed. To resolve this errorcondition, simplify or delete one or more stored screens.

The following situations can cause Expansion Memory Full errors:

COPY SCREEN

The source or a destination screen does not yet exist, and there is not enough room to create it.The command prematurely terminates, and the screen that caused the error is not created.

As screens increase in complexity, they require more memory space. If the screen beingcopied to becomes so complex that it causes a memory overflow error to occur, the commandprematurely terminates, and the screen is left unchanged.

SELECT SCREEN

The selected screen does not yet exist and there is not enough room to create it. The selectedscreen is not created, and the previously selected screen remains selected.

-or

The previously selected screen has increased enough in complexity while being edited thatthere is no longer enough room to store it. The previously selected screen remains selected.

D-23

([SDQVLRQ�PHPRU\�XQLQLWLDOL]HG�HUURU �(6&!�>!��������Q

The TCS has encountered a nonvolatile Expansion Memory device that has never beenprogrammed or is improperly programmed for the current configuration.

An Expansion Memory Uninitialized error can only occur during power-up or reset when theTCS reads the Expansion Memory configuration and performs automatic self-tests. Duringnormal operation, the error should never occur following a Reset command.